Honeywell Silent Knight 6820 Fire Alarm Control Panel manual
Fire Alarm Systems · 10 Q&As

Honeywell Silent Knight 6820 Fire Alarm Control Panel

Ask AI

— answers from the official manual

Answers from the official manual.

Common questions

Common Questions

10 total
1

How many software zones and output groups can the 6820 support?

The 6820 supports 999 software zones and 999 output groups, providing flexibility in system configuration for various fire alarm applications. (Page 10)

2

What is the maximum number of addressable devices the 6820 panel can support?

The basic 6820 panel contains one built-in signaling line circuit (SLC) which supports up to 159 SK sensors and 159 SK modules, or 127 SD SLC devices. Additional SLC expanders like the 6815 (supporting up to 159 SK sensors and 159 SK modules each) can be added for a maximum of 1,110 points per 6820 control panel, while the 5815XL supports SD Protocol devices only for a maximum of 635 points per panel. (Page 10)

3

What are the recommended environmental conditions for installing the 6820 system?

The system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49°C (32-120°F) and at a relative humidity of 93% ± 2% RH (non-condensing) at 32°C ± 2°C (90°F ± 3°F). However, the useful life of standby batteries and electronic components may be adversely affected by extreme temperatures and humidity, so it is recommended that the system be installed in an environment with a normal room temperature of 15-27°C (60-80°F). (Page 3)

4

What precautions must be taken before removing or inserting circuit boards?

Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards, as failure to do so can damage circuits. Additionally, do not attempt to install, service, or operate the unit until manuals are read and understood, as control unit and associated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. (Page 3)

5

How tight should screw terminals be tightened?

Do not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs, as over-tightening may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. (Page 3)

6

What is required after any programming operation or change in software?

To ensure proper system operation, the product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Re-acceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring, with all affected components tested 100% and at least 10% of initiating devices not directly affected tested as well. (Page 3)

Show 4 more questions

Full Manual

170 pages
Page 1

6820/6820Evs

Addressable Fire Alarm Conrol Panel Manual Document LS10144-001SK-E Rev: E

4/6/2022 Ecn: 151062

Page 2

2 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Fire Alarm & Emergency Communication System Limitations While a life safety system may lower insurance rates, it is not a substitute for life and property insurance! An automatic fire alarm system—typically made up of smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control panel (FACP) with remote notification capability—can provide early warning of a developing fire. Such a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. An emergency communication system—typically made up of an automatic fire alarm system (as described above) and a life safety communication system that may include an autonomous control unit (ACU), local operating console (LOC), voice communication, and other various interoperable communication methods—can broadcast a mass notification message. Such a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire or life safety event. The Manufacturer recommends that smoke and/or heat detectors be located throughout a protected premises following the recommendations of the current edition of the National Fire Protection Association Standard 72 (NFPA 72), manufacturer's recommendations, State and local codes, and the recommendations contained in the Guide for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which is made available at no charge to all installing dealers. This document can be found at http://www.systemsensor.com/appguides/. A study by the Federal Emergency Management Agency (an agency of the United States government) indicated that smoke detectors may not go off in as many as 35% of all fires. While fire alarm systems are designed to provide early warning against fire, they do not guarantee warning or protection against fire. A fire alarm system may not provide timely or adequate warning, or simply may not function, for a variety of reasons: Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys, in or behind walls, on roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second-floor detector, for example, may not sense a first-floor or basement fire. Particles of combustion or “smoke” from a developing fire may not reach the sensing chambers of smoke detectors because: • Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors, walls, chimneys, even wet or humid areas may inhibit particle or smoke flow. • Smoke particles may become “cold,” stratify, and not reach the ceiling or upper walls where detectors are located. • Smoke particles may be blown away from detectors by air outlets, such as air conditioning vents. • Smoke particles may be drawn into air returns before reaching the detector. The amount of “smoke” present may be insufficient to alarm smoke detectors. Smoke detectors are designed to alarm at various levels of smoke density. If such density levels are not created by a developing fire at the location of detectors, the detectors will not go into alarm. Smoke detectors, even when working properly, have sensing limitations. Detectors that have photoelectronic sensing chambers tend to detect smoldering fires better than flaming fires, which have little visible smoke. Detectors that have ionizing-type sensing chambers tend to detect fast-flaming fires better than smoldering fires. Because fires develop in different ways and are often unpredictable in their growth, neither type of detector is necessarily best and a given type of detector may not provide adequate warning of a fire. Smoke detectors cannot be expected to provide adequate warning of fires caused by arson, children playing with matches (especially in bedrooms), smoking in bed, and violent explosions (caused by escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, etc.). Heat detectors do not sense particles of combustion and alarm only when heat on their sensors increases at a predetermined rate or reaches a predetermined level. Rate-of-rise heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For this reason, the rate-of- rise feature of each detector should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire protection specialist. Heat detectors are designed to protect property, not life. IMPORTANT! Smoke detectors must be installed in the same room as the control panel and in rooms used by the system for the connection of alarm transmission wiring, communications, signaling, and/or power. If detectors are not so located, a developing fire may damage the alarm system, compromising its ability to report a fire. Audible warning devices such as bells, horns, strobes, speakers and displays may not alert people if these devices are located on the other side of closed or partly open doors or are located on another floor of a building. Any warning device may fail to alert people with a disability or those who have recently consumed drugs, alcohol, or medication. Please note that: • An emergency communication system may take priority over a fire alarm system in the event of a life safety emergency. • Voice messaging systems must be designed to meet intelligibility requirements as defined by NFPA, local codes, and Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). • Language and instructional requirements must be clearly dissemi- nated on any local displays. • Strobes can, under certain circumstances, cause seizures in peo- ple with conditions such as epilepsy. • Studies have shown that certain people, even when they hear a fire alarm signal, do not respond to or comprehend the meaning of the signal. Audible devices, such as horns and bells, can have dif- ferent tonal patterns and frequencies. It is the property owner's responsibility to conduct fire drills and other training exercises to make people aware of fire alarm signals and instruct them on the proper reaction to alarm signals. • In rare instances, the sounding of a warning device can cause temporary or permanent hearing loss. A life safety system will not operate without any electrical power. If AC power fails, the system will operate from standby batteries only for a specified time and only if the batteries have been properly maintained and replaced regularly. Equipment used in the system may not be technically compatible with the control panel. It is essential to use only equipment listed for service with your control panel. Alarm Signaling Communications: • IP connections rely on available bandwidth, which could be lim- ited if the network is shared by multiple users or if ISP policies impose restrictions on the amount of data transmitted. Service packages must be carefully chosen to ensure that alarm signals will always have available bandwidth. Outages by the ISP for maintenance and upgrades may also inhibit alarm signals. For added protection, a backup cellular connection is recommended. • Cellular connections rely on a strong signal. Signal strength can be adversely affected by the network coverage of the cellular car- rier, objects and structural barriers at the installation location. Uti- lize a cellular carrier that has reliable network coverage where the alarm system is installed. For added protection, utilize an external antenna to boost the signal. • Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily disabled. For added protection against telephone line failure, backup alarm signaling connections are recommended. The most common cause of life safety system malfunction is inadequate maintenance. To keep the entire life safety system in excellent working order, ongoing maintenance is required per the manufacturer's recommendations, and UL and NFPA standards. At a minimum, the requirements of NFPA 72 shall be followed. Environments with large amounts of dust, dirt, or high air velocity require more frequent maintenance. A maintenance agreement should be arranged through the local manufacturer's representative. Maintenance should be scheduled as required by National and/or local fire codes and should be performed by authorized professional life safety system installers only. Adequate written records of all inspections should be kept. Limit-F-2020

Page 3

6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 3 Installation Precautions Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: WARNING - Several different sources of power can be con- nected to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and associated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules, or inter- connecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, or operate this unit until manuals are read and under- stood. CAUTION - System Re-acceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Re-acceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring. All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper sys- tem operation verified. This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49º C/32- 120º F and at a relative humidity 93% ± 2% RH (non-condensing) at 32°C ± 2°C (90°F ± 3°F). However, the useful life of the system's standby batteries and the electronic components may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment with a normal room temperature of 15-27º C/60-80º F. Verify that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device voltage. Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is completely immune from lightning transients and interference, proper grounding will reduce susceptibil- ity. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to an increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Services Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits. Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, ream- ing, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, transformer, or printed circuit board location. Do not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over-tightening may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. This system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed from the body. Use static suppres- sive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the unit. Units with a touchscreen display should be cleaned with a dry, clean, lint free/microfiber cloth. If additional cleaning is required, apply a small amount of Isopropyl alcohol to the cloth and wipe clean. Do not use detergents, solvents, or water for cleaning. Do not spray liquid directly onto the display. Follow the instructions in the installation, operating, and program- ming manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and associated equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper installation. Precau-D2-11-2017 FCC Warning WARNING: This equipment generates, uses, and can radi- ate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause interfer- ence to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class A computing devices pur- suant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which is designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when devices are operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense. Canadian Requirements This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radiation noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Depart- ment of Communications. Le present appareil numerique n'emet pas de bruits radio- electriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe A prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du Canada. Flexput®, Honeywell®, JumpStart®, Silent Knight®, and SWIFT® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc.Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. Chrome™ and Google™ are trademarks of Google Inc. Firefox® is a registered trademark of The Mozilla Foundation. ©2022. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited.

Page 4

4 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Software Downloads In order to supply the latest features and functionality in fire alarm and life safety technology to our customers, we make frequent upgrades to the embedded software in our products. To ensure that you are installing and programming the latest features, we strongly recommend that you download the most current version of software for each product prior to commissioning any system. Contact Technical Support with any questions about software and the appropriate version for a specific application. Documentation Feedback Your feedback helps us keep our documentation up-to-date and accurate. If you have any comments or suggestions about our online Help or printed manuals, you can email us. Please include the following information: • Product name and version number (if applicable) • Printed manual or online Help • Topic Title (for online Help) • Page number (for printed manual) • Brief description of content you think should be improved or corrected • Your suggestion for how to correct/improve documentation Send email messages to: FireSystems.TechPubs@honeywell.com Please note this email address is for documentation feedback only. If you have any technical issues, please contact Technical Services. This symbol (shown left) on the product(s) and / or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling, contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. Electrical and electronic equipment contains materials, parts and substances, which can be dangerous to the environment and harmful to human health if the waste of electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) is not disposed of correctly.

Page 5

6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 5 Table of Contents Section 1: Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 10 1.1: Basic System Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................10 1.1.1: Hardware Features................................................................................................................................................................................10 1.1.2: Common Communication / Annunciation Link System Hardware Features .......................................................................................10 1.1.3: Software Features .................................................................................................................................................................................10 1.1.4: 6820EVS Features ................................................................................................................................................................................11 1.2: Terms Used in this Manual ..............................................................................................................................................................................11 1.3: Compatible Products........................................................................................................................................................................................12 1.4: Related Documentation ...................................................................................................................................................................................13 Section 2: Agency Listings, Approvals, and Requirements........................................................................................ 14 2.1: Federal Communications Commission (FCC).................................................................................................................................................14 2.2: Underwriters Laboratories (UL)......................................................................................................................................................................15 2.2.1: Requirements for All Installations........................................................................................................................................................15 2.2.2: UL 864 9th and 10th Edition ................................................................................................................................................................15 2.2.3: Requirements for Central Station Fire Alarm Systems ........................................................................................................................15 2.2.4: Requirements for Local Protected Fire Alarm Systems .......................................................................................................................15 2.2.5: Requirements for Remote Station Protected Fire Alarm Systems........................................................................................................15 2.2.6: Requirements for the Installation of Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detection and Warning Equipment, NFPA 720..................................15 2.2.7: NFPA Requirements.............................................................................................................................................................................16 Section 3: Before You Begin Installation ...................................................................................................................... 17 3.1: Inventory..........................................................................................................................................................................................................17 3.2: Environmental Specifications..........................................................................................................................................................................17 3.3: Software Downloads........................................................................................................................................................................................17 3.4: Electrical Specifications ..................................................................................................................................................................................17 3.5: Calculating Current Draw and Standby Battery ..............................................................................................................................................18 3.5.1: Current Draw Worksheet Requirements...............................................................................................................................................18 3.5.2: Current Draw Worksheet for SK SLC Devices....................................................................................................................................19 3.5.3: Current Draw Worksheet for SD SLC Devices....................................................................................................................................22 3.5.4: Maximum Battery Standby Load..........................................................................................................................................................25 Section 4: Control Panel Installation............................................................................................................................. 26 4.1: Mounting the Control Panel Cabinet ...............................................................................................................................................................26 4.1.1: Preventing Water Damage....................................................................................................................................................................26 4.1.2: Removing the 6820 Assembly from the Housing.................................................................................................................................26 4.1.3: Ethernet Connection .............................................................................................................................................................................26 4.2: Board Assembly Diagram................................................................................................................................................................................27 4.3: Wiring Specifications.......................................................................................................................................................................................28 4.4: AC Power Connection .....................................................................................................................................................................................29 4.5: Battery Power ..................................................................................................................................................................................................29 4.5.1: Battery Accessory Cabinets..................................................................................................................................................................30 4.6: SBUS Wiring ...................................................................................................................................................................................................31 4.6.1: Calculating Wiring Distance for SBUS Modules.................................................................................................................................32 4.6.2: Wiring Configurations..........................................................................................................................................................................33 4.7: 6855 Remote Annunciator Installation ............................................................................................................................................................34 4.7.1: Mounting the 6855................................................................................................................................................................................34 4.7.2: 6855 Connection to the Panel...............................................................................................................................................................36 4.8: 5860 Remote Annunciator Installation ............................................................................................................................................................37 4.8.1: Mounting the 5860................................................................................................................................................................................37 4.9: 6860 Remote Annunciator Installation ............................................................................................................................................................39 4.9.1: Mounting the 6860................................................................................................................................................................................40 4.9.2: 6860 Connection to the Panel...............................................................................................................................................................41 4.10: 5815XL Installation ......................................................................................................................................................................................41 4.10.1: 5815XL Connection to the Panel........................................................................................................................................................42 4.11: 6815 Installation.............................................................................................................................................................................................42 4.11.1: 6815 Connection to the Panel.............................................................................................................................................................43 4.12: 5824 Serial/Parallel Interface Module Installation........................................................................................................................................43 4.12.1: Selecting 5824 Options.......................................................................................................................................................................44 4.13: 5880 LED I/O Module...................................................................................................................................................................................44 4.13.1: 5880 Board Layout .............................................................................................................................................................................45 4.13.2: FACP Connection...............................................................................................................................................................................45

Page 6

6 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Table of Contents 4.13.3: LED Wiring ........................................................................................................................................................................................45 4.13.4: Dry Contact Wiring ............................................................................................................................................................................46 4.14: 5865-3 / 5865-4 LED Annunciator Installation.............................................................................................................................................47 4.14.1: FACP Connection...............................................................................................................................................................................47 4.14.2: 5865 Mounting....................................................................................................................................................................................48 4.15: Configuring SBUS Modules..........................................................................................................................................................................48 4.15.1: Assigning SBUS Module IDs.............................................................................................................................................................48 4.15.2: SBUS Bandwidth Considerations.......................................................................................................................................................49 4.16: Telephone Connection ...................................................................................................................................................................................49 4.17: Flexput I/O Circuits .......................................................................................................................................................................................50 4.17.1: Conventional Notification Appliance.................................................................................................................................................50 4.17.2: Conventional Input Switch Circuits....................................................................................................................................................51 4.17.3: Installing 2-Wire Smoke Detectors ....................................................................................................................................................52 4.17.4: Installing 4-Wire Smoke Detectors ....................................................................................................................................................53 4.17.5: Auxiliary Power Installation...............................................................................................................................................................54 4.18: Onboard Relays (Conventional) ....................................................................................................................................................................55 4.18.1: Trouble Relay .....................................................................................................................................................................................55 4.18.2: Programmable Relays.........................................................................................................................................................................55 4.19: Remote Station Applications .........................................................................................................................................................................55 4.19.1: Keltron Model 3158 Installation.........................................................................................................................................................55 4.19.2: City Box Connection Using the 5220 Module ...................................................................................................................................56 4.19.3: Using the Addressable Relay Module for City Box Connection........................................................................................................57 4.19.4: NFPA 72 Polarity Reversal ................................................................................................................................................................58 4.19.5: Transmitter Activated by Dry Contacts..............................................................................................................................................60 Section 5: Common Communications Link .................................................................................................................. 61 5.1: Network System Hardware Features ...............................................................................................................................................................61 5.1.1: Panels....................................................................................................................................................................................................61 5.1.2: Wiring Options to Connect Panels .......................................................................................................................................................61 5.2: SK-NIC Connection Options...........................................................................................................................................................................61 5.3: SK-NIC Wiring Options ..................................................................................................................................................................................62 5.3.1: Fiber Loop Modules .............................................................................................................................................................................62 5.3.2: SK-NIC Installation..............................................................................................................................................................................63 5.3.3: SK-NIC Remote Mounting...................................................................................................................................................................63 5.3.4: Wiring...................................................................................................................................................................................................64 5.4: Setting the ID for Each Panel ..........................................................................................................................................................................66 Section 6: Network Management ................................................................................................................................... 67 6.1: Network Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................................................................................67 6.1.1: Ping Panel.............................................................................................................................................................................................67 6.1.2: Data Network Status.............................................................................................................................................................................67 6.1.3: Voice Network Status...........................................................................................................................................................................67 6.2: Network Programming ....................................................................................................................................................................................67 6.2.1: Learn Network......................................................................................................................................................................................67 6.2.2: Edit Network Names.............................................................................................................................................................................67 6.2.3: Edit Panel ID.........................................................................................................................................................................................67 6.2.4: Computer Access..................................................................................................................................................................................68 6.2.5: Access Codes........................................................................................................................................................................................68 6.2.6: Communicator Options.........................................................................................................................................................................68 6.3: Voice Options...................................................................................................................................................................................................69 6.3.1: Edit Timers ...........................................................................................................................................................................................69 6.3.2: Edit Voice Commands..........................................................................................................................................................................70 6.4: Sync Network Options.....................................................................................................................................................................................71 6.5: Network Management Quick Reference .........................................................................................................................................................72 Section 7: Programming Overview................................................................................................................................ 74 7.1: JumpStart Auto-Programming.........................................................................................................................................................................74 7.1.1: Input Points...........................................................................................................................................................................................74 7.1.2: Output Points ........................................................................................................................................................................................74 7.1.3: Running JumpStart Auto-Programming...............................................................................................................................................74 7.2: Mapping Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................................................75 7.2.1: Input Point Mapping.............................................................................................................................................................................76 7.2.2: Output Circuit Mapping........................................................................................................................................................................76

Page 7

6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 7 Table of Contents 7.2.3: Event Mapping.....................................................................................................................................................................................77 7.2.4: Mapping LED Points............................................................................................................................................................................78 7.3: Programming Using the HFSS Software Suite................................................................................................................................................78 7.4: Programming Using an Annunciator ...............................................................................................................................................................79 7.4.1: Entering / Exiting Panel Programming.................................................................................................................................................79 7.5: Programming Menu Quick Reference.............................................................................................................................................................80 Section 8: Programming................................................................................................................................................. 90 8.1: UL 864 / UL 2572 Programming Requirements..............................................................................................................................................90 8.2: Modules ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................90 8.2.1: Edit Modules.........................................................................................................................................................................................90 8.2.2: Adding a Module..................................................................................................................................................................................91 8.2.3: Deleting a Module ................................................................................................................................................................................91 8.2.4: View Module List.................................................................................................................................................................................91 8.3: Zone .................................................................................................................................................................................................................92 8.3.1: Edit Zone ..............................................................................................................................................................................................92 8.3.2: View Zone Points .................................................................................................................................................................................94 8.4: Group ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................94 8.4.1: Edit Group ............................................................................................................................................................................................94 8.4.2: View Group Points ...............................................................................................................................................................................95 8.4.3: Edit OPG Template...............................................................................................................................................................................95 8.5: Point.................................................................................................................................................................................................................95 8.5.1: Point Programming For 5815XL Module.............................................................................................................................................95 8.5.2: Point Programming For 6815 Module..................................................................................................................................................97 8.5.3: Point Programming For Internal or External Power Module (5895XL) ............................................................................................100 8.5.4: Point Programming for 5880/5865 Modules ......................................................................................................................................101 8.5.5: Point Programming for the 5496 ........................................................................................................................................................101 8.5.6: Point Programming for EVS Amplifiers ............................................................................................................................................102 8.5.7: Point Programming for EVS-VCM, and EVS-RVM .........................................................................................................................102 8.6: System Options..............................................................................................................................................................................................104 8.6.1: Communication Options.....................................................................................................................................................................104 8.6.2: Time Options ......................................................................................................................................................................................106 8.6.3: Miscellaneous Options........................................................................................................................................................................107 8.6.4: Daylight Saving Options.....................................................................................................................................................................108 8.6.5: Edit Banner .........................................................................................................................................................................................108 8.6.6: SLC Family.........................................................................................................................................................................................108 8.6.7: JumpStart Auto-Programming............................................................................................................................................................109 8.7: Restore Defaults.............................................................................................................................................................................................109 8.8: Voice Options.................................................................................................................................................................................................109 8.8.1: VCM Maintenance..............................................................................................................................................................................109 8.8.2: Voice Settings.....................................................................................................................................................................................109 Section 9: System Operation........................................................................................................................................ 110 9.1: Annunciator Description................................................................................................................................................................................110 9.1.1: LCD Display.......................................................................................................................................................................................111 9.1.2: Banner.................................................................................................................................................................................................112 9.2: Menu System ................................................................................................................................................................................................112 9.2.1: Panel Login Menu...............................................................................................................................................................................112 9.2.2: Main Menu Overview.........................................................................................................................................................................113 9.2.3: Using the Menus.................................................................................................................................................................................114 9.3: Basic Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................................114 9.3.1: Setting Time and Date ........................................................................................................................................................................114 9.3.2: Disable / Enable a Point......................................................................................................................................................................114 9.3.3: View Event History ............................................................................................................................................................................114 9.3.4: Conduct a Fire Drill............................................................................................................................................................................115 9.3.5: Conduct an Indicator Test...................................................................................................................................................................115 9.3.6: Conduct a Walk Test ..........................................................................................................................................................................115 9.3.7: Conduct a Communicator Test...........................................................................................................................................................115 9.3.8: Manual AlarmNet Registration...........................................................................................................................................................115 9.3.9: Silence Alarms or Troubles ................................................................................................................................................................115 9.3.10: Reset Alarms.....................................................................................................................................................................................116 9.3.11: Check Detector Sensitivity Through Point Status ...........................................................................................................................116 9.3.12: View Status of a Point ......................................................................................................................................................................118

Page 8

8 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Table of Contents 9.3.13: View Alarms or Troubles .................................................................................................................................................................118 9.3.14: System Information .........................................................................................................................................................................118 9.4: Event Priority.................................................................................................................................................................................................119 9.4.1: System Control ...................................................................................................................................................................................119 9.4.2: System Override .................................................................................................................................................................................119 9.4.3: Event Priority......................................................................................................................................................................................119 9.4.4: Priority Rules......................................................................................................................................................................................120 9.4.5: Other Priority Considerations.............................................................................................................................................................120 9.5: Operation Mode Behavior .............................................................................................................................................................................120 9.5.1: Multi-Site Annunciator and Multi-Site User Access..........................................................................................................................123 9.6: Releasing Operations.....................................................................................................................................................................................123 9.6.1: Single Interlock Zone Releasing.........................................................................................................................................................124 9.6.2: Double Interlock Zone Releasing .......................................................................................................................................................124 9.7: Smoke Alarm Verification .............................................................................................................................................................................125 9.8: Function Keys...............................................................................................................................................................................................125 9.8.1: Recording an F-Key Macro ................................................................................................................................................................125 9.8.2: Aborting an F-Key Macro Recording Session....................................................................................................................................125 9.8.3: Erasing an F-Key Macro.....................................................................................................................................................................125 9.8.4: Using a Recorded F-Key Macro.........................................................................................................................................................126 9.8.5: F-Key Status Event.............................................................................................................................................................................126 9.8.6: F-Key Map Inhibit..............................................................................................................................................................................126 Section 10: Emergency Voice System Operation....................................................................................................... 127 10.1: Overview......................................................................................................................................................................................................127 10.2: LOC Functionality.......................................................................................................................................................................................127 10.2.1: Keys and LEDs.................................................................................................................................................................................127 10.2.2: Gaining EVS Control........................................................................................................................................................................128 10.2.3: Manual EVS......................................................................................................................................................................................128 10.2.4: Fire Page Mode.................................................................................................................................................................................129 10.2.5: Message Mode..................................................................................................................................................................................129 10.2.6: Custom EVS Event...........................................................................................................................................................................130 10.2.7: Passing EVS Control ........................................................................................................................................................................130 10.2.8: Exit EVS Control Menu....................................................................................................................................................................130 10.2.9: Relinquish EVS Control ...................................................................................................................................................................131 10.2.10: EVS Reset.......................................................................................................................................................................................131 10.3: EVS Super User...........................................................................................................................................................................................131 10.4: EVS Point Functionality..............................................................................................................................................................................131 10.4.1: EVS Point Activations......................................................................................................................................................................131 10.4.2: EVS-VCM and EVS-RVM Points....................................................................................................................................................131 10.5: Amplifier Programming...............................................................................................................................................................................131 10.5.1: Adding an Amplifier.........................................................................................................................................................................131 10.5.2: Editing an Amplifier.........................................................................................................................................................................132 10.6: LOC Programming ......................................................................................................................................................................................132 10.6.1: Adding an LOC.................................................................................................................................................................................132 10.6.2: Editing an LOC.................................................................................................................................................................................132 10.7: Using the Microphone .................................................................................................................................................................................133 10.7.1: Microphone Functionality ................................................................................................................................................................133 10.7.2: Custom EVS Event...........................................................................................................................................................................133 10.7.3: Fire Page ...........................................................................................................................................................................................133 10.7.4: Emergency Page ...............................................................................................................................................................................133 10.7.5: Paging ...............................................................................................................................................................................................133 10.8: Recording Custom Messages.......................................................................................................................................................................133 10.8.1: Recording Messages 1-15 Using Aux Audio Input..........................................................................................................................134 10.8.2: Recording Messages 1-15 Using the Microphone............................................................................................................................135 10.8.3: Erasing User Message.......................................................................................................................................................................136 10.8.4: Using HFSS Voice Message Load Software....................................................................................................................................136 Section 11: Reporting ................................................................................................................................................... 138 11.1: Receivers Compatible with the Control Panel.............................................................................................................................................138 11.2: SIA - Panel PI Modifier Reporting ..............................................................................................................................................................147 11.3: SIA – Panel Communicator .........................................................................................................................................................................148

Page 9

6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 9 Table of Contents Section 12: Testing and Troubleshooting................................................................................................................... 149 12.1: Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................................................................................................................149 12.1.1: Common Problems ...........................................................................................................................................................................149 12.2: Periodic Testing and Maintenance...............................................................................................................................................................149 12.3: Event History...............................................................................................................................................................................................150 12.4: Built-in Troubleshooting and Testing Tools ................................................................................................................................................150 12.4.1: SLC Device Locater .........................................................................................................................................................................150 12.4.2: SLC Multiple Device Locater...........................................................................................................................................................150 12.4.3: I/O Point Control ..............................................................................................................................................................................151 12.4.4: Earth Fault Resistance ......................................................................................................................................................................151 Section 13: Installation Records.................................................................................................................................. 153 13.1: Detector and Module Point Record .............................................................................................................................................................153 13.2: Additional SLC Devices ..............................................................................................................................................................................155 13.3: Conventional Output Point Record..............................................................................................................................................................156 Appendix A: Editing Text Using the Built-In Programmer......................................................................................... 157 A.1: Characters Used for Editing Text..................................................................................................................................................................157 A.2: Example Name Edit......................................................................................................................................................................................157 Appendix B: Expanded Receiver/Panel Relationship................................................................................................ 158 Appendix C: Cadence Patterns.................................................................................................................................... 159 Appendix D: Panel Security.......................................................................................................................................... 160 Model 6820 Basic Operating Instructions................................................................................................................... 161 Model 6820EVS Basic Operating Instructions............................................................................................................ 163 Keypad and LED Indicators.......................................................................................................................................... 165 EVS Control.................................................................................................................................................................... 167

Page 10

10 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Section 1: Introduction The 6820 and 6820EVS are analog addressable fire alarm control panels (FACP), that meets the requirements of UL 864. The 6820EVSana- log addressable fire control system combined with an Emergency Voice System that meet the requirements for Mass Notification as described in UL 864 and UL 2572.

1.1 Basic System Overview The 6820 is an addressable system with a built-in annunciator that can also be used to program the system. 1.1.1 Hardware Features • The basic 6820 panel contains one built-in signaling line circuit (SLC), which supports up to 159 SK sensors and 159 SK modules or 127 SD SLC devices. Additional SLC loops can be added to increase overall point capacity. • Additional 6815 SLC expanders supports 159 SK sensors and 159 SK modules for a maximum of 1,110 points per 6820 control panel. • Additional 5815XL SLC expander supports only SD Protocol for a maximum of 635 points per 6820 control panel. • 6.0A of output power is available through 6 sets of terminals for notification and auxiliary applications. Each circuit is power limited per UL 864 and can source up to 3.0A (total output power must not exceed 6.0A). The constant auxiliary power load must not exceed 3.0A for normal standby. • Built-in dual phone line, digital alarm communicator/transmitter (DACT), IP, or optional cellular technologies • Reports events to central station by point or by zone • UL-Listed for pre-action and deluge releasing systems • Dedicated Form C trouble relay and two general purpose Form C programmable relays • Can be used with up to 16 model 6860, 5860, or 6855 remote annunciators in any combination (sold separately) • Supports the 5865-3, 5865-4, and 5880 LED annunciators for a maximum of 8 devices on the panel. See Section 4.13 and Section 4.14 for additional information on these models. • Printing of event log available through the 5824 serial/parallel printer interface module • Supports conventional 2-wire & 4-wire detectors using the 2 Flexput circuits or SLC zone modules • Add four notification/auxiliary power circuits with each 5496 Intelligent Power Module • Add six Flexput circuits with each 5895XL Remote Power Supply 1.1.2 Common Communication / Annunciation Link System Hardware Features The common communications and annunciation link allows up to 17 of the 6700, 6808, 6820, and 6820EVS panels to be connected via cop- per or fiber optic cable so that a designated panel is the communicator for all panels in the link. This is not a true peer-to-peer network and will not perform like one. • The default common communications link setup can contain up to 17- 6820 panels connected. • Common communications link support for up to 17 sites • Each building is referred to as a “site”. • Panels can be interconnected using CLASS B or CLASS A topology. • Use the SK-NIC Network Interface Card as a Common communications link. Copper wire or fiber optic cable panel connectivity can be used within the same linked system. • The common communication and annunciation architecture allows a designated panel to be the communicator for all the panels in the link. 1.1.3 Software Features • 999 software zones, 999 output groups • Advanced analog smoke detector features: – Automatic drift compensation – Maintenance alert region – Point status meets calibrated smoke test requirements for NFPA 72 • “JumpStart AutoProgramming” feature for easy programming • Non-volatile event history stores 1000 events per panel • A choice of output patterns available for notification outputs, including ANSI 3.41 temporal signal • Built-in synchronization appliance support for AMSECO®, Gentex®, System Sensor®, and Wheelock®

Note:

All references to the 6820 within this manual are applicable to the 6820 and 6820EVS unless otherwise indicated.

Note:

The system can support a maximum of 16 Intelligent Power modules, either the 5895XL or 5496, in any combination.

Page 11

6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 11 Terms Used in this Manual Introduction 1.1.4 6820EVS Features • EVS-VCM with built-in digital message repeater • 15 recordable, one-minute messages that can be mapped to eight EVS buttons • EVS messages can be selected as priority over fire • Support of up to 4 EVS-LOC Local Operator Consoles • Support for up to 4 (expandable to 8 with EVS-CE4) SBUS addressable amplifiers using a combination of EVS-50W, EVS-125W, EVS-INT50W, or EVS-100W for a maximum of 1,000 watts per system • Support for dual channel and backup audio using the EVS-100W amplifier and EVS-100WBU back-up amplifier • Single enclosure for both Fire and Emergency Control System components • Support for one EVS-VCM • Onboard supervised microphone 1.2 Terms Used in this Manual The following terminology is used with the above mentioned control panels: Term Description

Slc

Signaling line circuit Module The term module is used for all hardware devices except for SLC addressable devices and notification appliances. This includes the 6820 panel itself and the built-in power supply. It also refers to any (optional) 5815XL or 6815 SLC expansion modules. Input Point An addressable sensing device, such as a smoke or heat detector or a contact monitor device Input Zone A protected area made up of input points Output Point (or “Output Circuit”) A notification point or circuit for notification appliances. Relay circuits and auxiliary power circuits are also considered output points Group (“Output Group” or OPG) A group of output points. Operating characteristics are common to all output points in a group. Output (or “Cadence”) Pattern The pattern that the output will use, for example, Constant, March Code, ANSI 3.41. Applies to zones and special system events. See Appendix B for additional information. Mapping Mapping is the process of specifying which outputs are activated when certain events occur in the system. Section 7.2 explains mapping in detail. Common Communication Link Up to 17 panels can be linked. Consist of any combination of 17 panels of these model numbers: 6700, 6808, 6820, or 6820EVS. For reporting purposes only. Not a peer-to-peer networked system.

Evs

Emergency Voice System

Swift

Smart Wireless Integrated Fire Technology

Page 12

12 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Introduction Compatible Products 1.3 Compatible Products Table 1.1 lists the products available for use with the . Type of Device Model Description SK/IDP Addressable SLC Devices Refer to the Device Compatibility Document and SLC Wiring Manual for a list of compatible devices. SWIFT Wireless SLC Devices Refer to the SWIFT Wireless Manual for a list of compatible devices. Other Modules 5824 Serial/Parallel Printer Interface Module Allows a printer to be attached for the system for on-site logging. Four maximum per system. 5815XL (Rev H or above) SLC Expander Each 5815XL allows up to 127 SD devices to be added to the system. The number of 5815XLs that can be added to the system is limited only by the maximum number of SBUS devices. However the maximum SD point count is limited to 635 per panel. 5815XL will only support SD protocol devices

6815 Slc Expander

Each 6815 supports up to 159 SK sensors and 159 SK modules. The maximum point count for devices is limited to 1,110 per panel. The 6815 supports System Sensor (SK) devices only. 5895XL (Rev F or higher) Intelligent Power Module Provides additional power, six Flexput circuits, and two Form C relays. Maximum of 16 power modules per system. 5496 (Rev F or above) NAC Expander Provides four additional Notification Appliance Circuits/Auxiliary power. Maximum of 16 power modules per system. 6860 LCD Alarm Annunciator 4x40 LCD annunciator. Same operation, similar appearance as onboard annunciator. Any combination of supported annunciators for a max of 16. 5860 LCD Alarm Annunciator 4x20 LCD annunciator. Any combination of supported annunciators for a max of
  • 5860 is gray, 5860R is red.
  • 5860TR and 5860TG Trim Ring Kits for 5860 Trim ring kits for surface mounting the 5860 annunciator. 5860TG is gray, 5860TR is red. 5865-3 and 5865-4 LED Annunciators LED annunciator can display up to 30 LEDs (15 red and 15 yellow). 5865-4 has key switches for silence and reset, and a system trouble LED. Can be used in any combination with 5880, up to eight devices in a system. 5880 (Rev C or above) LED I/O Module Driver for up to 40 LEDs. Interfaces with customized annunciator boards. In addition, the 5880 has eight generic switch input points. Can be used in any combination with 5865, up to eight devices in a system. 5883 General Purpose Relay Module Provides 10 Form C relays. Designed to be driven by the 5880. Up to four 5883s can be used with each 5880 module. Audio Devices (for 6820EVS only)

    Evssw24

    24 Switch expander Refer to the Silent Knight EVS Series Installation Manual PN LS10062-001SK-E for more info on these accessories.

    Evs-Vcm

    Voice Control Module

    Evs50W

    50 watt audio amplifier

    Evs125W

    125 watt audio amplifier

    Evs-Int50W

    50 watt internal amplifier

    Evs-100W

    Dual Channel amplifier

    Evs-100Wbu

    Backup daughter card

    Evsce4

    Provides 4 additional audio circuits for the EVS50W or the EVS125W

    Evsrvm

    Remote Voice Microphone

    Evs-Loc

    Local Operating Console Networking

    Sknic

    Network Interface Card Refer to LS10172-001SK-E

    Sk-Fml

    Fiber-Optic Multi Mode, Receiver Refer to LS10178-001SK-E

    Sk-Fsl

    Fiber-Optic Single Mode, Transmitter Wireless

    Wsk-Wgi

    Wireless Gateway Refer to the SWIFT wireless Installation Manual P/N LS10036-000SK-E for more information on these accessories.

    Wsk-Photo

    Wireless Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/ 4" base

    Wsk-Photo-T

    Wireless photo/heat detector with 4" base

    Wskheat-Ror

    Wireless Heat Rate of Rise Heat Detector with 4” base

    Wsk-Heat

    Wireless 135° fixed Heat Detector with 4” base

    Wsk-Monitor

    Wireless Addressable Monitor module

    Wsk-Relay

    Wireless Addressable Relay module Table 1.1 Compatible Products

    Page 13

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 13 Related Documentation Introduction 1.4 Related Documentation Refer to the following documents for more information. Miscellaneous 7860 Telephone Cord RJ31X cord for connecting phone line to the 6820 HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite For communication and panel programming with a Windows-based computer. Enables remote viewing of detector status and event history.

    Rbb

    Remote Battery Box for mounting backup batteries up to 35AH that are too large to fit into the main control panel cabinet. Dimensions: 16" W x 10" H x 6" D (40.64 cm W x 25.4 cm H x 15.24 cm D)

    Rbb

    Remote Battery Box for mounting backup batteries that are too large to fit into the main control panel cabinet. Dimensions: 16" W x 10" H x 6" D (40.64 cm W x 25.4 cm H x 15.24 cm D).

    Cell-Mod

    Cellular board with Plastic Enclosure Refer to the CELL-CAB- SK/CELL-MOD Installation Manual P/N LS10182-001SK-E for more information.

    Cell-Cab-Sk

    Cellular board with Metal Enclosure. Lock & key Type of Device Model Description Table 1.1 Compatible Products (Continued) Title Document Number SLC Wiring Manual

    Ls10179-000Sk-E

    Device Compatibility Document

    Ls10167-004Sk-E

    5496 NAC Expander Manual

    151276-L8

    5824 Printer Interface Module Install Sheet 151392 5895XL Power Supply Manual

    151142-L8

    5865-3/4 Annunciator Install Sheet 151088 5880 LED Driver Install Sheet 150972 5883 Relay Module Install Sheet 151194 5860 Annunciator Install Sheet 151042 6855 Annunciator Install Sheet

    Ls10175-001Sk-E

    6860 Annunciator Install Sheet

    Ls10174-001Sk-E

    SK-NIC Network Card Install Sheet

    Ls10172-001Sk-E

    SK-FML/FSL Install Sheet

    Ls10178-001Sk-E

    MRD-1 Releasing Disconnect

    Ls10231-000Ge-E

    Table 1.2 Related Documentation

    Page 14

    14 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Section 2: Agency Listings, Approvals, and Requirements 2.1 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) The following information must be provided to the telephone company before the 6820 can be connected to the phone lines: This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by ACTA. On the inside cover of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord (not provided) and modular jack must be utilized with this prod- uct. It is designed to be used with a modular jack that is also compliant. The REN (ringer equivalence number) provided on this installation sheet is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to the public switched telephone network. This number must not exceed 5.0. Since this product has an REN of 1.0A, the number of devices is limited. The REN number is embedded in the FCC registration number as 10A. If the 6820 causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that the temporarily discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equip- ment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain unin- terrupted service. If trouble is experienced with the 6820, for repair or warranty information, contactHoneywell Silent Knight at 800.446.6444 or www.silent- knight.com. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the 6820 until the problem has been resolved. This product cannot be adjusted or repaired in the field. It must be returned to the factory for service. This equipment is not designed for use with party line service. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. You may contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information. Since the 6820 is a commercial fire alarm panel, it must be connected upstream of all other equipment utilizing the phone lines. If you have questions about the installation, contact your telephone company or a qualified installer. Manufacturer: Honeywell Silent Knight Model Number:

    6820/Evs

    FCC registration number:

    Us: Hs9Al10A2100

    Ringer equivalence:

    1.0A

    Type of jack:

    Rj31X

    Facility Interface Codes: Loop Start: 02LS2 Service Order Code:

    9.0F

    !

    Warning:

    Fcc Part 15

    THIS DEVICE HAS BEEN VERIFIED TO COMPLY WITH FCC RULES PART 15. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE RADIO INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. !

    Caution: Installation And Test

    TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION, THIS EQUIPMENT MUST BE INSTALLED ACCORDING TO THE ENCLOSED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. TO VERIFY THAT THE EQUIPMENT IS OPERATING PROPERLY AND CAN SUCCESSFULLY REPORT AN ALARM, THIS EQUIPMENT MUST BE TESTED IMMEDIATELY AFTER INSTALLATION,

    And Periodically Thereafter, According To The Enclosed Test Instructions.

    !

    Caution: Line In Use

    IN ORDER FOR “ALARM DIALING EQUIPMENT” TO BE ABLE TO SEIZE THE PHONE LINE TO REPORT AN ALARM OR OTHER EVENT WHEN OTHER CUSTOMER EQUIPMENT (TELEPHONE, ANSWERING SYSTEM, COMPUTER MODEM, ETC.) CONNECTED TO THE SAME LINE IS IN USE, “ALARM DIALING EQUIPMENT” MUST BE CONNECTED TO A PROPERLY INSTALLED RJ31X JACK. THE RJ31X JACK MUST BE CONNECTED IN SERIES WITH, AND AHEAD OF, ALL OTHER EQUIPMENT ATTACHED TO THE SAME PHONE LINE. SERIES INSTALLATION OF AN RJ31X JACK IS DEPICTED IN THE FIGURE BELOW. IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS CONCERNING THESE INSTRUCTIONS, CONSULT YOUR TELEPHONE COMPANY OR A QUALIFIED INSTALLER ABOUT INSTALLING THE NECESSARY JACK AND ALARM

    Dialing Equipment.

    Page 15

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 15 Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Agency Listings, Approvals, and Requirements 2.2 Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 2.2.1 Requirements for All Installations General requirements are described in this section. When installing an individual device, refer to the specific section of the manual for addi- tional requirements. The following subsections list specific requirements for each type of installation (for example, Central Station Fire Alarm systems, Local Protected Fire Alarm systems, and so on). See Section 9.6 for information on releasing operation.

  • All field wiring must be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 National Electric Code.
  • Use the addressable smoke detectors specified in the SLC Wiring Manual and/or conventional detectors listed in the Device
  • Compatibility Document.
  • Use UL listed notification appliances compatible with the 6820 from those specified in the Device Compatibility Document.
  • A full system checkout must be performed any time the panel is programmed.
  • Restricted Options: • The loss of AC signal is defaulted to 3 hours, but the system still allows settings from 0 - 30 hours. For UL certified installations, this number must be set from 1 to 3 hours. • The system allows the use of non-latching, spot type smoke detectors. This feature may not be used in commercial applications whereby a general alarm is sounded. It is intended for elevator recall, door holding applications, and hotel/motel room applications. • The system allows the Alarm Verification confirmation time to be set from 60 to 250 seconds. For UL certified installations the setting must be a minimum of 60 seconds. • The systems allows the Auto-resound time to be set to 24 or 4 hours. For UL certified installations that are utilizing SWIFT devices, the value must be set to 4 hours. • Call forwarding shall not be used. • When two count is used: detector spacing shall be cut in half, you shall not use the alarm verification feature, and no delay shall be used. • P.A.S. (positive alarm sequence) feature shall be used only with automatic detectors. 2.2.2 UL 864 9th and 10th Edition • Per the UL Continuing Certification Program, UL 864 9th edition fire alarm control equipment will retain certification after the roll-out of UL 10th edition (12/2/2018). • Installations of UL 864 10th Edition certified equipment are permitted to use UL864 9th Edition certified equipment when approved by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). For product compliance, refer to the UL/ULC listing cards located on the UL online certification directory. https://iq.ulprospector.com 2.2.3 Requirements for Central Station Fire Alarm Systems
  • Use both phone lines. Enable phone line monitors for both lines.
  • You must program a phone number and a test time so that the 6820 shall automatically initiate and complete a test signal transmission
  • sequence to its associated receiver at least once every 6 hours, using two phones or one phone line with Ethernet/cellular backup.
  • The AC Loss Hours option must be set from 1-3 hours.
  • If using wired Ethernet or cellular, you must program the corresponding account/subscriber ID and a test time so that the FACP shall
  • automatically initiate a test signal transmission sequence to its associated receiver at least once every 6 hours. 2.2.4 Requirements for Local Protected Fire Alarm Systems At least one UL listed supervised notification appliance must be used. 2.2.5 Requirements for Remote Station Protected Fire Alarm Systems Minimum system requirements are one Silent Knight addressable initiating device and either a 5220, Keltron 3158, or the built-in Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT).
  • Do not exceed the current draw load restrictions shown in Section 3.5.
  • The AC Loss Hours option must be set from 1-3 hours.
  • 2.2.6 Requirements for the Installation of Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detection and Warning Equipment, NFPA 720 When using carbon monoxide detection the system must be monitored by a Supervising Station with emergency response, both aspects meet- ing the Standard for the Installation of Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detection and Warning Equipment, NFPA 720.

    Page 16

    16 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Agency Listings, Approvals, and Requirements Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 2.2.7 NFPA Requirements The following is the minimum configuration to meet NFPA requirements. Model/Module Description Local Releasing Auxiliary Remote Station Central Station Emergency Signaling 6820 Control Unit

    Y

    Y

    Y

    Y

    Y

    Y

    Ra-100Bd

    4 x 20 display

    Y

    Y

    Y

    Y

    Y

    Y

    5815Xl

    SLC Expander

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    6815 SLC Expander

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    Sk-Nic

    Network card

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    Sk-Fml/Fsl

    Fiber module

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    7644-L8

    Rev polarity Module

    O

    O

    N

    Y

    O

    N

    5220 Rev Polarity Module

    O

    O

    Y

    Y

    O

    N

    Keltron 3158 Rev Polarity Module

    N

    N

    Y

    Y

    N

    N

    Cell-Mod, Cell-Cab-Sk

    Transmitter

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    N

    Hwf2A-Com, Hwf2V-Com

    Transmitter

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    N

    Y = Yes, N = No, O = Optional

    Table 2.1 NFPA Requirements for 6820 Model/Module Description Central Station Local Auxiliary Remote Station

    Evac1

    Mass Notification (In-Building)1

    6820Evs

    Control Unit

    Y

    Y

    Y

    Y

    Y

    Y

    068061 Operator interface

    Y

    Y

    Y

    Y

    Y

    Y

    Evs-50W

    50W Amp2

    O

    O

    O

    O

    Y

    Y

    Evs-125W

    125W amp2

    O

    O

    O

    O

    Y

    Y

    Evs-Int50W

    Internal 50W2 Amp

    O

    O

    O

    O

    Y

    Y

    Evs-Vcm

    Voice Control Module3

    O

    O

    O

    O

    Y

    O

    Evs-Sw24

    Switch annunciator

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    Y

    Evs-Ce4

    Speaker expander module4

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    Evs-Rvm

    Remote Microphone Module5

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    5815Xl

    SLC Expander

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    6815 SLC Expander

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    Sk-Nic

    Network Card

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    Sk-Fml / -Fsl

    Fiber Module

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    Y = Yes, N = No, O = Optional

  • When configured for Emergency relocation and evacuation equipment the system must meet Local configuration (Model 6820EVS) with a
  • minimum of one amplifier (Model EVS-50W/EVS-125W or EVS-INT50W) and one Voice Control Module (Model EVS-VCM).
  • A maximum of eight 50/125 Watts Amplifiers for a maximum of 1000 Watts per EVS System.
  • A maximum of one Voice Control Module per EVS System.
  • A maximum of one Speaker Expander Module per Model EVS-50W/EVS-125W.
  • A maximum of two Remote Microphone modules per EVS System.
  • Table 2.2 NFPA Requirements for 6820EVS

    Page 17

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 17 Section 3: Before You Begin Installation This section of the manual is intended to help you plan your tasks to facilitate a smooth installation. Please read this section thoroughly, espe- cially if you are installing a 6820 panel for the first time. 3.1 Inventory When the 6820 shipment is received, check that all the parts have been included in the shipment. The shipment consist of one of each of the following: • main circuit board with display • backbox with door. • plastic bag containing two keys, screws, cables, and ten 4.7K ohm end-of-line resistors • manual 3.2 Environmental Specifications It is important to protect the 6820 control panel from water. To prevent water damage, the following precautions should be followed when installing the units: • Intended for indoor use in dry locations only • Do not mount directly on exterior walls, especially masonry walls (condensation) • Do not mount directly on exterior walls below grade (condensation) • Protect from plumbing leaks • Protect from splash caused by sprinkler system inspection ports • Do not mount in areas with humidity-generating equipment (such as dryers, production machinery) When selecting a location to mount the 6820 control panel, the unit should be mounted where it will NOT be exposed to: temperatures out- side the range of 0°C- 49°C (32°F-120°F) or humidity exceeding 93% non-condensing. 3.3 Software Downloads In order to supply the latest features and functionality in fire alarm and life safety technology to our customers, we make frequent upgrades to the embedded software in our products. To ensure that you are installing and programming the latest features, we strongly recommend that you download the most current version of software for each product prior to commissioning any system. Contact Technical Support with any questions about software and the appropriate version for a specific application. Software updates can be found at www.silentknight.com. 3.4 Electrical Specifications Table 3.1 lists the terminal block on the 6820 as well as a description of each individual terminal and their respective electrical rating. Terminal Label Description Rating Earth Ground Faults Voltage Current

    B

    AC input (hot) 120 VAC, 60 Hz

    3.3A

    N/A

    G

    Earth ground

    N/A

    N/A

    N/A

    W

    AC input (neutral) 120 VAC, 60 Hz

    3.3A

    N/A

    X

    1Nac1

    NAC Circuit

    24 Vdc

    3.0 A notification and auxiliary power circuits

    O

    X

    1Nac2

    NAC Circuits

    24 Vdc

    3.0 A notification and auxiliary power circuits

    O

    X

    1Nac3

    NAC Circuit

    24 Vdc

    3.0 A notification and auxiliary power circuits

    O

    X

    1Nac4

    NAC Circuits

    24 Vdc

    3.0 A notification and auxiliary power circuits

    O

    X

    1I/O 5

    Flexput Circuits

    24 Vdc

    3.0 A notification and auxiliary power circuits

    O

    100 mA for initiation circuits

    X

    1I/O 6

    Flexput Circuits

    24 Vdc

    3.0 A notification and auxiliary power circuits

    O

    100 mA for initiation circuits

    B

    Sbus Out

    SBUS communication

    5 Vdc

    100 mA

    A

    + SBUS power

    24 Vdc

    1.0 A

  • Table 3.1 Terminal Descriptions and Electrical Specifications
  • Page 18

    18 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Before You Begin Installation Calculating Current Draw and Standby Battery 3.5 Calculating Current Draw and Standby Battery This section is for helping you determine the current draw and standby battery needs for your installation. 3.5.1 Current Draw Worksheet Requirements The following steps must be taken when determining 6820 current draw and standby battery requirements.

  • For the 6820, the worst case current draw is listed for the panel, addressable devices, and SLC expanders. Fill in the number of
  • addressable devices and expanders that will be used in the system and compute the current draw requirements for alarm and standby. Record this information in the current draw worksheet on Line A.
  • Add up the current draw for all auxiliary devices and record in the table on Line B.
  • Add up the current draw for all notification appliance loads and record in the table on Line C.
  • For notification appliances and auxiliary devices not mentioned in the manual, refer to the device manual for the current ratings.
  • B

    Sbus In

    Used for Class A installations

    A

    +
  • N.C.

  • Relay 1

    General Purpose Relay 1

    24 Vdc

    2.5 A, resistive

    N/A

    C

    N.O.

    N.C.

    Relay 2

    General Purpose Relay 2

    24 Vdc

    2.5 A, resistive

    N/A

    C

    N.O.

    N.C.

    Trouble

    Trouble Relay

    24 Vdc

    2.5 A, resistive

    N/A

    C

    N.O.

    S-

    Slc Out

    SLC terminals

    32 Vdc

    150 mA

    S+

    S-

    Slc Pgm

    SLC Programming

    32 Vdc

    150 mA

    S+

    S-

    Slc In

    Used for Class A installations

    S+

    Ring Phone Line 1 Telco Ring

    N/A

    Tip Phone Line 1 Telco Tip Ring Phone Line 1 Premises Ring Tip Phone Line 1 Premises Tip Ring Phone Line 2 Telco Ring

    N/A

    Tip Phone Line 2 Telco Tip Ring Phone Line 2 Premises Ring Tip Phone Line 2 Premises Tip + Battery Battery Connection

    24 Vdc

    Up to 35 Ah (See Section 4.5 for details.)

    N/A

    B

    EXT. Comm EXT. Comm Cellular Connection input

    A

    S+

    55 mA, 100 mA

    S-

    P7

    Data Network Used for SK-NIC

    24 Vdc

    21 mA

    1 Regulated for NAC circuits, special application when used for releasing or auxiliary power circuits Terminal Label Description Rating Earth Ground Faults Voltage Current Table 3.1 Terminal Descriptions and Electrical Specifications

    Page 19

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 19 Calculating Current Draw and Standby Battery Before You Begin Installation

  • Make sure that the total alarm current you calculated, including current for the panel itself, does not exceed 9.0 A. This is the maximum
  • alarm current for the 6820 control panel. If the current is above 9.0 A you will need to use a notification power expander(s) such as the 5496 or the 5895XL intelligent power expander, to distribute the power loads so that the 6820 or the power expanders do not exceed their power ratings. Refer to the current draw worksheets provided with the 5496 or the 5895XL manuals so you do not exceed their power ratings.
  • Complete the remaining instructions in the appropriate current draw worksheet for determining battery size requirements.
  • 3.5.2 Current Draw Worksheet for SK SLC Devices Use Table 3.2 to determine current requirements during alarm/battery standby operation when SK SLC devices are installed. You can install up to 159 SK sensors per loop (1,110 points max per panel) and 159 modules per loop (1,110 points max per panel). Device

    of Devices

    Current per Device Standby Current Alarm Current For each device, use this formula: This column X This column = Current per number of devices. Fire Panel (Current draw from battery) 1 Standby 190 mA 190 mA Alarm: 250 mA 250 mA1 Addressable SLC Detectors

    Sk-Photo

    Standby: 0.3 mA Alarm: 6.5 mA2 mA mA

    Sk-Photo-T

    mA mA

    Sk-Photo-R

    mA mA

    Sk-Heat

    mA mA

    Sk-Heat-Ht

    mA mA

    Sk-Heat-Ror

    mA mA

    Sk-Acclimate

    mA mA

    Sk-Photo-W

    Standby: 0.2 mA Alarm: 4.5 mA2 mA mA

    Sk-Photo-T-W

    mA mA

    Sk-Photo-R-W

    mA mA

    Sk-Heat-W

    mA mA

    Sk-Heat-Ht-W

    mA mA

    Sk-Heat-Ror-W

    mA mA

    Sk-Photo-Co-W

    mA mA

    Sk-Co-W

    mA mA SK-BEAM (without integral test)

    Slc

    Standby/Alarm: 2 mA mA mA Aux. Pwr Standby: 2 mA mA Alarm: 8.5 mA mA SK-BEAM-T3 (with integral test)

    Slc

    Standby/Alarm: 2 mA mA mA Aux. Pwr Standby: 2 mA mA Alarm: 8.5 mA mA

    Osi-Ri-Sk

    Slc

    Standby/Alarm: 20 mA mA mA Aux. Pwr Standby: 22 mA mA Alarm: 20 mA mA

    Sk-Fire-Co

    Slc

    Standby: 0.30 mA mA Alarm: 7 mA mA

    Sk-Fire-Co-W

    Slc

    Standby: 0.20 mA mA Alarm: 4.5 mA mA

    Sk-Ptir-W

    Slc

    Standby: 0.20 mA mA Alarm: 4.5 mA mA Addressable SLC Modules

    Sk-Monitor

    Standby/Alarm 0.375 mA mA mA

    Sk-Minimon

    Standby/Alarm 0.375 mA mA mA

    Sk-Pull-Sa/Sk-Pull-Da

    Standby/Alarm 0.3 mA mA mA

    Sk-Monitor-2

    Standby/Alarm: 0.75 mA mA mA

    Sk-Monitor-10

    Standby/Alarm: 3.5 mA mA mA Table 3.2 Current Draw Worksheet for SK SLC Devices

    Page 20

    20 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Before You Begin Installation Calculating Current Draw and Standby Battery

    Sk-Control

    Slc

    Standby 0.375 mA mA Alarm: 0.375 mA mA Aux Pwr Standby 1.7 mA mA Alarm: 6.5mA mA

    Sk-Control-6

    Slc

    Standby 2.65 mA mA Alarm: 35 mA mA Aux Pwr Standby 8 mA mA Alarm: 20 mA mA

    Sk-Relay

    Standby/Alarm: 0.255 mA mA mA

    Sk-Relay-6

    Standby: 1.9 mA mA Alarm: 32 mA mA

    Sk-Relaymon-2

    Standby: 1.3 mA mA Alarm: 24 mA mA

    Sk-Zone

    Aux Pwr Standby 12 mA mA Alarm: 90 mA mA

    Slc

    Standby: 0.27 mA mA Alarm: 5.1 mA

    Sk-Zone-6

    Aux Pwr Standby 50 mA mA Alarm: 70 mA mA

    Slc

    Standby 2.3 mA mA Alarm: 40 mA mA SLC Accessories B200SR/-W/-IV Sounder Base Aux Pwr Standby: 0.5 mA mA Alarm: 35 mA mA

    Slc

    Standby 0.3 mA mA B200S/-W/-IV Intelligent Sounder Base Aux Pwr Standby: 0.5 mA mA Alarm: (high vol) 35 mA mA

    Slc

    Standby 0.3 mA mA B200SR-LF/-W/-IV Low Frequency Sounder Base Aux Pwr Standby: 1 mA mA Alarm: 125 mA mA B200S-LF/-W/-IV Intelligent Low Frequency Sounder Base Aux Pwr Standby 0.55 mA mA Alarm (high vol) 140 mA mA

    Slc

    Standby 0.30 mA mA B224RB/-W/-IV Relay Base Standby/Alarm: 0.17 mA mA mA

    Rts151

    Alarm: 10 mA mA

    Rts151Key

    Alarm: 12 mA mA

    Ra100Z

    Alarm: 10 mA mA SLC Isolator Devices SK-ISO (Isolator Module) Standby: 0.45 mA mA mA Isolation: 17 mA ISO-6 (6 Fault Isolator Module) Standby: (per circuit) 0.45 mA mA Isolation: (per circuit) 17 mA mA B224BI/-W/-IV Isolator Base Standby: 0.45 mA mA Isolation: 15 mA mA Accessories Modules4 6815 SLC Loop Expander Standby: 78 mA mA Alarm: 78 mA mA 6860 Remote LCD Annunciator Standby: 27 mA mA Alarm: 53 mA mA Device

    of Devices

    Current per Device Standby Current Alarm Current Table 3.2 Current Draw Worksheet for SK SLC Devices (Continued)

    Page 21

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 21 Calculating Current Draw and Standby Battery Before You Begin Installation 5860 Remote LCD Annunciator Standby: 58 mA mA Alarm: 68 mA mA 6855 Remote LCD Annunciator Standby: 59 mA mA Alarm: 92 mA mA 5824 Serial/Parallel Module Standby/Alarm: 45 mA mA mA 5496 NAC Expander Standby/Alarm (SBUS): 10 mA mA mA 5895XL Power Supply Standby/Alarm (SBUS): 10 mA mA mA 5865-4 LED Annunciator (with reset and silence switches) Standby: 35 mA mA Alarm: 145 mA mA 5865-3 LED Annunciator Module Standby: 35 mA mA Alarm: 145 mA mA 5880 LED I/O Module Standby: 35 mA mA Alarm: 200 mA mA 5883 Relay Interface Standby: 0 mA mA Alarm: (22 mA/relay) 220 mA mA EVS-50W Voice Amplifier with/without EVS-CE4 Standby/Alarm (SBUS): 10 mA mA mA EVS-125W Voice Amplifier with/without EVS-CE4 Standby/Alarm (SBUS): 10 mA mA mA EVS-INT50W Internal Amplifier Standby: 52 mA mA Alarm @ 25V: 275 mA mA Alarm @ 70V: 310 mA mA EVS-100W Amplifier Standby/Alarm (SBUS): 10 mA mA mA EVS-100WBU Back-Up Amplifier Standby/Alarm: 10 mA mA mA EVS-VCM Voice Control Module Standby: 70 mA mA Alarm: 100 mA mA EVS-RVM Remote Voice Module Standby: 60 mA Alarm: 80 mA EVS-SW24 Switch Expander Standby: 10 mA mA Alarm: 25 mA mA EVS-RPU Remote Paging Unit Standby: 70 mA mA Alarm: 100 mA mA EVS-LOC Local Operating Console Standby: 87 mA mA Alarm: 133 mA mA EVS-LOC Local Operating Console with one EVS-SW24 Standby: 97 mA mA Alarm: 158 mA mA Network Cards SK-NIC Network Interface Card Standby/Alarm: 21 mA mA mA SK-FML Fiber Optic Multi Mode Standby/Alarm: 53 mA mA mA SK-FSL Fiber Optic Single Mode Standby/Alarm: 79 mA mA mA Wireless Modules WSK-WGI Wireless Gateway Max current using ext supply 40 mA mA mA Max current SLC Power 24 mA mA mA

    A

    Total System Current Auxiliary Devices Refer to devices manual for current rating IPDACT-2 IP Communicator Standby: 93 mA mA Alarm: 136 mA mA IPDACT-2UD IP Communicator Standby: 98 mA mA Alarm: 155 mA mA Device

    of Devices

    Current per Device Standby Current Alarm Current Table 3.2 Current Draw Worksheet for SK SLC Devices (Continued)

    Page 22

    22 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Before You Begin Installation Calculating Current Draw and Standby Battery 3.5.3 Current Draw Worksheet for SD SLC Devices Use Table 3.3 to determine current requirements during alarm/battery standby operation when SD SLC devices are installed. You can install up to 127 SD devices per loop (635 max per panel). Copy this section if additional space is required.

    Cell-Mod/Cell-Cab-Sk

    Standby: 55 mA mA Alarm: 100 mA mA HWF2-COM Series Standby: 210 mA mA Alarm: 290 mA mA Alarm/Standby: mA mA mA Alarm/Standby: mA mA mA

    B

    Auxiliary Devices Current5 Notification Devices Refer to device manual for current rating 5495/5499 Power Supply Standby: 75 mA mA Alarm: 205 mA mA Alarm: mA mA Alarm: mA mA Alarm: mA mA

    C

    Notification Appliances Current mA

    D

    Total current ratings of all devices in system (line A + line B + C) mA mA

    E

    Total current ratings converted to amperes (line D x 0.001):

    A

    A

    F

    Number of standby hours

    H

    G

    Multiply lines E and F. Total standby AH

    Ah

    H

    Alarm sounding period in hours. (For example, 5 minutes = 0.0833 hours)

    H

    I

    Multiply lines E and H. Total alarm AH

    Ah

    J

    Add lines G and I.

    Ah

    Multiply by the Derating Factor 1.25 Total ampere hours required6

    Ah

    1 The FACP can only support 5 devices with LEDs on. The current draw has been added to the panels alarm current. 2 Total does not include isolator devices or accessory bases. 3 The SK-BEAM-T draws a maximum of 500mA from auxiliary power when the test feature is used. This should be considered when determining auxiliary power capacity but not calculated into current requirements for everyday operation. 4 Maximum SBUS address capacity is determined by the amount of SBUS bandwidth consumed by each SBUS module. Refer to Section 4.6.2 for SBUS limitations. 5 If there are door holders in the system, there is no need to consider door holder current for alarm/battery standby, because power is removed during that time. However, during normal operation, door holders draw current and must be included in the 1.8 A total current that can be drawn from the panel. 6 Use next size battery with capacity greater than required. Device

    of Devices

    Current per Device Standby Current Alarm Current Table 3.2 Current Draw Worksheet for SK SLC Devices (Continued) Device

    of Devices

    Current per Device Standby Current Alarm Current For each device, use this formula: This column X This column = Current per number of devices. Fire Panel (Current draw from battery) 1 Standby 190 mA 190 mA Alarm: 250 mA 250 mA1

    Sd500-Aim

    Standby/Alarm: 0.55 mA2 mA mA

    Sd500-Mim

    mA mA

    Sd500-Ps

    mA mA

    Sd500-Arm

    mA mA

    Sd505-Heat

    mA mA

    Sd505-Photo

    mA mA Table 3.3 Current Calculation Worksheet for SD Devices

    Page 23

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 23 Calculating Current Draw and Standby Battery Before You Begin Installation

    Sd500-Anm

    Aux. Pwr Standby: 8 mA mA Alarm: 60 mA mA

    Slc

    Standby/Alarm: 0.55 mA mA mA

    Sd500-Sdm

    Slc

    Standby/Alarm: 0.55 mA mA mA Aux. Pwr Standby: 20 mA mA Alarm: 106 mA mA SLC Accessory Base

    Sd505-6Rb

    Standby/Alarm: 0.082 mA mA mA

    Sd505-6Sb

    Aux. Pwr Standby: 1 mA mA Alarm: 32 mA mA

    Slc

    Standby/Alarm: 0.082 mA mA mA

    Sd505-Ductr

    Aux. Pwr Standby: 20 mA3 mA Alarm: 62 mA3 mA

    Slc

    Standby/Alarm: 0.5 mA mA mA

    Sd505-Dts-K

    None, included with SD505-DUCTR worst case.

    Sd505-Duct

    Slc

    Standby/Alarm 0.5 mA mA mA SLC Isolator Devices

    Sd505-Lim

    Standby/Alarm 0.092 mA mA mA

    Sd505-6Ib

    Accessories Modules4 5815XL SLC Expander Standby/Alarm: 55 mA mA mA 6860 Remote LCD Annunciator Standby: 27 mA mA Alarm: 53 mA mA 5860 Remote LCD Annunciator Standby: 58 mA mA Alarm: 68 mA mA 6855 Remote LCD Annunciator Standby: 59 mA mA Alarm: 92 mA mA 5824 Serial/Parallel Module Standby/Alarm: 45 mA mA mA 5496 NAC Expander Standby/Alarm (SBUS): 10 mA mA mA 5895XL Power Supply Standby/Alarm (SBUS): 10 mA mA mA 5865-4 LED Annunciator (with reset and silence switches) Standby: 35 mA mA Alarm: 145 mA mA 5865-3 LED Annunciator Module Standby: 35 mA mA Alarm: 145 mA mA 5880 LED I/O Module Standby: 35 mA mA Alarm: 200 mA mA 5883 Relay Interface Standby: 0 mA mA Alarm: (22 mA/relay) 220 mA mA EVS-50W Voice Amplifier with/without EVS-CE4 Standby/Alarm (SBUS): 10 mA mA mA EVS-125W Voice Amplifier with/without EVS-CE4 Standby/Alarm (SBUS): 10 mA mA mA EVS-INT50W Internal Amplifier Standby: 52 mA mA Alarm @ 25V: 275 mA mA Alarm @ 70V: 310 mA mA EVS-100W Amplifier Standby/Alarm (SBUS): 10 mA mA mA Device

    of Devices

    Current per Device Standby Current Alarm Current Table 3.3 Current Calculation Worksheet for SD Devices (Continued)

    Page 24

    24 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Before You Begin Installation Calculating Current Draw and Standby Battery EVS-100WBU Back-Up Amplifier Standby/Alarm: 10 mA mA mA EVS-VCM Voice Control Module Standby: 70 mA mA Alarm: 100 mA mA EVS-RVM Remote Voice Module Standby: 60 mA Alarm: 80 mA EVS-SW24 Switch Expander Standby: 10 mA mA Alarm: 25 mA mA EVS-RPU Remote Paging Unit Standby: 70 mA mA Alarm: 100 mA mA EVS-LOC Local Operating Console Standby: 87 mA mA Alarm: 133 mA mA EVS-LOC Local Operating Console with one EVS-SW24 Standby: 97 mA mA Alarm: 158 mA mA Network Cards SK-NIC Network Interface Card Standby/Alarm: 21 mA mA mA SK-FML Fiber Optic Multi Mode Standby/Alarm: 53 mA mA mA SK-FSL Fiber Optic Single Mode Standby/Alarm: 79 mA mA mA Wireless Modules WSK-WGI Wireless Gateway Max current using ext supply 40 mA mA mA Max current SLC Power 24 mA mA mA

    A

    Total System Current Auxiliary Devices5 Refer to devices manual for current rating IPDACT-2 IP Communicator Standby: 93 mA mA Alarm: 136 mA mA IPDACT-2UD IP Communicator Standby: 98 mA mA Alarm: 155 mA mA

    Cell-Mod/Cell-Cab-Sk

    Standby: 55 mA mA Alarm: 100 mA mA HWF2-COM Series Standby: 210 mA mA Alarm: 290 mA mA Alarm/Standby: mA mA mA Alarm/Standby: mA mA mA

    B

    Auxiliary Devices Current Notification Devices Refer to device manual for current rating 5495/5499 Power Supply Standby: 75 mA mA Alarm: 205 mA mA Alarm: mA mA Alarm: mA mA Alarm: mA mA

    C

    Notification Appliances Current mA

    D

    Total current ratings of all devices in system (line A + line B + C) mA mA

    E

    Total current ratings converted to amperes (line D x 0.001):

    A

    A

    F

    Number of standby hours

    H

    G

    Multiply lines E and F. Total standby AH

    Ah

    H

    Alarm sounding period in hours. (For example, 5 minutes = 0.0833 hours)

    H

    I

    Multiply lines E and H. Total alarm AH

    Ah

    J

    Add lines G and I.

    Ah

    Multiply by the Derating Factor 1.25 Total ampere hours required6

    Ah

    Device

    of Devices

    Current per Device Standby Current Alarm Current Table 3.3 Current Calculation Worksheet for SD Devices (Continued)

    Page 25

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 25 Calculating Current Draw and Standby Battery Before You Begin Installation 3.5.4 Maximum Battery Standby Load Tables 3.4 and 3.5 show the standby load calculations for the 6820 based on 24 and 90 hours of standby. The standby load calculations of line D in the Current Draw Calculation Worksheet must be less than the number shown in Tables 3.4 and 3.5 for the selected battery size, standby hour and alarm time. The numbers below have a built in 20% derating factor for the battery amp-hour capacity.

    1 The FACP can only support 5 devices with LEDs on. The current draw has been added to the panels alarm current. 2 Total does not include isolator devices or accessory bases 3 If using 24 VDC aux power only. No standby or alarm current is needed for battery calculation if using 24 VAC, 120 VAC, or 240 VAC. 4 Maximum SBUS address capacity is determined by the amount of SBUS bandwidth consumed by each SBUS module. Refer to Section 4.6.2 for SBUS limitations. 5 If using door holders, you do not need to consider door holder current for alarm/battery standby, because power is removed during that time. However, during normal operation, door holders draw current and must be included in the 1.0A total current that can be drawn from the panel. 6 Use next size battery with capacity greater than required. Rechargeable Battery Size 24 hr Standby, 5 mins. Alarm 24 hr Standby, 15 min alarm 24 hr Standby, 20 min alarm

    17Ah

    535 mA 473 mA 442 mA

    18Ah

    569 mA 506 mA 475 mA

    24Ah

    769 mA 706 mA 675 mA

    33Ah

    1.07A

    1.01A

    975 mA

    35Ah

    1.14A

    1.07A

    1.04A

    40Ah

    1.30A

    1.24A

    1.21A

    55Ah

    1.80A

    1.74A

    1.71A

    Table 3.4 Maximum Battery Standby Loads for 24 Hour Standby Rechargeable Battery Size 90 hr Standby, 5 min alarm 90 hr Standby, 15 min alarm 90 hr Standby, 20 min alarm

    33 Ah

    N/A

    N/A

    N/A

    40 Ah

    347 mA 331 mA 322 mA

    55 Ah

    480 mA 464 mA 456 mA Table 3.5 Maximum Battery Standby Loads for 90 Hour Standby (FM applications only) !

    Warning:

    Battery Size

    SILENT KNIGHT DOES NOT SUPPORT THE USE OF BATTERIES SMALLER THAN THOSE LISTED IN TABLES 3.4 AND 3.5. IF YOU USE A BATTERY TOO SMALL FOR THE INSTALLATION, THE SYSTEM COULD OVERLOAD THE BATTERY RESULTING IN THE INSTALLATION HAVING LESS THAN THE REQUIRED 24 HOURS STANDBY POWER. USE TABLE 3.4 AND TABLE 3.5 TO CALCULATE THE CORRECT BATTERY AMP HOUR RATING NEEDED FOR YOUR INSTALLATION. IT

    Is Recommended That You Replace Batteries Every Five Years.

    Page 26

    26 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Section 4: Control Panel Installation 4.1 Mounting the Control Panel Cabinet Read the environmental specifications in Section 3.2 before mounting the control panel cabinet. This will ensure that you select a suitable location. The 6820 cabinet can be surface or flush mounted. Cabinet base dimensions are 24.75” H x 14.5" W. If you flush mount there should be 1.5" to 1.75" of cabinet extruding from the wall, this should be measured from either the top edge or bottom edge to the exterior side of the sheet rock. Do NOT flush mount in a wall designated as a fire break. The 6820EVS cabinet can be surface or flush mounted. Cabinet base dimensions are 26.5” H x 20.0"W. If you flush mount the cabinet, there should be 1.5" to 1.75" of cabinet extruding from the wall, this should be measured from either the top edge or bottom edge to the exterior side of the Sheetrock. Do NOT flush mount in a wall designated as a fire break. 4.1.1 Preventing Water Damage Water damage to the fire system can be caused by moisture entering the cabinet through the conduits. Conduits that are installed to enter the top of the cabinet are most likely to cause water problems. Installers should take reasonable precautions to prevent water from entering the cabinet. Water damage is not covered under warranty. 4.1.2 Removing the 6820 Assembly from the Housing Should it ever be necessary to remove the control panel assembly from the cabinet for repair, do so by unscrewing the nuts that connect the control panel assembly to the cabinet. Do not attempt to disassemble the circuit boards. 4.1.3 Ethernet Connection The Ethernet connect is used for IP communication. For port location, see the figure below. 14.5” 11” 24.75” Figure 4.1 FACP Cabinet Dimensions 20” 16” 26.5” 6820

    6820Evs

    Page 27

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 27 Board Assembly Diagram Control Panel Installation 4.2 Board Assembly Diagram If you should need to remove the board assembly for repair, remove the four mounting nuts which hold the assembly in the cabinet. Then, lift the entire assembly out of the cabinet. Do not attempt to remove the circuit boards from the metal bracket.

    Ext. Comm

    Voice

    Network

    Data

    Network

    Telco Phone Telco Phone

    Slc Slc Pgm

    Battery

    B G W

    RING1 TIP1 RING1 TIP1 RING2 TIP2 RING2 TIP2

    Out- Out+ In- In+ - +

  • +
  • Trouble

    Sbus Out

    Sbus In

    Nc C No

    - + A B

    - + A B

    Relay1

    Nc C No

    Relay2

    Nc C No

    NAC1 NAC2 NAC3 NAC4 O I/05 X O I/06 X + - + - + - + - AC power address DIP switch battery connection

    Slc

    Slc

    prog. voice network data network phone lines Ethernet external comm. USB port

    Sbus

    Trouble relay programmable relays NAC/aux power circuits (6) Figure 4.2 6820 Board Layout

    Page 28

    28 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Control Panel Installation Wiring Specifications 4.3 Wiring Specifications Induced noise (transfer of electrical energy from one wire to another) can interfere with telephone communication or cause false alarms. To avoid induced noise, follow these guidelines: • Isolate input wiring from high current output and power wiring. Do not pull one multi-conductor cable for the entire panel. Instead, separate the wiring as follows: • Do not pull wires from different groups through the same conduit. If you must run them together, do so for as short a distance as possible or use shielded cable. Connect the shield to earth ground at the panel. You must route high and low voltages separately. • Route the wiring around the inside perimeter of the cabinet. It should not cross the circuit board where it could induce noise into the sensitive microelectronics or pick up unwanted RF noise from the high speed circuits. See Figure 4.2 for an example. • High frequency noise, such as that produced by the inductive reactance of a speaker or bell, can also be reduced by running the wire through ferrite shield beads or by wrapping it around a ferrite toroid.

    High voltage AC power terminal SLC loops SLC In/Out Terminals POTS reporting input/output Phone line circuits, Ring Tip Telco, Phone Terminals Notification circuits NACs 1-6

    Sbus

    SBUS1 In/Out Terminals, Cellular communication Relay circuits Trouble, Relay 1, Relay 2 Terminals Figure 4.3 Wire Routing Example for 6820 AC power

    Slc

    NAC/aux power circuits relay circuits

    Sbus

    phone lines 0.25” spacing must be maintained between each of these circuit types, as well as between power-limited and non- power-limited circuits. battery battery

    Page 29

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 29 AC Power Connection Control Panel Installation 4.4 AC Power Connection The AC terminals are rated at 120VAC, 60Hz, 3.3A. 4.5 Battery Power The batteries must be sealed lead acid type. Before connecting the batteries to the FACP, make certain that the interconnect cable between the batteries is not connected. Do not connect the battery jumper cable until the system is completely installed. Observe polarity when connect- ing the batteries. AC power

    Slc

    NAC/aux power circuits relay circuits

    Sbus

    phone lines 0.25” spacing must be maintained between each of these circuit types, as well as between power-limited and non- power-limited circuits. battery battery Figure 4.4 Wire Routing Example for 6820EVS !

    Warning:

    Risk Of Electrical Shock And Equipment Damage

    SEVERAL DIFFERENT SOURCES OF POWER CAN BE CONNECTED TO THIS PANEL. DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER BEFORE SERVICING. THE PANEL AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT MAY BE DAMAGED BY REMOVING AND/OR

    Inserting Cards, Modules Or Interconnecting Cables While This Unit Is Energized

    Figure 4.5 AC Power Connection black green white !

    Warning:

    Risk Of Personal Injury

    BATTERY CONTAINS SULFURIC ACID WHICH CAN CAUSE SEVERE BURNS TO THE SKIN AND EYES AND CAN DESTROY FABRICS. IF CONTACT IS MADE WITH SULFURIC ACID, IMMEDIATELY FLUSH THE SKIN OR EYES WITH

    Water For 15 Minutes And Seek Immediate Medical Attention

    Page 30

    30 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Control Panel Installation Battery Power The control panel battery charge capacity is 7 to 35 AH. Use 12V batteries of the same AH rating. Determine the correct AH rating as per the standby load calculation (see Section 3.5). Wire batteries in series to produce a 24-volt equivalent. Do not parallel batteries to increase the AH rating. It is recommended to replace bat- teries every five years. 4.5.1 Battery Accessory Cabinets Model RBB accessory cabinet can be used when your backup battery requirements use batteries that are too large to fit into the main control panel cabinet. The RBB cabinet holds batteries up to the 35 AH size. The RBB dimensions are 16" W x 10" H x 6" D (40.64 cm W x 25.4 cm H x 15.24 cm D). Installing the RBB Accessory Cabinet and Batteries To properly install the accessory cabinet and backup batteries, follow these steps:

  • Mount the accessory cabinet. See Figure 4.7 for the four cabinet mounting holes.
  • • If mounting onto drywall the accessory cabinet must be mounted onto 3/4-inch plywood. This is necessary because the weight of the batteries inside the accessory cabinet could cause the cabinet to pull away from the drywall. • When mounting on concrete, especially when moisture is expected, attach a piece of 3/4-inch plywood to the concrete surface and then attach the RBB cabinet to the plywood. • If using the battery cable extenders provided (P/N 140643), mount the RBB cabinet no more than 18" away from the main control panel cabinet. This will ensure that the battery cables reach the battery terminals.

    Battery

    – +

    Slc

    Out–

    Out+

    In–

    In+

    _ _ + + battery jumper

    (P/N 140694)

    shipped with panel red black Figure 4.6 Battery Connection Figure 4.7 RBB Cabinet Mounting Holes cabinet mounting holes

    Page 31

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 31 SBUS Wiring Control Panel Installation

  • Connect the main control panel battery cables to the battery cable extenders as shown in Figure 4.8.
  • Run extended battery cable from control panel cabinet through conduit to RBB cabinet as shown below.
  • Connect battery leads to the backup battery terminals. Observe the proper polarity to prevent damage to the batteries or the control
  • panel.
  • Insert the RBB cover screws into the cover mounting holes and screw down most of the way. Do not tighten.
  • Align the cover plate mounting keyhole over the cover mounting screws.
  • Slide the cover into place and tighten the cover mounting screws.
  • 4.6 SBUS Wiring This section contains information on calculating SBUS wire distances and the types of wiring configurations (Class A and B). Figure 4.8 Splicing Control Panel Battery Cable to RBB Battery Cable Extenders + - + - RBB cabinet cover screws RBB cabinet cover screws conduit coupler conduit Figure 4.9 Battery Connections in the RBB Cabinet

    Note:

    Figure 4.3 is an example of how the wire connections can be routed. However, any other cabinet knock-outs (on either the main control panel or the RBB cabinet), that are not previously being used may be utilized to connect conduit between the two cabinets. Figure 4.10 Cover Plate Mounting Keyholes and Cover Mounting Screws Alignment cabinet mounting holes

    Page 32

    32 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Control Panel Installation SBUS Wiring 4.6.1 Calculating Wiring Distance for SBUS Modules The following instructions will guide you in determining the type of wire and the maximum wiring distance that can be used with control panel SBUS accessory modules. To calculate the wire gauge that must be used to connect SBUS modules to the control panel, it is necessary to calculate the total worst case current draw for all modules on a single SBUS circuit. The total worst case current draw is calculated by adding the individual worst case currents for each module. The individual worst case values are shown in the table below. . After calculating the total worst case current draw, refer to Table 4.2 below for the maximum distance the modules can be located from the panel on a single wire run. The table ensures 6.0 volts of line drop maximum. In general, the wire length is limited by resistance, but for heavier wire gauges, capacitance is the limiting factor. These cases are marked in the chart with an asterisk (*). Maximum length can never be more than 6,000 feet, regardless of gauge used. The formula used to generate this chart is shown in the note below.The following formulas were used to generate the wire distance chart:

    Note:

    Total worst case current draw on a single SBUS cannot exceed 1 amp. If a large number of accessory modules are required, and the worst case current draw will exceed the 1 amp limit, then the current draw must be distributed using 5895XL Power Expanders. Each 5895XL Power Expander provides an additional SBUS, with an additional 1 amp of SBUS current. Wiring distance calculations are done separately for each 5895XL, and separately for each control panel SBUS. Model Number Worst Case Current Draw 6860, 6855, 5860 Fire Annunciators 0.120 amps 5815XL SLC Loop 0.150 amps 6815 SLC Loop Expander 0.078 amps 5824 Serial/Parallel Printer Interface Module 0.040 amps 5880 LED I/O Module 0.250 amps 5865 LED Annunciator 0.200 amps 5895XL Intelligent Power Supply 0.010 amps 5496 NAC Expander 0.010 amps

    Evs-50W

    0.010 amps

    Evs-125W

    0.010 amps EVS-VCM / EVS-VCM with EVS-SW241 0.080 amps /0.105 amps2 EVS-LOC / EVS-LOC with EVS-SW241 0.080 amps / 0.105 amps2

    Evs-100W

    0.010 amps EVS-100W with EVS-100WBU 0.010 amps SK-NIC Network Interface Card 0.021 amps

    Cell-Mod/Cell-Cab-Sk

    0.145 amps SK-F485C Fiber Converter 0.125 amps Table 4.1 SBUS Device Current Draw 1 All devices must use the same SBUS and VBUS. 2 When doing wire calculations, use .080 amps per device with .105 amps for the last device.

    Note:

    Refer to Table 3.2 for SK devices or Table 3.3 if using SD SLC devices for the maximum number of each type of device that can be used per system. Wiring Distance: SBUS Modules to Panel Total Worst Case Current Draw (amps) 22 Gauge 18 Gauge 16 Gauge 14 Gauge 0.100 1852 ft. 4688 ft.
  • 6000 ft.
  • 6000 ft.
  • 0.200 926 ft. 2344 ft. 3731 ft. 5906 ft. 0.300 617 ft. 1563 ft. 2488 ft. 3937 ft. 0.400 463 ft. 1172 ft. 1866 ft. 2953 ft. 0.500 370 ft. 938 ft. 1493 ft. 2362 ft. 0.600 309 ft. 781 ft. 1244 ft. 1969 ft. 0.700 265 ft. 670 ft. 1066 ft. 1687 ft. 0.800 231 ft. 586 ft. 933 ft. 1476 ft. 0.900 206 ft. 521 ft. 829 ft. 1312 ft. 1.000 (Max) 185 ft. 469 ft. 746 ft. 1181 ft. Table 4.2 Wire Distances Per Wire Gauge Using Copper Wire

    Page 33

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 33 SBUS Wiring Control Panel Installation Wiring Distance calculation example: Suppose a system is configured with the following SBUS modules: 2 - Module 6860 Fire Annunciators 1 - 5895XL Intelligent Power Expander 1 - 5865 LED Annunciator 1 - 5824 Serial/Parallel Interface Module The total worst case current is calculated as follows: Using this value, and referring to the Wiring Distance table, it can be found that the available options are: 370 feet maximum using 22 Gauge wire 938 feet maximum using 18 Gauge wire[ 1493 feet maximum using 16 Gauge wire 2,362 feet maximum using 14 Gauge wire 4.6.2 Wiring Configurations Figure 4.11 illustrates SBUS Class A wiring configuration and Figure 4.12 illustrates SBUS Class B configuration. Maximum Resistance (Ohms) = 6.0 Volts Total Worst Case Current Draw (amps) Maximum Wire Length (Feet) = (6000 feet maximum) Maximum Resistance (Ohms)

  • 500
  • Rpu where: Rpu = Ohms per 1000 feet for various wire gauges (see table below) Wire Gauge Ohms per 1000 feet (Rpu) 22 16.2 18 6.4 16 4.02 14 2.54 Table 4.3 Typical Wire Resistance Per 1000 ft. Using Copper Wire 6860 Current Draw = 2 x 0.120 amps = 0.240 amps 5895XL Current Draw = 1 x 0.010 amps = 0.010 amps 5865 Current Draw = 1 x 0.200 amps = 0.200 amps 5824 Current Draw = 1 x 0.040 amps = 0.040 amps Total Worst Case Current Draw = 0.490 amps Table 4.4 Worst Case Current Draw

    Note:

    For assistance with SBUS calculations, please refer to www.silentknight.com.

    Ext. Comm

    Sbus Out

    Sbus In

    - + A B

    - + A B

    supervised, power-limited

    Facp

    SBUS device Figure 4.11 SBUS Class A Wiring For proper system supervision do not use looped wire under terminals marked A, B, +, and - of the SBUS device connectors. Break wire runs to provide supervision of connections.

    Page 34

    34 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Control Panel Installation 6855 Remote Annunciator Installation

    4.7 6855 Remote Annunciator Installation The optional model 6855 Remote Annunciator, is shown in Figure 4.13. The 6855 can be surface or flush mounted. Up to 12 annunciators can be added to the 6808 system in any combination.

    6855 installation involves the following steps:

  • Ensure power is off at the panel.
  • Mount the 6855 in the desired location (see Section 4.7.1).
  • Connect the 6855 to the panel (see Section 4.7.2).
  • Use the DIP switches on the back of the 6855 to assign an ID#. (See Section Section 4.15.1.)
  • The new 6855 module must be added to the system through programming. JumpStart Auto-Programming will add the module
  • automatically (see Section 7.1). You can also add it manually (see Section 8.2.2). Select a name, if desired. 4.7.1 Mounting the 6855 This section of the manual describes mounting the remote annunciator. The annunciator can be flush- or surface-mounted.

    Ext. Comm

    Sbus Out

    Sbus In

    - + A B

    - + A B

    supervised, power-limited

    Facp

    SBUS device Figure 4.12 SBUS Class B Wiring Model 6855 Figure 4.13 6855 Remote Annunciator

    Page 35

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 35 6855 Remote Annunciator Installation Control Panel Installation Flush Mounting Backbox dimensions are 9-9/32” W x 8-3/8” H. Minimum depth is 2". The backbox can be mounted prior to the complete installation of the 6855 using any of the mounting holes shown below.

  • Remove knockout holes as needed for wires. There are 10 knockouts available, two on each side and two in the back of the cabinet.
  • Wire the annunciator board to the main control panel. Refer to Figure 4.17.
  • Attach the annunciator and door assembly to backbox as shown below using the supplied screws.
  • Surface Mounting The optional Model RA-100TR Trim Ring Kit is available for use when surface mounting.

  • Remove the desired knockout.
  • Mark and pre-drill hole in the wall for the center top keyhole mounting bolt. Refer to Figure 4.14 for mounting hole locations.
  • Install center top fastener in the wall with the screw head protruding.
  • Place backbox over the top screw, level and secure.
  • Mark and drill the left and right upper and lower mounting holes.
  • Install remaining fasteners and tighten.
  • Run wires to the control panel. Refer to Figure 4.17.
  • mounting holes mounting holes Figure 4.14 6855 Backbox Mounting Figure 4.15 Attaching Annunciator/Door Assembly to Backbox

    Page 36

    36 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Control Panel Installation 6855 Remote Annunciator Installation

  • Place the trim ring over the back box as shown below.
  • Attach the door assembly to the backbox using the screws provided. Refer to Figure 4.15.
  • 4.7.2 6855 Connection to the Panel Connect the 6855 to the panel as shown below. Figure 4.16 Installing Trim Ring

    Sb Sa S+ S-

    Ext. Comm

    Sbus Out

    Sbus In

    - + A B

    - + A B

    Figure 4.17 6855 Connection to the Panel supervised, power-limited

    Facp

    6855 annunciator

    Page 37

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 37 5860 Remote Annunciator Installation Control Panel Installation 4.8 5860 Remote Annunciator Installation The 5860 is an optional remote annunciator. Up to 16 annunciators can be added to the 6820 system. 5860 installation involves the following steps:

  • Ensure the power is off at the panel.
  • Mount the 5860 in the desired location (see Section 4.8.1).
  • Connect the 5860 to the panel (see Figure 4.22).
  • Use the DIP switches on the back of the 5860to assign an ID# to the annunciator (see Section 4.15.1).
  • The new 5860 module must be added to the system through programming. JumpStart will add the module automatically (see
  • Section 8.6.7). You can also add it manually (see Section 8.2.2). Select a name, if desired. 4.8.1 Mounting the 5860 This section of the manual describes mounting the remote annunciator. The annunciator can be flush- or surface-mounted. Figure 4.19 shows the parts of the annunciator. Instructions for disassembling and mounting appear on the following pages.

    Fire Alarm Annunciator

    Figure 4.18 5860 Remote Annunciator

    Fire Alarm Annunciator

    Figure 4.19 5860 Annunciator Parts

    Page 38

    38 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Control Panel Installation 5860 Remote Annunciator Installation The 5860 comes from the factory fully assembled. You must disassemble it for mounting. To disassemble the annunciator, use a 5/64” hex wrench to remove the set screws, located on the bottom of the annunciator bezel. (See Figure 4.20 for location of the set screws.) Flush Mounting This section of the manual describes flush mounting. You can flush-mount with or without an electrical box. Flush Mounting with an Electrical Box The 5860 annunciator can be used with the following types of electrical boxes: 4S, single-gang, and double-gang. If an electrical box is used, the box must be 1-3/8” back from the face of the wall to accommodate the annunciator. Studs used with an elec- trical box must be 2x4” (or larger). Flush Mounting Steps

  • Cut a hole in the sheet rock to the following dimensions: 8-1/4” W x 6-5/8”H. If an electrical box is used, the box must be 1-3/8” back
  • from face of wall to accommodate the annunciator.
  • Remove knockout holes as needed for wires.
  • Fit the annunciator backbox into the hole and stabilize with mounting wires. Angle the mounting wires into the first hole past the sheet
  • rock. Secure the wires behind the screws as shown in Figure 4.21. When all four wires are in place, the backbox should fit snugly into the hole in the sheetrock.
  • After the annunciator wiring to the panel has been completed (refer to Figure 4.22), replace the electronic assembly in the back box.
  • Place the bezel over the back box and tighten the set screws on the bezel. Surface Mounting The 5860 can be mounted directly to a surface or can be attached to a single, double, or four-square electrical box. Trim Ring Kit 5860TR/G is available for use when surface mounting.
  • Drill holes in the surface to match the screw holes on the backbox. Refer to Figure 4.20 for locations.
  • Fit the trim ring over the backbox.
  • Attach the backbox to the wall using screws provided.
  • knockouts screws for placement of mounting wires Set Screw holes for inserting wires for flush-mounting (located in all corners) surface mounting holes knockouts Figure 4.20 Annunciator Backbox and Bezel Details Attach second set of wires to top of backbox. Secure wires behind screw. Insert wires at an angle into the first holes past sheetrock. Figure 4.21 Flush Mounting the Backbox

    Page 39

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 39 6860 Remote Annunciator Installation Control Panel Installation

  • Wire the annunciator to the FACP as shown below.
  • Replace the electronic assembly in the backbox. Place the bezel over the backbox and tighten the set screws on the bezel. Refer to
  • Figure 4.20 for location of set screws. 4.9 6860 Remote Annunciator Installation The optional 6860 Remote Annunciator can be surface or flush mounted. 6860 installation involves the following steps:
  • Ensure power is off at the panel.
  • Mount the 6860 in the desired location (see Section 4.9.1).
  • Connect the 6860 to the panel (see Section 4.9.2).
  • Use the DIP switches on the back of the 6860 to assign an SBUS ID# (see Section 4.15.1).
  • The 6860 module must be added to the system through programming. JumpStart Auto-Programming will add the module automatically
  • (see Section 8.6.7).

    Sb Sa S+ S-

    Ext. Comm

    Sbus Out

    Sbus In

    - + A B

    - + A B

    Figure 4.22 5860 Connection to the Panel supervised, power-limited Model 6860

    Back

    Back

    Back

    Next

    Next

    Next

    Figure 4.23 6860 Remote Annunciator

    Page 40

    40 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Control Panel Installation 6860 Remote Annunciator Installation 4.9.1 Mounting the 6860 This section of the manual describes mounting the remote annunciator. The annunciator can be flush or surface mounted. Flush Mounting This section of the manual describes flush mounting. Follow these steps to flush mount the 6860.

  • The back box dimensions are 9.25” W x 8.375” H. The minimum depth required is 2". Mount the backbox using the mounting holes
  • shown below.
  • Remove knockouts as needed for wires. There are 10 knockouts available, two on each side and two in the back of the cabinet.
  • Wire the annunciator board to the main control panel as shown in Figure 4.27.
  • Attach the annunciator and door assembly to back box as shown below using the supplied screws.
  • Surface Mounting The RA-100TR Red Trim Ring kit is available for use when surface mounting the 6860.
  • Remove the desired knockout.
  • Mark and pre-drill hole in the wall for the center top keyhole mounting bolt. Refer to Figure 4.24 for mounting hole locations.
  • Install center top fastener in the wall with the screw head protruding.
  • Place backbox over the top screw, level and secure.
  • Mark and drill the left and right upper and lower mounting holes.
  • Install remaining fasteners and tighten.
  • Run wires to the control panel. Refer to Figure 4.27.
  • mounting holes mounting holes Figure 4.24 6860 Backbox Mounting Figure 4.25 Attaching Annunciator / Door Assembly to Backbox

    Page 41

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 41 5815XL Installation Control Panel Installation

  • Place the trim ring over the back box as shown below.
  • Attach the door assembly to the backbox using the screws provided. Refer to Figure 4.25.
  • 4.9.2 6860 Connection to the Panel Connect the 6860 to the panel as shown below. 4.10 5815XL Installation The 5815XL SLC expander lets you add additional addressable SD devices. The maximum number of SD SLC devices per panel is 635. The number of 5815XL modules is limited by the maximum number of SBUS devices. To install the 5815XL:
  • Make sure power is off at the panel.
  • Mount the 5815XL in the 6820 cabinet, the 5895XL cabinet, or the 5815RMK remote mounting kit. Use the standoffs located under the
  • control panel board assembly and secure with screws provided with the 5815XL. For additional information, see the 5895XL Installation Manual or the 5815RMK Installation Instructions.
  • Connect the 5815XL to the control panel. (See Figure 4.29.)
  • Use onboard DIP switches to select an SBUS ID#. (See Section 4.15.1.)
  • Add the 5815XL module to the system through programming. JumpStart will add the module automatically (see Section 7.1). You can
  • also add it manually (see Section 8.2.2). Select a name, if desired (see “Naming Modules” on page 91). You are now ready to connect SLC devices to the 5815XL (see Section 8.5.1). Figure 4.26 Installing Trim Ring

    Sb Sa S+ S-

    Sbus Out

    - + A B

    supervised, power-limited Figure 4.27 6860 Connection to the Panel

    Facp

    6860

    Note:

    5815XL will only support SD protocol devices on this panel.

    Page 42

    42 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Control Panel Installation 6815 Installation Figure 4.28 is a drawing of the 5815XL board, showing the location of terminals and DIP switches. 4.10.1 5815XL Connection to the Panel Connect the 5815XL to the control panel as shown in Figure 4.29. After the 5815XL is connected to the panel, it must be added to the sys- tem. This programming steps are described in Section 8.2.2. 4.11 6815 Installation The 6815 SLC expander lets you add additional addressable devices. The maximum number of SK SLC devices per panel is 1,110. The number of s is limited by the maximum number of SBUS devices. To install the 6815:

  • Make sure power is off at the panel.
  • Mount the 6815 in the 6820 cabinet, the 5895XL cabinet, or the 5815RMK remote mounting kit. Use the standoffs located under the
  • control panel board assembly and secure with screws provided with the 6815. For additional information see the 5895XL Installation Manual .
  • Connect the 6815 to the control panel. (See Section 4.11.1.)
  • Use the onboard DIP switches to select an SBUS ID#. (See Section 4.15.1.)
  • Add the 6815 module to the system through programming. JumpStart will add the module automatically (see Section 7.1). You can also
  • add it manually (see Section 8.2.2). Select a name, if desired (see “Naming Modules” on page 91). You are now ready to connect SLC devices to the 6815 (see Section 8.5.2).

    Sb U S

    – +

    A

    B

    Slc O U T

    S+

    Sc -

    S+

    Sc -

    Slc In

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 Figure 4.28 5815XL Board to panel via SBUS to SLC loop address DIP switch

    Sb Us

    – +

    A

    B

    Sl Co Ut

    S+

    Sc -

    S+

    Sc -

    Slc In

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6

    Ext. Comm

    Sbus Out

    Sbus In

    - + A B

    - + A B

    Sb U S

    – +

    A

    B

    Sl Co Ut

    S+

    S C-

    S+

    Sc -

    Slc In

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6

    Facp

    5815Xl

    5815Xl

    supervised, power-limited Figure 4.29 5815XL Connection to FACP

    Note:

    An external 6815 will support SK or SWIFT SLC devices.

    Page 43

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 43 5824 Serial/Parallel Interface Module Installation Control Panel Installation Figure 4.30 is a drawing of the 6815 board, showing the location of terminals and DIP switches. 4.11.1 6815 Connection to the Panel Connect the 6815 to the control panel as shown in Figure 4.31. After the 6815 is connected to the panel, it must be added to the system. This programming steps are described in Section 8.2.2. 4.12 5824 Serial/Parallel Interface Module Installation The 5824 serial/parallel interface module allows you to connect a printer to the panel, so you can print a real-time log of system events. Instructions for installing the 5824 appear below. The 5824 is for ancillary use only. 5824 installation involves the following steps:

  • Ensure that all power has been removed from the FACP.
  • Connect the 5824 to the FACP as shown in Figure 4.32.
  • Use the DIP switches on the 5824 board to assign an SBUS ID# to the 5824 (see Section 4.15.1).
  • Sb U S

    – +

    A

    B

    Slc O U T

    S+

    Sc -

    S+

    Sc -

    Slc In

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 DIP switches for setting IDs to panel SBUS to SLC loop Figure 4.30 6815 Board

    Sbu S

    – +

    A

    B

    Slc O U T

    S+

    Sc -

    S+

    Sc-

    Slc In

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6

    Sbu S

    – +

    A

    B

    Slc O U T

    S+

    Sc-

    S+

    Sc-

    Slc In

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6

    Ext. Comm

    Sbus Out

    Sbus In

    - + A B

    - + A B

    Facp

    6815 6815 supervised, power-limited Figure 4.31 6815 Connection to FACP

    Note:

    There is a maximum of four 5824 modules allowed per panel.

    Page 44

    44 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Control Panel Installation 5880 LED I/O Module

  • Configure the 5824 device through programming. See Section 4.12.1 below.
  • 4.12.1 Selecting 5824 Options Configuring the 5824 includes the following steps:
  • Add the module to the system. JumpStart will add the module automatically (see Section 7.1). You can also add it manually. See
  • Section 8.2.2.
  • Select a name, if desired (see “Naming Modules” on page 91).
  • Select options for the printer and the output port.
  • Printer and Output Port Options
  • From the Main Menu, select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Select 1 for Module.
  • Select 1 for Edit Module.
  • From the list that displays, select the 5824 module you want to configure.
  • Press right arrow twice to skip over the Enter Module ID and Enter Module Name options. A screen similar to the one shown in
  • Figure 4.33 will display.
  • Select options for the printer as needed for your installation. Most printers are parallel.
  • If you are using a serial printer, use the next screen to select serial port options as required for your printer. Refer to your printer manual
  • if you need more information. 4.13 5880 LED I/O Module The 5880 is an LED driver board that can be used in a wide variety of applications, including as an interface with most customized floor plan annunciator boards. The 5880 can drive up to 40 LEDs and has one PZT controller. The 5880 also has eight inputs for dry contact monitor- ing. When used with the 6820EVS, the 5880 inputs can be programmed to replicate the eight EVS buttons located on the front of the voice control module. A maximum of eight 5880 modules can be used in the system. The following sub-sections describe hardware installation. Refer to Section 8 for programming information.

    Ext. Comm

    Sbus Out

    Sbus In

    - + A B

    - + A B

    S+

    S-

    On

    1 2 3 4 5

    A

    B

    Sbus

    DIP switches 5824 connectors for connection to printer parallel serial supervised, power-limited

    Facp

    Figure 4.32 5824 Connection to the Panel Option Choices Baud Rate: 75 - 19200 Data Bits: 5 - 8 Stop Bits: 0.5, 1, 2 Parity: None, Even, Odd Table 4.5 Serial Printer Options Select Yes if printer should be supervised for Out-of-Paper and Offline conditions. Select type of printer, Parallel or Serial. Monitor Printer=Yes Output Port=Parallel Event Logging=NO More Figure 4.33 Selecting Printer and Output Port Options

    Page 45

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 45 5880 LED I/O Module Control Panel Installation 4.13.1 5880 Board Layout Figure 4.34 shows the locations of screw terminals for connection to the panel and contact monitor wiring, pin connectors for connecting LEDs and the DIP switch for selecting an SBUS ID number for the 5880. 4.13.2 FACP Connection The 5880 connects to the panel via the SBUS. Make connections as shown in Figure 4.35. After the 5880 is connected to the panel, it must be added to the system. This programming step is described in Section 8.2.2. 4.13.3 LED Wiring There are four 12-pin connectors on the 5880 board for connecting LEDs. Each LED gets its power from Pin 11. Internal resistors are sized so that there is approximately 10 mA of current for each LED; no series resistors are required. LED outputs can be mapped to output circuits. See Section 8.5.4 for programming details. Wire the LEDs as shown in Figure 4.36.

    S-

    S+

    A

    B

    In - 48

    C+

    In - 47 In - 46

    C+

    In - 45 In - 44

    C+

    In - 43 In - 42

    C+

    In - 41

    P1

    P2

    P3

    P4

    1 10 11 20 21 30 31 40 LED Out LED Power not used LED Out LED Power not used LED Out LED Power not used LED Out LED Power not used SBUS (ID#) Address DIP switch SBUS Connector Figure 4.34 5880 Board Layout dry contact inputs- supervised, power-limited

    Ext. Comm

    Sbus Out

    Sbus In

    - + A B

    - + A B

    S-

    S+

    A

    B

    1

    On

    2 3 4 5 supervised, power-limited 5880

    Facp

    Figure 4.35 5880 Connection to 6820

    Page 46

    46 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Control Panel Installation 5880 LED I/O Module On connector P1, Pin 12 is an open collector output for controlling a piezo. If used, the 5880 piezo will match the piezo pattern of the onboard or remote annunciator. 4.13.4 Dry Contact Wiring The 8 input circuits on the 5880 board are for monitoring switch inputs. Any type of switch supported by the control panel can be used with the 5880. For example, you can use a 5880 to monitor pull stations, water flow, tamper, reset, or silence switches. Wire dry contacts as shown in Figure 4.37. Notice grouping of terminals. Power terminals are shared by two inputs.

    Note:

    The circuit connected to “Open Collector Output” (last pin on P1) must be current limited so that no more than 100 mA of current is allowed to flow into the open collector transistor. Figure 4.36 5880 Board Layout

    Led1

    Led2

    Led3

    Led4

    Led5

    Led6

    Led7

    Led8

    Led9

    Led10

    LED Power no connection Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

    Led11

    Led12

    Led13

    Led14

    Led15

    Led16

    Led17

    Led18

    Led19

    Led20

    LED Power no connection

    P1

    P2

    Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Cathode LEDs Anode Cathode LEDs Anode P3 and P4 are wired the same as P2.

    In - 48

    C+

    In - 47 In - 46

    C+

    In - 45 In - 44

    C+

    In - 43 In - 42

    C+

    In - 41

    4.7kΩ EOL resistors supervised wiring 5880 Figure 4.37 Dry Contact Wiring

    Page 47

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 47 5865-3 / 5865-4 LED Annunciator Installation Control Panel Installation 4.14 5865-3 / 5865-4 LED Annunciator Installation The 5865-3 and 5865-4 are LED annunciators. The 5865-4 has 30 mappable LEDs, remote fire system silence and fire system reset key switches, and a general system trouble LED. The 5865-3 has 30 mappable LEDs only. These are arranged as 15 pairs of red (typically used for alarm) and yellow (typically used for trouble) LEDs. Installation of the 5865-3 and 5865-4 is identical. The keyswitches and the trouble LED follow the behavior of other system annunciators and do not require any installation steps. The following sub-sections describe how to install the 5865-3 and 5865-4 hardware. Refer to Section 8 for programming information.

    4.14.1 FACP Connection The 5865 connects to the panel via the SBUS. Make connections as shown below. After the 5865 is connected to the panel, it must be added to the system. This programming step is described in Section 8.2.2.

    Note:

    This manual uses “5865” when referring to aspects of the 5865-3 and 5865-4 that are common to both models.

    Silence

    Trouble

    Reset

    1 2 9 10 11 12 21 22 19 20 29 30 3 4 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 17 18 23 24 25 26 27 28 Note: Numbers indicate point numbers for 5865. They do not appear on board assembly. Note: 5865 switches follow the main FACP, no installation or programming required. 5865-4 Board Assembly 5865-3 Board Assembly Plexiglass plate mounted to the LED board at the factory. Do not remove. Figure 4.38 5865-3 and 5865-4 Assembly (Front View)

    Ext. Comm

    Sbus Out

    Sbus In

    - + A B

    - + A B

    supervised, power-limited Class B Figure 4.39 5865 Connection to the FACP

    Facp

    5865

    Page 48

    48 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Control Panel Installation Configuring SBUS Modules 4.14.2 5865 Mounting Mount the 5865-4 to a standard 4-gang electrical box. Mount the 5865-3 to a standard 3-gang electrical box. In Figure 4.40, the 5865-4 attached to a 4-gang box, is used as an example. The 5865 ships with a set of zone description labels that can be inserted into the 5865 board assembly. These labels can be used in a type- writer or can be written on by hand. Slide the labels under the plexiglass as shown in Figure 4.41. The LEDs will show through the label when illuminated. 4.15 Configuring SBUS Modules This section describes how to configure any system hardware modules that have been added to the system. 4.15.1 Assigning SBUS Module IDs SBUS devices on a panel are addressed from 1 to 63. Although the addressing scheme allows 63 SBUS devices to be connected to a panel, the actual number is limited by current draw and SBUS bandwidth usage as discussed below. When installing a hardware module (see Table 4.1 for a list of compatible devices), you must use the DIP switches on the module to assign an ID number to the module. Address zero is an invalid address and is not allowed. Attach the 5865 to a standard 3- or 4-gang electrical box. The 5865 is mounted to a plexiglass plate at the factory. cover plate Figure 4.40 5865 Mounting Example

    Silence

    Trouble

    Reset

    Top

    Zone 1 1st Flr South Zone 2 1st Flr West Zone 3 2nd Flr West Zone 4 2nd Flr East Zone 5 3rd Floor Figure 4.41 Inserting Zone Description Labels

    Page 49

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 49 Telephone Connection Control Panel Installation Figure 4.42 shows all possible DIP switch positions and their correlation to a numerical ID. For example, to select ID 2, place DIP switch 2 in the up or on position. Refer to Section 8.2 to edit, add, delete, and view module list. 4.15.2 SBUS Bandwidth Considerations Each SBUS device generates a certain amount of traffic on the SBUS. Generally, the amount of traffic generated depends on the type of SBUS device. To help you figure out the SBUS bandwidth usage of a given collection of devices, a tool is available on the Silent Knight website (www.silentknight.com). The tool will serve as a guide to help determine how heavily loaded an SBUS is with respect to bandwidth. We recommend you use this tool if you plan to have more than eight SBUS devices per SBUS. Remember to include devices that are on 5895XL SBUS repeaters in your list of devices for SBUS bandwidth calculations. Refer to Section 4.6.1. 4.16 Telephone Connection Connect the telephone lines as shown in Figure 4.43. The 7860 phone cord is available from Silent Knight for this purpose. If you do not use the model 7860 to connect to the phone lines, the wire used for the connection must be 26 AWG or larger diameter wire. A number of programmable options are available for customizing telephone lines. These options are described in “Phone Lines” on page 104. 1 4 5 6 2 3 1 4 5 6 2 3 1 4 5 6 2 3 1 4 5 6 2 3

    On

    Off

    address address address address Figure 4.42 Possible SBUS Module Addresses

    Ext. Comm

    Voice

    Network

    Data

    Network

    Telco Phone Telco Phone

    Slc Slc Pgm

    Battery

    RING1 TIP1 RING1 TIP1 RING2 TIP2 RING2 TIP2

    Out- Out+ In- In+ - +

  • +
  • red green gray brown red green gray brown Model #7860 Model #7860 supervised Figure 4.43 Connection of Telephone Lines

    Page 50

    50 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Control Panel Installation Flexput I/O Circuits 4.17 Flexput I/O Circuits The two Flexput circuits are an innovative and versatile feature of the control panel. They can be used as: Class A or B notification circuits, Class A or B initiation circuits (either 2- or 4-wire detectors), or as auxiliary power (resettable, continuous, sounder base sync, or door holder). The polarity of the Flexput terminals differs depending on whether the circuit is programmed as an input or an output circuit. If the circuit is programmed as an input circuit (for a detector or normally open contact) the X terminal is negative and O terminal is positive. If the circuit is programmed as an output circuit (Aux power or NAC) then the X terminal is positive and the O terminal is negative. 4.17.1 Conventional Notification Appliance This sub-section of the manual explains how to install conventional notification appliances for Class A and Class B configurations. Class B Notification Wiring You must use an appliance listed in the Device Compatibility Document. To install a circuit:

  • Wire Class B notification appliances as shown in Table 4.44.
  • Configure the circuit through programming (see Section 8.5).
  • Maximum voltage drop is 3V per Class B notification. Class A Notification Wiring You must use an appliance listed in the Device Compatibility Document. To install a Class A notification appliance circuit:
  • Wire the Class A notification appliances as shown in Figure 4.45.
  • Note:

    Where power to a device or appliance is supplied over a separate pathway from the notification appliance and/or SLC, the operation of the power pathway shall meet the performance requirements of the, notification appliance, and/or signaling-line circuit(s) and the power circuit shall be defined by the applicable class in the product installation wiring diagram/instructions consistent with the operation of the particular power pathway. Current Maximum Impedance

    1.0A

    1.5A

    2.0A

    1.5Ω

    2.5A

    1.2Ω

    3.0A

    1.0Ω

    Table 4.6 Maximum Impedance Class B

    Lay2

    C No

    NAC1 NAC2 NAC3 NAC4 O I/05 X O I/06 X + - + - + - + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Alarm Polarity Shown 4.7 kΩ EOL Regulated, 24 VDC Full Wave Rectified circuits. Rated at 27.4 VDC, 3A per circuit, 6A max total. supervised, power-limited Figure 4.44 Class B Notification Appliance Circuit Wiring !

    Caution: System Supervision

    FOR PROPER SYSTEM SUPERVISION DO NOT USE LOOPED WIRE UNDER TERMINALS MARKED – AND + OF THE

    Nac Circuit. Break Wire Runs To Provide Supervision Of Connections.

    Page 51

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 51 Flexput I/O Circuits Control Panel Installation

  • Configure the circuit for Class A in programming (see Section 8.5).
  • Maximum voltage drop is 3V per Class A circuit. See Table 4.7. 4.17.2 Conventional Input Switch Circuits This section of the manual explains how to install conventional initiating devices for Class A or Class B configurations. Class B Inputs You can connect conventional Class B switches, such as waterflow switches and pull stations, directly to the Flexput circuits of the control panel. To install a Class B switch, do the following.
  • Wire the Class B switch as shown in Figure 4.46.
  • Configure the circuit through programming (see Section 8.5).
  • Lay2

    C No

    NAC1 NAC2 NAC3 NAC4 O I/05 X O I/06 X + - + - + - + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Figure 4.45 Class A Notification Appliance Circuit Configuration supervised, power-limited Alarm Polarity Shown Regulated, 24 VDC Full Wave Rectified circuits. Rated at 27.4 VDC, 3A per circuit, 6A max total.

    Note:

    In programming any point that uses multiple Flexput circuits, the lowest Flexput circuit number is used to refer to the circuit pair. For example, Figure 4.45 uses both Flexput circuit 1 and 2, so in programming, these would be referred to as point 1. Current Maximum Impedance

    1.0A

    1.5A

    2.0A

    1.5Ω

    2.5A

    1.2Ω

    3.0A

    1.0Ω

    Table 4.7 Maximum Impedance Class A

    Lay2

    C No

    NAC1 NAC2 NAC3 NAC4 O I/05 X O I/06 X + - + - + - + - EOL 4.7 kΩ supervised, power-limited Figure 4.46 Class B Input Switches

    Page 52

    52 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Control Panel Installation Flexput I/O Circuits Class A Inputs You can connect conventional Class A switches, such as waterflow switches and pull stations, directly to the Flexput circuits of the control panel. To install a Class A switch:

  • Wire the Class A switch as shown in Figure 4.47.
  • Configure the circuit through programming (see Section Section 8.5).
  • 4.17.3 Installing 2-Wire Smoke Detectors Any compatible, UL-listed two-wire smoke detector can be used with the control panel. Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for a list of devices. Figures 4.48 and 4.49 illustrate how to connect a UL-listed 2-wire detector to the control panel. Installing 2-Wire Class B Smoke Detectors To install a Class B two-wire smoke detector, wire as shown in Figure 4.48.

    Lay2

    C No

    NAC1 NAC2 NAC3 NAC4 O I/05 X O I/06 X + - + - + - + - Maximum Impedance per circuit is 50Ω. supervised, power-limited Figure 4.47 Class A Initiating Switches

    Note:

    In programming any point that uses multiple Flexput circuits, the lowest Flexput circuit number is used to refer to the circuit pair. For example, Figure 4.47 uses both Flexput circuit 5 and 6, so in programming it would be referred to as point 5.

    Lay2

    C No

    NAC1 NAC2 NAC3 NAC4 O I/05 X O I/06 X + - + - + - + - +
  • +
  • EOL 4.7 kΩ
  • supervised, power limited Flexput Circuit 6 is used as an example. Either Flexput circuit can be used. Figure 4.48 Two-Wire Class B Smoke Detector

    Page 53

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 53 Flexput I/O Circuits Control Panel Installation Installing 2-Wire Class A Smoke Detectors To install a Class A two-wire smoke detector, wire as shown below. 4.17.4 Installing 4-Wire Smoke Detectors Any compatible, UL-listed four-wire smoke detector can be used with the control panel. Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for a list of devices. Figures 4.50 and 4.51 illustrate how to connect a UL-listed four-wire detector to the control panel. Installing a Class B 4-Wire Smoke Detector Figure 4.50 illustrates how to install a 4-wire Class B smoke detector. Conventions used for wiring 4-wire Class B loops:

  • One Class B 4-wire smoke detector loops can be connected to the control panel.
  • The Class B loop input is paired with a unique power source as shown below.
  • The loop gets smoke power from the even numbered Flexput circuit and the contact input is connected to the odd numbered Flexput
  • circuit. Installing 4-Wire Class A Smoke Detectors Figure 4.51 illustrates how to install a 4-wire Class A detector. Conventions used for wiring 4-wire Class A loops:
  • One Class A 4-wire loop can be connected to the control panel.
  • The wiring class of the external power source must match the wiring class of the device being powered.
  • Lay2

    C No

    NAC1 NAC2 NAC3 NAC4 O I/05 X O I/06 X + - + - + - + - +
  • +
  • +
  • -
  • Any 2-wire smoke detector listed in the Device Compatibility Document supervised, power limited Figure 4.49 Two-Wire Class A Smoke Detector Connections

    Note:

    In programming any point that uses multiple Flexput circuits, the lowest Flexput circuit number is used to refer to the circuit pair. For example, Figure 4.49 uses both Flexput circuit 5 and 6, so in programming it would be referred to as point 5 + +

    Lay2

    C No

    NAC1 NAC2 NAC3 NAC4 O I/05 X O I/06 X + - + - + - + - Figure 4.50 Class B 4-Wire Smoke Detector Connections Air Products

    Pam-2

    Supervision Module blue orange white gray supervised, power limited

    Esl 449Ct

    Note:

    In programming any point that uses multiple Flexput circuits, the lowest Flexput circuit number is used to refer to the circuit pair. For example, Figure 4.50 uses both Flexput circuit 5 and 6, so in programming it would be referred to as point 5.

    Page 54

    54 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Control Panel Installation Flexput I/O Circuits

  • Smoke power is supplied to the Class A loop as shown below.
  • 4.17.5 Auxiliary Power Installation Flexput Circuits 1-6 on the control panel can be used as auxiliary power circuits. The four types of auxiliary power available are: • Door Holder Power • Constant Power • Resettable Power • Sounder Sync Power Auxiliary power circuits are power limited. Each circuit can source up to 3A (total current for all Flexput circuits must not exceed 6.0 A). To install an auxiliary power circuit:
  • Wire the Flexput circuit(s) that will be used for auxiliary power. See Figure 4.2 for location of Flexput circuits. When used as auxiliary
  • power, terminals labeled “O” are negative, terminals labeled “X” are positive.
  • Configure the auxiliary power output through programming (see Section 8.5).
  • Door Holder Power Door holder power is intended for fire door applications. When there are no fire system alarms in the system and the panel has AC power, door holder circuits have 24 volt power present at their terminals. Any fire system alarm will cause power to disconnect. Power will be re- applied when the fire system is reset. If AC power is not present, the auxiliary door holder power will be disconnected to conserve the battery backup. When AC power is restored, power is immediately restored to the door holder circuits. Use a UL-listed door holder for this application. Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for compatible door holder list. Constant Power Use constant power for applications that require a constant auxiliary power source. Power is always present at constant circuits. Resettable Power Resettable power is typically used to power beam detectors, flame detectors and conventional 4-wire smoke detectors. For circuits selected as Resettable, 24-volt power is always present at the terminals unless a fire system reset occurs. If a fire system reset occurs, power is discon- nected from the terminals for 30 seconds, then re-applied. Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for compatible four wire smoke detectors. Sounder Sync Power Sounder Sync Power continuously outputs the System Sensor synchronization pattern and is intended for use with B200S sounder bases. Figure 4.51 Class A 4-Wire Smoke Detector Connections Air Products

    Pam-2

    Supervision Module blue orange white gray supervised, power limited

    Note:

    In programming, any point that uses multiple Flexput circuits are always referred to as the lowest Flexput circuit number used. In this example, Figure 4.51 uses Flexput circuits 5, 6 together with NAC 4. In programming (4, 5, 6) would be referred to as point 5.

    Page 55

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 55 Onboard Relays (Conventional) Control Panel Installation 4.18 Onboard Relays (Conventional) The control panel has two built-in programmable relays and a built-in trouble relay. All relays are Form C rated at 2.5 A @ 24VDC. 4.18.1 Trouble Relay The control panel has a dedicated Form C trouble relay. The relay provides a normally open and a normally closed contact. The trouble relay will deactivate under any trouble condition. 4.18.2 Programmable Relays The control panel has two Form C programmable relays. Each relay provides a normally open and a normally closed contact. To install one or two programmable relays, follow these steps.

  • Wire Relay 1 and/or Relay 2 as needed for your application. See Figure 4.2 for the location of the relay terminals.
  • Configure the relay through programming (see Section 8.5).
  • 4.19 Remote Station Applications 4.19.1 Keltron Model 3158 Installation The control panel is compatible with Keltron Model 3158, used for direct connection to a Keltron receiver. The 3158 reports alarms, super- visories, and troubles. The steps for connecting the 3158 to the control panel. Refer to the 3158 installation instructions for complete information.
  • Wire the 3158 to the control panel as shown in the connection list.
  • Wire the 3158 within 20 feet of the control panel. Wiring must be enclosed in conduit.
  • Program control panel Relay 1 for alarm.
  • Program Flexput circuit 5 for alarm.
  • No

    C

    Com

    Relay 2

    Trouble

    Com

    No

    C

    Relay 1

    Com

    No

    C

    Figure 4.52 Conventional Relay Circuits

    Trouble

    Nc C No

    Relay1

    Nc C No

    Relay2

    Nc C No

    Nac1 Nac2 Nac3 Nac4

    + - + - + - + - Connect to power-limited sources only. Figure 4.53 Conventional Relay Circuits

    Note:

    The NC contact is the relay contact that is closed when the panel has power and there are no trouble conditions.

    Page 56

    56 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Control Panel Installation Remote Station Applications

  • Program Flexput circuit 6 for supervisory non latching.
  • 4.19.2 City Box Connection Using the 5220 Module This section describes how to connect the control panel to a local energy municipal fire alarm box or “city box” as required by NFPA 72 Auxiliary Protected Fire Alarm systems for fire alarm service. The city (master) box is an enclosure that contains a manually operated trans- mitter used to send an alarm to the municipal communication center which houses the central operating part of the fire alarm system. City Box Standby Current: 0 (Notification supervision current accounted for in control panel draw.) Alarm Current: 1 Amp for 1 second 27.2 VDC max. The maximum coil and wire resistance (combined) must not exceed 30 ohms. To install the 5220 for city box connection:
  • Use one of the knockouts on the right side of the control panel to connect the 5220 using a short piece of conduit (must not exceed 20
  • feet in length).
  • Wire the 5220 to the control panel as shown in Figure 4.55. This drawing also shows how to connect the city box coil to terminals 3 and
  • 4 on the 5220. Do not install an EOL resistor in the terminals of the Flexput circuit used for this application.
  • Connect earth ground wire to the 5220 chassis with mounting screw.
  • +
  • -
  • +
  • + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    Trouble

    Nc C No

    Relay1

    Nc C No

    Relay2

    Nc C No

    Nac1 Nac2 Nac3 Nac4

    + - + - + - + -

    Sbus Out

    Sbus In

    - + A B

    - + A B

    This is not suitable for remote station protected premises service where separate transmission circuits are required for fire supervisory, if applicable, and trouble signals. This is intended for connection to a polarity reversal circuit of a remote station receiving unit having compatible ratings. All circuits power-limited. All wiring supervised. Keltron Receiving Equipment to earth ground #4 not used 4.7K EOLs Model 3158 Figure 4.54 Keltron 3158 Connection to Control Panel

    Page 57

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 57 Remote Station Applications Control Panel Installation

  • Assign this NAC to an output group that is mapped to activate with non silenceable constant output in response to a system general
  • alarm condition. Refer to Section 8.5.3. It is not possible to reset the remote indication until you clear the condition and reset the control panel. 4.19.3 Using the Addressable Relay Module for City Box Connection Wire the Relay module as shown in Figure 4.56. 1 2 3 4 1 4

    Trouble

    Nc C No

    Relay1

    Nc C No

    Relay2

    Nc C No

    Nac1 Nac2 Nac3 Nac4

    + - + - + - + -

    Sbus Out

    Sbus In

    - + A B

    - + A B

    Intended for connection to a polarity reversal circuit of a Remote Station receiving unit having compatible ratings. The shunt connection is recognized only as a supplementary signaling unit as part of a local control unit and is not recognized as an auxiliary control unit connection per NFPA 72. NAC circuit 1 used as an example. Any NAC circuit can be used. non-supervised, non-power-limited city box orange yellow red brown Figure 4.55 City Box Connection

    Trouble

    Nc C No

    Relay1

    Nc C No

    Relay2

    Nc C No

    Nac1

    + - UL listed EOL must be Installed in City Box Enclosure to SBUS out (+) to SBUS out (-) to SLC (-) (+) to city box

    Facp

    Sk-Relay

    Figure 4.56 Relay Module for City Box Connection

    Page 58

    58 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Control Panel Installation Remote Station Applications 4.19.4 NFPA 72 Polarity Reversal Using the 5220 Module When the 5220 is wired and programmed for polarity reversal, it reports alarm and trouble events to a remote site. Alarms will override trou- ble conditions and it will not be possible to reset the remote indicator until the condition is cleared and the control panel is reset. If an alarm condition occurs, the alarm relay will close, overriding the trouble condition. Standby Current: 100 mA, 24 VDC Alarm Current: 100 mA, 24 VDC To install the 5220 for polarity reversal, follow the steps below:

  • Locate the knockout on the right side of the control panel cabinet to connect the 5220 using a short piece of conduit (must not exceed 20
  • feet in length).
  • Wire the 5220 to the control panel using the four-wire pigtail provided as shown in Figure 4.57. This diagram also shows how to
  • connect the 5220 to the remote indicator. Do not install an EOL resistor in the terminals of the Flexput circuit used for this application.
  • Connect earth ground wire to the 5220 chassis with mounting screw.
  • Program the circuit used as a notification circuit, refer to Section 8.5.3. Assign the NAC circuit to an output group that is mapped to
  • activate with non silenceable constant output in response to a system general alarm condition.
  • If necessary, adjust loop current using the potentiometer (R10) on the 5220 board. Normal loop current is 2-8 mA with a 1k ohm remote
  • station receiving unit. Maximum loop resistance is 3k ohm. Using the 7644-L8 Module When the 7644-L8 is used for polarity reversal, it allows alarm and trouble events to be reported to a remote site. Alarms will override trou- ble conditions and it will not be possible to reset the remote indicator until the condition is cleared and the control panel is reset. Installing the 7644-L8 for Polarity Reversal
  • Wire the 7644-L8 to the control panel as shown in Figure 4.59. Do not install an EOL resistor on the terminals of the circuit used.
  • Program the circuit as a notification circuit. See Section 8.5.3.
  • Note:

    Intended for connection to a polarity reversal circuit of a control unit at the protected premises having compatible rating. Intended for connection to a Polarity Reversal circuit of a Remote Station receiving unit having compatible ratings.

    Sbus Out

    Sbus In

    - + A B

    - + A B

    +
  • 1
  • 2 3 4 1 4

    Trouble

    Nc C No

    Relay1

    Nc C No

    Relay2

    Nc C No

    Nac1 Nac2 Nac3 Nac4

    + - + - + - + - All circuits power-limited All wiring supervised. Jumper terminals 3 & 4 when City Box is not used. remote indicator Program relay for alarm orange yellow red brown NAC circuit 2 and Relay 1 used as examples. Any NAC and relay circuit can be used. Figure 4.57 Polarity Reversal Connection Using the 5220 Module

    Note:

    Use only Flexput/NAC circuits on the control panel for reverse polarity.

    Page 59

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 59 Remote Station Applications Control Panel Installation

  • Map the group to activate non silenceable, constant on in response to a system general alarm, and to disconnect in response to a system
  • trouble. This connection is intended for connection to a polarity reversal circuit of a remote station receiving unit having compatible rating. +

    O I/01 X

    O I/02 X

    O I/03 X

    O I/04 X

    O I/05 X

    O I/06 X

    O I/07 X

    O I/08 X

    Battery

    + - remote indicator black white black white

    7644-L8

    7644-L8

    1k Figure 4.58 Polarity Reversal Connection Using the 7644-L8 – +

    Trouble

    Nc C No

    Relay1

    Nc C No

    Relay2

    Nc C No

    Nac1 Nac2 Nac3 Nac4

    + - + - + - + - remote indicator black white black white

    7644-L8

    7644-L8

    1k Figure 4.59 Polarity Reversal Connection Using the 7644-L8

    Page 60

    60 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Control Panel Installation Remote Station Applications 4.19.5 Transmitter Activated by Dry Contacts This section describes the connection of a UL 864 listed remote station transmitter to the 6820 dry relay contacts. The 6820 FACP contacts must be supervised by the remote station transmitter module using end-of-line resistors (ELRs) with a value determined by the transmitter manufacturer. Power is also provided by the remote station transmitter manufacturer. Refer to the remote station transmitter manufacturer’s manual for details.

    Trouble

    Nc C No

    Relay1

    Nc C No

    Relay2

    Nc C No

    Nac1 Nac2 Nac3 Nac4

    + - + - + - + - Note: The trouble relay is a fail-safe relay. With power applied to the FACP and no troubles to the panel, the contacts should be in the indication indicated in the drawing. trouble relay supervisory relay alarm relay typical input zone triggers Do not loop wire under terminals. Break wire runs to provide supervision of connections. Figure 4.60 Transmitter Activated by Dry Contacts

    Page 61

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 61 Section 5: Common Communications Link 5.1 Network System Hardware Features 6820 panels can be networked to create a virtual system that is larger than 1,110 addressable points. Each additional provides another 1,110 addressable points to the network total. For example, a network of 17- 6820panels provides a maximum addressable point capacity of 18,870 points (1,110 x 17 = 18,870). 5.1.1 Panels 6820 and other applicable addressable panels can be linked together for common communications to the central station. “Sites” are used to allow for individual or common annunciation across the link. Up to 17 sites can be activated and programmed for the link. This does not cre- ate a peer-to-peer network and will not operate as one. 5.1.2 Wiring Options to Connect Panels

  • Fiber Optic Single Mode - must use the -NIC and -FSL for up to 30dB loss of signal separation. -FSL connects to the link using 9/125
  • micron single-mode fiber
  • Fiber Optic Multi-Mode - must use the -NIC and -FML for up to 8dB loss of signal separation. -FML connects to the link using
  • 62.5/125 micron multi-mode fiber
  • Twisted Pair Copper Wire - must use the -NIC to provide up to 3,000 feet of separation.
  • All methods of panel connectivity can be used within the same linked system. 5.2 SK-NIC Connection Options When linking a group of 6820 panels, you must use the SK-NIC to link the panels together. See Figure 5.1 and Figure 5.2, for internal mounting or external mounting of SK-NIC option.

    Use provided 2’ cable and wire in conduit.

    Facp

    Facp

    Facp

    Sk-Nic

    Sk-Nic

    Sk-Nic

    Class B wiring Class A wiring Figure 5.1 External SK-NIC Wiring Option

    Facp

    Facp

    Facp

    Sk-Nic

    Sk-Nic

    Sk-Nic

    Class B wiring Class A wiring Figure 5.2 Internal SK-NIC Wiring Option

    Page 62

    62 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Common Communications Link SK-NIC Wiring Options 5.3 SK-NIC Wiring Options Linking a group of 6820 panels requires the use of a network interface card with each panel. The SK-NIC connects to other linked units using unshielded, twisted-pair wiring or fiber optic cable. 5.3.1 Fiber Loop Modules Two types of fiber- optic modules are available to use to transmit and receive communication with the SK-NIC. For more information, see the SK-FML/ SK-FSL Installation Instructions P/N LS10178-001SK-E. The SK-FML (Fiber-Optic Multi-Mode) and SK-FSL (Fiber-Optic Single-Mode) are plug-in fiber loop modules. The two types of fiber optic modules are used as one channel to transmit or receive communications with the SK-NIC, ARCNET communication circuit. The following describe the two types of fiber optic modules. • The SK-FML is a fiber module that allows the multi-mode fiber to link between nodes. • The SK-FSL is a fiber module that allows the single-mode fiber to link between nodes. Each fiber loop module can Transmit (TX) and Receive (RX) fiber-optic cable connecting to the SK-NIC. Up to two fiber loop cards can be added to the SK-NIC, and both cards may be combined in the same configuration. Accessory Mounting Kits The SK-NIC can be mounted within the 6820 cabinet or in the SK-NIC-KIT accessory cabinet. The SK-NIC-KIT includes the SK-NIC, cab- inet with door, cable, and mounting hardware. The accessory kits are available if you want to install the SK-NIC outside of the 6820 cabinet. Figure 5.3 SK-NIC Network Interface Card

    Led1

    Led2

    Rx

    Tx

    SK-FSL Single-Mode Fiber Module SK-FML Multi-Mode Fiber Module Figure 5.4 Types of Fiber Loop Modules

    Led1

    Led2

    Rx

    Tx

    Figure 5.5 SK-NIC with Fiber Loop Modules

    Page 63

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 63 SK-NIC Wiring Options Common Communications Link 5.3.2 SK-NIC Installation The SK-NIC is designed to mount on one of the SLC expander standoff sets inside the cabinet or remotely using the accessory cabinet. Use the following steps to mount the SK-NIC inside the 6820.

  • Place the SK-NIC on one of the SLC expander standoff sets.
  • Use the 6-pin cable included with SK-NIC to connect the 6820 to the SK-NIC. Connect the SK-NIC to the pin connector on the control
  • panel labeled Data Network.
  • Each SK-NIC has the ability to monitor for earth ground faults on the twisted pairs connected to Port 1 of its terminal block TB2. Earth
  • fault detection for any wiring at Port 2 of TB2 is done at the next/previous -NIC due to these wiring connections being connected to Port 1 of TB2 at the next/previous SK-NIC.
  • Unused optic ports on fiber loop modules must have their dust caps placed on the port.
  • Based on the type of data medium chosen, run the twisted pair wiring/fiber optic cable to the next SK-NIC using a class B or class A
  • wiring method. A combination of both medium types can be used. See Figure 5.7, Figure 5.8, Figure 5.9, and Figure 5.10 for SK-NIC wiring examples. 5.3.3 SK-NIC Remote Mounting Follow the steps above except, the 6-pin cable that runs from the SK-NIC to the 6820 must be run in conduit. Refer to Figure 5.1.

    Led1

    Led2

    Rx

    Tx

    Voice

    Network

    Data

    Network

    Telco Phone Telco Phone

    Slc Slc Pgm

    Battery

    RING1 TIP1 RING1 TIP1 RING2 TIP2 RING2 TIP2

    Out- Out+ In- In+ - +

  • +
  • Figure 5.6 Panel to SK-NIC Connection

    Facp

    Sk-Nic

    Page 64

    64 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Common Communications Link SK-NIC Wiring Options 5.3.4 Wiring Unshielded Twisted Pair Wiring between Multiple Panels Unshielded twisted pair wiring between multiple panels is shown in Figure 5.7. Class X wiring is shown with a dotted line. Fiber Optic Multi-Mode Wiring between Multiple Panels Fiber optic cable between multiple panels is shown in Figure 5.8 and Figure 5.9. Class X is shown with a dotted line.

    A

    B

    A

    B

    A

    B

    A

    B

    A

    B

    A

    B

    Tb2

    Tb2

    Tb2

    last control panel/SK-NIC next control panel/SK-NIC first control panel/SK-NIC port 2 port 1 port 2 port 1 port 2 port 1 Class X wiring Figure 5.7 Twisted Pair Wiring Configuration Class X wiring in out in out port 2 port 1 in out in out port 2 port 1 in out in out port 2 port 1 last control panel/SK-NIC next control panel/SK-NIC first control panel/SK-NIC Figure 5.8 Fiber-Optic Wiring Multi-Mode Example

    Page 65

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 65 SK-NIC Wiring Options Common Communications Link

    Fiber Optic and Twisted Pair Wiring between Multiple Panels A mixture of fiber optic cable and twisted pair wiring between multiple panels is shown in Figure 5.10. Class X cabling is shown with dotted line. Class X wiring port 2 port 1 port 2 port 1 port 2 port 1 last control panel/SK-NIC next control panel/SK-NIC first control panel/SK-NIC in out in out in out in out in out in out Figure 5.9 Fiber-Optic Wiring Single-Mode Example

    A

    B

    A

    B

    Tb2

    A

    B

    A

    B

    Tb2

    port 1 Class X wiring port 2 last control panel/SK-NIC next control panel/SK-NIC first control panel/SK-NIC port 1 port 2 port 1 port 2 in out in out in out in out Figure 5.10 Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Combination Wiring Example

    Page 66

    66 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Common Communications Link Setting the ID for Each Panel 5.4 Setting the ID for Each Panel Use the DIP switch positions 1 through 5 to set the ID for each panel. Note that switches 7 and 8 are not used and should remain in the OFF position. See the figure below for possible DIP switch settings. Address 0 is an invalid address and cannot be used.

    Note:

    It is important that much thought is given when choosing the network IDs for each panel. It is difficult to change the IDs once panel programming has begun. 1 7 8 4 5 6 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 7 8 4 5 6 2 3 1 7 8 4 5 6 2 3 1 7 8 4 5 6 2 3 Figure 5.11 PanelID Settings

    On

    Off

    Address Address Address Address

    Page 67

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 67 Section 6: Network Management 6.1 Network Diagnostics 6.1.1 Ping Panel The Ping Panel menu allows you to continually ping any panel programmed into the network. As the selected panel is being pinged, the Ping Panel screen will display the reply time, minimum and maximum reply times, and sent and received counters.

  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 5 for Network Diagnostics.
  • Press 1 to enter the Ping Panel Menu.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select Network Panel ID. Press ENTER to Ping panel.
  • 6.1.2 Data Network Status The Data Network Status screen will display statistics that are indicators of Network performance.
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 5 for Network Diagnostics.
  • Press 2 to enter the Data Network Status Menu.
  • 6.1.3 Voice Network Status The Voice Network Status screen will display statistics that are indicators of Network performance.
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 5 for Network Diagnostics.
  • Press 3 to enter the Voice Network Status Menu.
  • 6.2 Network Programming This section of the manual describes how to program network options using the built-in annunciator. All options described in this section can be programmed using HFSS. You must use HFSS to edit site assignments. 6.2.1 Learn Network The Learn Network menu shows you all of the panels connected to the network. Any panel that has been programmed into the network will appear as a “member.” Any panel that is connected to the network but not programmed into the network will appear as a “guest.” You can add guest panels to the network by changing their status to member in this menu. Panels showing OK are currently responding on the net- work. Panels not showing OK have either been removed or are not responding due to networking problems. See Section 6.1 for Network Diagnostics.
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 6 for Network Programming.
  • Press 1 to enter the Learn Network Menu.
  • Press ENTER to add or remove panels connected to the network as “member” or “guest”.
  • Incompatible Panel If you try to add an incompatible panel as a member to the network, Learn Network fails and an error message appears. The incompatible panel remains a “guest”. To continue, remove the incompatible panel from the network. 6.2.2 Edit Network Names The Edit Network menu allows you to edit the panel name and edit the panels site name. Edit Panel Names
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 6 for Network Programming.
  • Press 2 to enter the Edit Network Names menu.
  • Press 1 to Edit Panel Name. Choose Panel to edit.
  • See Appendix A for a list of available characters and their numeric designators. 6.2.3 Edit Panel ID This menu option allows you to change the current Network Panel ID. It is best to carefully consider the network ID setting for each panel. Take into account any future panels that will be added to the network (future wiring of two buildings together). The Network Panel ID setting has to be unique for each panel on the network. This menu will allow you to change the currently assigned Network Panel ID to the current Network ID dip switch setting. The system will be down as the panel needs to reboot in order to complete the transition.

    Note:

    Although the word “Network” is used in this section, it applies to system menus that relate to the physical wire and/or fiber optic connections between multiple panels. The 6820 does not support peer-to-peer networking.

    Note:

    If adding panels to network, the system will automatically run the Sync Network Options. You will be required to select which panel to distribute network options from. See Section 6.4.

    Page 68

    68 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Network Management Network Programming When using the PC configuration software to program the panels, the Network Panel ID will be locked from future editing. The only way to change it will be to restore defaults and use this menu again. Edit the Network Panel ID

  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 6 for Network Programming.
  • Press 3 to enter the Edit Panel ID menu.
  • If the Network Panel ID is changed and valid, the system will ask you to confirm the change. If it is not correct, you can change the dip
  • switches at this time.
  • Press up to select YES and press ENTER to confirm.
  • 6.2.4 Computer Access An installer at the panel site can initiate communications between the panel and a computer running HFSS. (See also Section 9.4). In order for this communication to function properly, both the computer (running the software) and the control panel must have matching computer access numbers and computer codes. To program computer access information:
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 6 for Network Programming.
  • Press 4 to enter the Computer Access menu.
  • Enter the computer access number (up to 6-digits), then press ENTER.
  • Enter the computer code, then press ENTER.
  • 6.2.5 Access Codes Access codes provide the user access to the control panel functions. Each access code can be customized for each user. This feature allows some users the ability to access the programming and other higher level panel functions, while other users may only need access to the lower level functions (such as, preforming fire drills or acknowledging trouble conditions). Access codes can only be assigned by someone with an Administrator profile. Refer to Section 9.2.1 on page 112 for more information on administrative permissions. Once an access code has been assigned by an administrator, a user has the ability to change it.
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 6 to access the Network Programming Menu.
  • Select 5 to access the Access Codes.
  • The display reads: Select Profile 01 Fire Fighter’s Key
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the Access Code you want to edit.
  • Then, press ENTER.
  • Profile Edit Menu From the Profile Edit Menu, the user can change their name and access code only. Edit Name
  • See Appendix A for a list of available characters and their numeric designators.
  • Then press ENTER to finish.
  • Edit Access Code
  • Enter new access code (minimum of 4 digits, maximum of 7 digit).
  • Press ENTER.
  • Enter code again. Press ENTER.
  • 6.2.6 Communicator Options Communicator options provides the configuration for reporting events to a central station.
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 6 for Network Programming.
  • Press 6 to enter Communicator Options menu.
  • Communicator Assignments Each panel on the 6820 communication link specifies which communicator is used for reporting. The communication link capability of the 6820 system allows all panels to use the same communicator providing an economical solution for reducing the number of paths required for reporting purposes. A communicator is specified by panel number. The communication link communicators will be used to report events according to the communicator report table. Communicator Miscellaneous When using the SIA reporting format, the communicator sends information according to the SIA Reporting Type. The selections for this option are:
  • pi modifier (default)
  • Page 69

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 69 Voice Options Network Management

  • Panel ID
  • Receiver Configuration The 6820 network can report events to as many as 68 receivers. See Appendix B for panel/receiver relationship numbers. Each receiver can be a phone number and reporting format. Phone numbers can be up to forty digits long.
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 6 for Network Programming.
  • Press 6 to enter Communicator Options Menu.
  • Select 3 for Receiver Configuration.
  • Select Panel to Program and press ENTER.
  • Enter the receiver number that you want to report to. The receiver numbers available will correspond with what panel number you
  • entered. Receiver numbers are populated based on panel number and audited to allow only the 4 appropriate receivers. See Appendix B for receiver number. Available Format choices are: • Contact ID •

    Sia500

    Sia8

    Sia20

    • Ethernet • Cellular •

    Unused

    Communicator Reporting Table The Communicator Report Table specifies event reporting for each panel on the network. Each row in the table specifies a panel, event types to report, primary and backup receiver numbers, and report by point or zone. Associated with the receivers are account number and daily test option. The table can have up to 99 rows.
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 6 for Network Programming.
  • Press 6 to enter Communicator Options menu.
  • Select 4 for Communicator Reporting Table.
  • Press * to add rows, Press ENTER to edit data
  • 6.3 Voice Options 6.3.1 Edit Timers
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 6 for Network Programming.
  • Select 7 for Voice Options.
  • Choose Site.
  • Select 1 for Edit Timers
  • Note:

    Only the SIA format sends the panel ID when reporting. test primary account test secondary account Panel: 03 YYYY

    R009:321456 N

    R013:987456 N

    P#ASTP Prit Sect

    01=03Yyyy 009N 013N

    02=02Nnyn 015N 014Y

  • = Add Row
  • panel number report alarms report supervisories report event by point (Y=point, N=zone) report troubles Figure 6.1 Communicator Reporting panel number primary receiver number secondary receiver number

    Page 70

    70 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Network Management Voice Options Control Lockout The Control Lockout countdown timer is set to the programmed value when an LOC gains EVS Control. The timer starts over upon any key press at the EVS Control LOC. While the Control Lockout timer is active, an LOC of equal priority must request EVS control. The Control Lockout timer is cleared when EVS Control is relinquished. The Control Lockout timer does not apply to EVS Super User control. Select Immediate/Timer/Never Range 0-720 min/0-59 sec Auto Reset EVS MIC Triggered Event If the Timer is selected, the event will automatically reset after being active for the programmed time. If Event Disabled is selected, the event will not be allowed to be activate from an LOC Station. Selecting Never will require an emergency system reset to be performed to reset the event. Select Never/Timer/Event Disabled, Range from 1-240 min 6.3.2 Edit Voice Commands When a voice output group is selected to be activated by a zone, the cadence pattern choice does not apply. For voice output groups, one of six system wide voice commands will activate instead of the cadence pattern.

  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 6 for Network Programming Menu.
  • Select 7 for Voice Options.
  • Choose Site.
  • Select 2 for Edit Voice Commands.
  • Select the command you wish to edit:
  • • Fire Alarm • Fire System Aux 1 • Fire System Aux 2 • Fire Zone Aux 1 • Fire Zone Aux 2 • Fire Prealarm • Emergency Communication 1 • Emergency Communication 2 • Emergency Communication 3 • Emergency Communication 4 • Emergency Communication 5 • Emergency Communication 6 • Emergency Communication 7 • Emergency Communication 8 • Fire Supervisory • System Alert 1-5 • Trouble • Fire Interlock Release • Fire Interlock Alert • Custom Emergency Comm • Emergency Supervisory • CO Alarm • CO Supervisory
  • Select whether a Message or Tone Only should be played. If Message is selected, choose the desired message for the command.
  • EVS Timer Option Control Lockout Immediate/Timer/Never Auto Reset EVS MIC Triggered Event Never/Timer/Event Disabled Auto Reset EVS Event 1 Never/Timer/Event Disabled Auto Reset EVS Event 2 Never/Timer/Event Disabled Auto Reset EVS Event 3 Never/Timer/Event Disabled Auto Reset EVS Event 4 Never/Timer/Event Disabled Auto Reset EVS Event 5 Never/Timer/Event Disabled Auto Reset EVS Event 6 Never/Timer/Event Disabled Auto Reset EVS Event 7 Never/Timer/Event Disabled Auto Reset EVS Event 8 Never/Timer/Event Disabled Table 6.1 Auto Reset EVS MIC Triggered Event Timer Menu

    Page 71

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 71 Sync Network Options Network Management

  • Select the tone to be played between messages. (High-Lo, ANSI Whoop, Cont. Whoop, ANSI, March Code, California, Steady, Alert
  • Tone, or No Tones).
  • Select how many times you want the message to repeat. (None, 1 - 14, or Continuous).
  • Select the initial delay time (0, 3, 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28).
  • Select the inter message delay time (4 to 32 seconds, in 4 second increments).
  • Select Y or N to allow message to continue to play after Mic release.
  • Select Y or N to allow message to restart on a new activation.
  • 6.4 Sync Network Options If after making changes to network programming, the distribution of network options fail, the system will report a trouble of network options out of sync. Use this menu to redistribute changed options to the rest of the network. The user will be required to choose a panel to source the options from. Scroll down through the informational message and press ENTER to view the Select Source screen.
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 6 for Network Programming Menu.
  • Select 8 for Sync Network Options.
  • Select which panel to source the options from.
  • Note:

    520Hz tones are available when using the ECS-VCM, EVS-INT50W, or EVS-100W amplifiers. These include ANSI 520, Temp 4 520, Steady 520. See the Device Compatibility Document for a list of compatible speakers. Select Source 01= Panel 1 02= Panel 2 03= Panel 3 Select Source

    01= 07/28/21 12:20 Of

    02 Panel 2 03 Panel 3 Select Source

    01=/28/21 12:20 Of8B

    02 Panel 2 03 Panel 3 Select the line number. #1 in this example. Line #1 scrolls to show the date. Scroll down to see checksum. Figure 6.2 Sync Network Options

    Note:

    If you try to sync with the network and an incompatible panel is found, an error message will display.

    Page 72

    72 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Network Management Network Management Quick Reference 6.5 Network Management Quick Reference Menu Options/Defaults Comments Learn Network Guest or member Add or remove panels into the network See Section 6.2.1 Edit Network Names Panel Names Network Panel ID Edit Panel Names See Section 6.2.2 Site Names Edit Site Member Edit Site Names Edit Panel ID Change current panel

    Id

    See Section 6.2.3 Computer Access Computer Access Number *123456 See Section 6.2.4 Computer Code *0 Access Codes Select Profile (01 - 20) Edit Name Profile 1 is the profile that dictates what functions the Firefighter Key has access to. Because this is the profile for a keys, the user name and the access code can not be edited for this profile. Edit Access Code Communicator Options Communicator Assignments Select Panel Primary 0=unused See Section 6.2.6 Communicator Miscellaneous SIA Options Enable pi SIA Modifier See, "Communicator Miscellaneous" Include Panel ID in SIA Reporting Receiver Configuration Select Panel Select Receiver Receiver Number See, "Receiver Configuration" Receiver Format Contact ID

    Sia500

    Sia8

    Sia20

    Ethernet Cellular

    Unused

    Receiver Credentials Communicator Report Table Panel See, "Communicator Reporting Table". Report Alarms Report Supervisory Report Troubles Report Events by Point Primary Receiver Primary Account Test Primary Account Secondary Receiver Secondary Account Test Secondary Account Table 6.2 Network Management Quick Reference Chart

    Page 73

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 73 Network Management Quick Reference Network Management Voice Options Choose Site Edit Timers Control Lockout Immediate/Timer/ Never See Section 6.3.1 Auto Reset EVS Event 1-8 Never/Timer/Event Disabled Auto Reset EVS MIC Triggered Event Edit Voice Commands Fire Alarm See Section 6.3.2 Fire System Aux 1 Fire System Aux 2 Fire Zone Aux 1 Fire Zone Aux 2 Fire Supervisory Fire Prealarm Custom Emergency Comm Emergency Communication 1-8 System Alert 1-5 Trouble Fire Interlock Release Choose Site Edit Voice Commands Fire Interlock Alert See Section 6.3.2 Emergency Supervisory CO Alarm CO Supervisory Sync Network Options See Section 6.4 Menu Options/Defaults Comments Table 6.2 Network Management Quick Reference Chart (Continued)

    Page 74

    74 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Section 7: Programming Overview This section of the manual is intended to give you an overview of the programming process. Please read this section of the manual carefully, especially if you are programming the control panel for the first time. The JumpStart Auto-programming feature automates many programming tasks and selects default options for the system. JumpStart should be at least once when you are installing the system. See Section 7.1 for details. After you run JumpStart, you may need to do some additional programming depending on your installation. Section 8 of this manual covers manual programmable options in detail. Programming the panel can be thought of as a three part process. You must program: • Network options. This affects how all panels in the network work together. (see Section 6 for details). • System options. These are options that affect general operation of the panel. (see Section 8.6 for details). • Options for input points and zones. These are primarily options that control the detection behavior of devices. (see Section 8.3 and Section 8.5 for details). • Options for output points and groups. This includes selecting characteristics for output groups and mapping output circuits to output groups. (see Section 8.4 for details). 7.1 JumpStart Auto-Programming The JumpStart Auto-Programming feature allows for faster system setup. When you run JumpStart AutoProgramming, the panel searches for expanders and SLC devices not currently in the system. The new devices are added in their default configuration. At the end of the Jump- Start you can choose to not accept the new devices and go back to the configuration you had before. JumpStart saves the installer from hav- ing to program options for each device. Depending on the application, the installer may need to make some changes after JumpStart completes. See Section 7.1.3 for complete details about running JumpStart. 7.1.1 Input Points The first JumpStart on the panel in default configuration will determine the number and type of input points (detectors or contact monitor modules) on each SLC loop. JumpStart Auto-Programming assigns the correct detector type (heat, ionization or photoelectric), so the installer does not need to edit the device type for detectors. Any contact monitor modules on the system will be assigned type “Manual Pull.” The installer will need to manually change the switch type if manual pull is not correct. The first JumpStart AutoProgramming creates one zone (Zone 1) and assigns all input points to Zone 1. Zone 1 is mapped to Output Group 1. 7.1.2 Output Points The 6820 JumpStart creates three output groups. The 6820EVS with amplifiers will create four output groups. The output circuits are assigned as follows: Circuits 1-6 Configured as Notification and assigned to Group 1. Circuit 7 (Relay 1) Assigned to Group 998. Circuit 8 (Relay 2) Assigned to Group 999. Amplifier Circuits Assigned to Group 2. JumpStart automatically programs Zone 1 to activate Group 2. Addressable output points (Relay modules) All addressable relay devices will be configured as “Output Pt” (general purpose output point) and assigned to Group 1. 7.1.3 Running JumpStart Auto-Programming Run JumpStart Auto-Programming immediately after you have addressed and connected all input devices (detectors, pull stations, and so on) and output devices (notification appliances, relays, and so on). To run JumpStart AutoProgramming, follow these steps.

  • Login to the panel and access the main menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Select 6 for JumpStart AutoProgramming.
  • The message “The system will be shut down during JumpStart.” Press ENTER to accept.
  • When the message, “SLC FAMILY” message appears, select SK or SD, depending on the type of SLC devices the panel is using, and
  • press ENTER to accept.
  • A series of messages displays for the next several seconds. JumpStart scans the SLC loops for devices. This can take several minutes,
  • depending on the number of devices attached.
  • When the message “Configuring System Done” displays, press any key to continue.
  • Note:

    Relay output is constant even if the zone activating the relay is programmed with an output pattern.

    Note:

    If you need to install a few devices after you have run JumpStart, you can install them manually or run JumpStart again at a later time. JumpStart will keep user options, such as names, for devices already installed. Follow instructions in Section 7 for configuration.

    Page 75

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 75 Mapping Overview Programming Overview

  • Select one of the following options from the menu that displays.
  • 7.2 Mapping Overview This section of the manual is a high level overview of mapping. Mapping is an important concept with the control panel. In general terms, mapping is assigning or linking events to outputs that will activate when events occur. You do this by assigning input points to input zones, output points to output groups and then linking or mapping zones and output groups. Figure 7.1 is a brief overview of the concept of mapping. The next several pages of the manual show these subjects in detail. 1 - Review System Press 1 if you need to review the JumpStart configuration. The Review System menu will appear. Press 1 to review Entire System or Press 2 for Changes Only. 2 - Repeat JumpStart Press 2 if you need to rerun JumpStart for any reason. 3 - Accept Changes
  • If you are ready to make the JumpStart configuration permanent, select 3.
  • The system will ask you if the installation contains any addressable duct detectors. If there are none, select 2 for
  • No and skip to Step 8. If the system contains duct detectors, select 1 for Yes and continue with Step 3.
  • From the list that displays, select the SLC that contains the duct detectors.
  • The first photoelectric or ionization detector on the system will display. Select 1 for DUCT and 2 for NonDUCT.
  • Press up arrow to select the next detector. Select 1 for DUCT and 2 for NonDUCT. Continue until all duct detectors
  • have been selected. (Note: You can move backwards through the list with down arrow).
  • When you reach the last detector on this device, press left arrow.
  • The system will ask you if there are any duct detectors used. If there are, select 1 for Yes and the message will
  • ask, Have All Addressable Duct Detectors Been Identified? Left arrow for “No”, Right arrow for “Yes”. If there are no more duct detectors, continue with Step 8.
  • The system will restart with the saved JumpStart configuration.
  • After the system resets, it will use the new JumpStart configuration.
  • 4 - Discard Changes If you want to discard the changes, and keep the configuration you had before running this JumpStart press 4. 1 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 In its simplest application, mapping determines which outputs are activated by which inputs. input zone output group input points (SLC devices) output points (NAC circuits) Input zones are mapped by event type to output groups. Cadence patterns are assigned as part of the mapping information. Up to eight groups/patterns can be selected for each event. input points (SLC devices) input zones cadence patterns output groups output points (NAC/relay ckts) Output points are assigned to output groups only. system trbl & special system events optional Figure 7.1 Mapping Overview

    Note:

    Mapping cannot be programmed through the annunciators. It can only be programmed through the HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite.

    Page 76

    76 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Programming Overview Mapping Overview 7.2.1 Input Point Mapping Input points are assigned to input zones, as Figure 7.2 shows. Any input point can be assigned to any input zone. (Input points can be assigned to one zone only. An input point can be designated as “Unused,” which means it has not been assigned to a zone). 7.2.2 Output Circuit Mapping Figure 7.3 is a simple example showing how to assign notification and relay output circuits to groups. point 1 point 2 point 3 point 4 point 5 point 6 point 7 point 8 point 1105 point 1106 point 1107 point 1108 point 1109 point 1110 point 4 point 5 point 6 point 7 point 8 through zone 1 zone 2 zone 3 zone 4 zone 5 zone 6 through zone 248 zone 249 zone 250 Figure 7.2 Input Point Assignment Example output circuit 3 NAC circuit output circuit 4 aux power output Aux power outputs are not mapped to output groups. group 1 group 2 through group 998 group 999 output circuit 5 Relay 1 output circuit 6 Relay 2 In this example, all NAC outputs are assigned to group 1. JumpStart creates group 998 and group 999 for Relay 1 and Relay 2. output circuit 1 NAC circuit output circuit 2 NAC circuit Figure 7.3 Assigning Output Circuits to Groups (Example)

    Page 77

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 77 Mapping Overview Programming Overview 7.2.3 Event Mapping There are 11 types of Zone events, 14 types of Panel events, and 6 types of Site events that can be mapped. For each event type, you can acti- vate the output groups with specific output patterns. Mapping examples are shown in Figures 7.4 and 7.5. System Zone Panel Site Fire Manual Pull Alarm System Aux 1 Alarm Fire Drill Water Flow Alarm System Aux 2 Alarm General Fire Alarm Detector Alarm (heat or smoke detectors) General Fire Supervisory Zone Aux 1 Alarm General Fire Pre-Alarm Zone Aux 2 Alarm Interlock Alert Interlock Release Pre-Alarm Fire Supervisory Status Point CO Alarm CO Supervisory1 1 Temporal 4 and other recognized coding should not be used for NAC circuits mapped to CO supervisory events Emergency LOC EVS 1-8 Alarm General EVS Alarm General EVS Supervisory Point EVS 1-8 Alarm Advisory Trouble SBUS Expander Trouble General Trouble Status Point Active SBUS Class A Trouble Site Silenced SLC Loop Trouble Voice Aux In 1-8 Alarm AC Loss Trouble F1 Key Active Battery Trouble F2 Key Active Ground Fault Trouble F3 Key Active Phone Line Trouble F4 Key Active Reporting Account Trouble Voice Aux in 1-2 Printer Trouble System Mic Active Aux Power Trouble Background Music System Switch Trouble Output Group Trouble Zone 1: manual pull alarm pattern 00 constant pattern 02

    Ansi 3.41

    This example shows Zone 1 manual pull alarm event mapped to:
  • Group 1 using constant output.
  • Group 5 using ANSI 3.41 output pattern.
  • group 1 group 2 group 3 group 4 group 5 group 6 through group 250 Figure 7.4 Example of Zone Events Mapped to Output Groups and Patterns

    Page 78

    78 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Programming Overview Programming Using the HFSS Software Suite 7.2.4 Mapping LED Points Figure 7.6 is a simple example showing how LED points are mapped to zones and output groups. Typically you would create two output groups for each zone, one for alarms and one for troubles. (LED points are available when models 5865-3/4 and/or 5880 are used with the system). 7.3 Programming Using the HFSS Software Suite You can use the HFSS Software Suite to program the control panel onsite (personnel will need to be onsite during the upload or download process). HFSS is a software package that lets you easily program the control panel using a Windows-based computer. HFSS is needed for Mapping. When using HFSS, you can set up the programming options for the panel, save the options in a file, then download the file to the panel. You can connect to the control panel directly using the onboard USB or Ethernet. Updates are available at www.silentknight.com. Zone 3 Offices 3rd floor Zone 2 Storage 2nd floor Zone 1 Show Room 1st floor Group 3 3rd floor notification Group 2 2nd floor notification Group 1 1st floor notification supervisory detector alarm manual pull constant

    Ansi 3.41

    Ansi 3.41

    Zone 3 Offices 3rd floor Zone 2 Storage 2nd floor Zone 1 Show Room 1st floor Group 3 3rd floor notification Group 2 2nd floor notification Group 1 1st floor notification supervisory detector alarm manual pull constant

    Ansi 3.41

    Ansi 3.41

    same floor floor above floor below Figure 7.5 Example of Zone Events Mapped to Output Groups and Patterns Zone 1 manual pull alarm Zone 1 detector alarm Zone 1 trouble Output group 1 red LED 1 alarm outputs (horns, strobes, etc.) An alarm in Zone1 will activate red LED1 and any other required outputs. Output group 2 yellow LED 2 maintenance room sounder A trouble in Zone1 will activate yellow LED2 plus any other needed outputs. (In this example, it activates a sounder in the maintenance room.) Output group 3 red LED 3 alarm outputs (horns, strobes, etc.) An alarm in Zone2 will activate red LED3 and any other required outputs. Output group 2 yellow LED4 A trouble in Zone2 will activate yellow LED4. Zone 2 manual pull alarm Zone 2 detector alarm Zone 2 trouble Mapping LEDs to Zones and Output Groups Figure 7.6 Example of LED Points Mapped to Output Groups (applies to Models 5865-3/4 and 5880)

    Page 79

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 79 Programming Using an Annunciator Programming Overview 7.4 Programming Using an Annunciator You can program the control panel from a system annunciator, using either the control panel’s onboard annunciator or a 6860, 6855, or 5860 remote annunciator. The following subsections describe programming basics, including a description of editing keys available for programming and how to move through programming menus. Section 8 contains specific information about individual programming options. 7.4.1 Entering / Exiting Panel Programming Entering Program Mode

  • Login to the panel. (Refer to Section 9.2.1).
  • Select 7 for the Programming Menu. See Section 8 for detailed information and Section 7.5 for a quick reference listing all
  • programmable options and JumpStart defaults. Exiting Program Mode When you have completed working with the menus, press the left arrow several times until you exit from the Programming Mode. Two prompts will display. At the first prompt, a message appears indicating to exit the Program Menu (select Yes or No as appropriate). At the second prompt, a message indicates if the user accepts all changes. If you select No, any changes you have made since you entered the Pro- gram Menu will have no effect. Moving Through the Menus Figure 7.7 shows how to move through the menu screens, using the main menu screen as an example. Selecting Options and Entering Data There are several ways to make programming selections using the control panel depending on which screen you are currently viewing. The chart below is a generic explanation.

    Note:

    Output mapping cannot be programmed through the onboard and remote annunciators. Mapping is only available through the HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite. To Press Select from a menu Enter the number of the option. Enter numeric data Press the appropriate number on the annunciator. Enter text (alphanumeric data) Enter each character individually using the Up and Down arrow keys until the one you wish to select displays. Then press right arrow to select the character. See Appendix A for a complete list of characters. Select from a scrolling list Use up arrow and down arrow to move through a list of available options. When the option you want to select is displayed, press ENTER. Table 7.1 Menu Options Main Menu 1=System Tests 2 Point Functions 3 Event History Menu Name selected option (displays next to equal sign) Arrow indicates more screens. Press the down arrow key to access. Figure 7.7 Moving Through the Program Menu

    Page 80

    80 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Programming Overview Programming Menu Quick Reference 7.5 Programming Menu Quick Reference This section of the manual lists all Panel Programming options in the order they appear on the sub-menus. Default settings are indicated in text or marked with an asterisk (*). The comments column provide quick information and a reference to a section (if applicable) which has more detailed information. Menu Options/Defaults Comments Module Edit Module Select Module Edit Module ID See Section 8.2.1 Enter Module Name Edit Module specific options Add Module 5824 Serial/Parallel/IO

    See Section 8.2.2

    6860 Lcd

    Annunciator

    5860 Lcd

    Annunciator

    6855 Lcd

    Annunciator 6815 SLC Loop Expander 5815XL SLC Loop Expander 5895XL Power Supply 5496 NAC Expander 5880 LED/IO Module 5865-LED Annunc. Module EVS-50W Voice Amplifier1 EVS-125W Voice Amplifier1 EVS-100W Voice Amplifier1 EVS-VCM Voice Control Module1 EVSRVM Remote Voice Module1 SKNIC Network Interface Card Delete Module Select Module See Section 8.2.3 View Module List Select Module See Section 8.2.4 Table 7.2 Programming Menu Quick Reference Chart

    Page 81

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 81 Programming Menu Quick Reference Programming Overview Zone Edit Zone Select Zone Edit Zone Name Section See “Edit Zone Name” on page 92. Zone Properties Verification Type *1-Count See “Edit Zone Properties” on page 92. 2-Count Alarm Ver.

    Pas

    Sngl Ilock

    Dbl Ilock

    Heat Temp Set 135° to 150°F SD devices. See “Edit Zone Properties” on page 92. 135° to 190°F SK device. See “Edit Zone Properties” on page 92. Zone Accessory Opt Single/Multi- station Cadence 00-23 See “Zone Accessory Options” on page 93. CO Single/Multi station Cadence 00-23 Local Zone Yes No View Zone Points Select Zone See Section 8.3.2 Group Edit Group Select Group Group Name See “Edit Group Name” on page 94. Group Properties Voice Group Y or N See “Edit Group Properties” on page 94. Switch 1-64 Template Override Y or N Allow Sys Override Y or N Dynamic Act/Template Override Cadence 00-23 (See Appendix B.) View Group Points Select Group See Section 8.4.2 Edit OPG Template Select template Modify name and which output groups are in template See Section 8.4.3 Menu Options/Defaults Comments Table 7.2 Programming Menu Quick Reference Chart (Continued)

    Page 82

    82 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Programming Overview Programming Menu Quick Reference Point SD and SK Devices on Internal SLC,External , and External

    5815Xl

    Enter Pt Select Module

    Unused

    See Section 8.5

    Switch

    2, 3, 4, 5

    Manual Pull

    Waterflow

    *Latch

    Non-Latch

    Fire

    Supervsy

    *Latch

    Non-Latch

    Fire Drill

    Silence

    Reset

    P.A.S. Ack

    Zone Aux1

    *Latch

    Non-Latch

    Zone Aux2

    Latch

    Non-Latch

    System Aux1

    Latch

    Non-Latch

    System Aux2

    Latch

    Non-Latch

    Detector

    Fire Tamper

    Latch

    Non-Latch

    Manual Release

    Interlock

    Status Point

    Co Detector Switch

    Co

    Supervisory

    Detector

    Switch

    Latch

    Non-Latch

    Ecs Input

    Latch

    Non-Latch

    Ecs Tamper

    Latch

    Non-Latch

    Ecs Super-

    Visory

    Latch

    Non-Latch

    Trouble_Mon

    Notif

    2,3,4,5

    Output Pt

    Select Group

    Aux Const

    Aux Reset

    Aux Door

    Menu Options/Defaults Comments Table 7.2 Programming Menu Quick Reference Chart (Continued)

    Page 83

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 83 Programming Menu Quick Reference Programming Overview Point (cont.) SD and SK Devices on Internal SLC,External , and External

    5815Xl

    Enter Pt Select Sensor

    Relay

    2,3,4,5

    Output Pt

    Select Group See Section 8.5

    Aux Reset

    Aux Door

    Slc Led 3,5

    LED Number 1-80 LED Function Notif Unused

    Detector

    2,4 2-WIRE SMOKE Select Zone W. Gateway 2,4

    W Switch

    2,4,6 Same as SWITCH

    W-Relay

    2,4,6 Same as Relay

    Unused

    Detector

    2,3,,4,5

    Photo

    No Accessory base

    Sdr Bas

    Single station or Multi station Silence or Non-Silence

    Rly Bas

    I-SdrBa (Intelligent Sounder Base) 2,4 Latch or non-latch, Single station or Multi station, Silence or Non- Silence, volume high (default) or low

    Ion

    No Accessory base

    Sdr Bas

    Single station or Multi station Silence or Non-Silence

    Rly Bas

    I-SdrBa (Intelligent Sounder Base) 2,4 Latch or non-latch, Single station or Multi station, Silence or Non- Silence, volume high (default) or low Menu Options/Defaults Comments Table 7.2 Programming Menu Quick Reference Chart (Continued)

    Page 84

    84 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Programming Overview Programming Menu Quick Reference Point (cont.) SD and SK Devices on Internal SLC,External , and External

    5815Xl

    Enter Pt Select Sensor

    Detector

    2,3,,4,5

    Heat2,3,,4,5

    No Accessory base

    Sdr Bas

    Single station or Multi station Silence or Non-Silence

    Rly Bas

    I-SdrBa (Intelligent Sounder Base) 2,4 Latch or non-latch, Single station or Multi station, Silence or Non- Silence, volume high (default) or low

    Photo Duct

    2,3,,4,5 No Accessory base

    Dct Rly

    2-Wire Smoke 3,5

    Ion Duct3,5

    No Accessory base

    Dct Rly

    Acclimate

    2,4 No Accessory base

    Sdr Bas

    Single station or Multi station Silence or Non-Silence

    Rly Bas

    I-SdrBa (Intelligent Sounder Base) Latch or non-latch, Single station or Multi station, Silence or Non- Silence, volume high (default) or low

    Heat Ht

    2,4 No Accessory base SDR base Single station or Multi station Silence or Non-Silence RLY base I-SdrBa (Intelligent Sounder Base) Latch or non-latch, Single station or Multi station, Silence or Non- Silence, volume high (default) or low

    Phot-Heat

    2,4 No Accessory base

    Sdr Bas

    Single station or Multi station Silence or Non-Silence

    Rly Bas

    I-SdrBa (Intelligent Sounder Base) Latch or non-latch, Single station or Multi station, Silence or Non- Silence, volume high (default) or low

    Beam2,4

    Sup Det

    2,3,,4,5 Same function as DETECTOR

    Latch

    Non-Latch

    Menu Options/Defaults Comments Table 7.2 Programming Menu Quick Reference Chart (Continued)

    Page 85

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 85 Programming Menu Quick Reference Programming Overview Point (cont.) SD and SK Devices on Internal SLC,External , and External

    5815Xl

    Enter Pt Select Sensor (cont.)

    Co Fire 2,4

    Co

    Alarm/Fire

    Alarm

    No Accessory base

    Sdr Bas

    Single station or Multi station Silence or Non-Silence

    Rly Bas

    I-SdrBA (Intelligent Sounder Base) Latch or non-latch, Single station or Multi station, Silence or Non- Silence, volume high (default) or low

    Co

    Alarm/Fire

    Supr

    No Accessory base

    Sdr Bas

    Single station or Multi station Silence or Non-Silence

    Rly Bas

    I-SdrBA (Intelligent Sounder Base) Latch or non-latch, Single station or Multi station, Silence or Non- Silence, volume high (default) or low

    Co Supr/

    Fire Alarm

    No Accessory base

    Sdr Bas

    Single station or Multi station Silence or Non-Silence

    Rly Bas

    I-SdrBA (Intelligent Sounder Base) Latch or non-latch, Single station or Multi station, Silence or Non- Silence, volume high (default) or low

    Co Supr/

    Fire Supr

    No Accessory base

    Sdr Bas

    Single station or Multi station Silence or Non-Silence

    Rly Bas

    I-SdrBA (Intelligent Sounder Base) Latch or non-latch, Single station or Multi station, Silence or Non- Silence, volume high (default) or low W-Detector 2,4,6 Photo2,4,6 See Section 8.5 Acclimate2,4,6 Photo-Heat2,4,6 Heat2,4,6

    W-Sup Det

    2,4,6 Same as W- Detector Menu Options/Defaults Comments Table 7.2 Programming Menu Quick Reference Chart (Continued)

    Page 86

    86 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Programming Overview Programming Menu Quick Reference Point (cont) Internal Power and External Power Enter Pt /Select Function Select Sensor

    Unused

    See Section 8.5

    B Notif

    NOTIF OUTPUT Select Group Super-vised Yes or No

    Control

    Circuit

    A Notif

    NOTIF OUTPUT Select Group Super-vised Yes or No

    Control

    Circuit

    Aux Pwr

    Constant

    Aux Reset

    Aux Door

    Aux Sync7

    B Switch

    Manual Pull

    Latch and Non-Latch feature only appear for WATERFLOW,FIRE SUPERVISORY,

    Fire Tamper, Zone Aux1, Zone

    Aux2, System Aux1, System Aux2,

    EVS INPUT, EVS TAMPER, and EVS

    Supervisory.

    Water-Flow

    Fire Super-

    Visory

    Fire Tamper

    Fire Drill

    Silence

    Reset

    P.A.S. Ack

    Zone Aux 1

    Zone Aux2

    System Aux1

    System Aux2

    Manual

    Release

    Interlock

    Evs Input

    If EVS INPUT is selected choose associated EVENT

    Evs Tamper

    Evs

    Supervisory

    Status Point

    A Switch

    Same as B SWITCH See Section 8.5.3

    B Detect

    2-Wire Smoke

    4-Wire Smoke

    Co 4 Wire Det

    Co 4 Wire

    Sup Det

    Latch Non-Latch

    A Detect

    2-Wire Smoke

    4-Wire Smoke

    Co 4 Wire Det

    Co 4 Wire

    Sup Det

    Latch Non-Latch Select Group or Zone Number Group or Zone selection will appear depending on the function selected Edit Name Enter Name Menu Options/Defaults Comments Table 7.2 Programming Menu Quick Reference Chart (Continued)

    Page 87

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 87 Programming Menu Quick Reference Programming Overview Point (cont.) 5496 Edit Point #

    Unused

    See Section 8.5.5

    B Notif

    Control Circuit Notif Output Select Group Super-vised Yes or No

    A Notif

    Aux_Pwr

    Constant Edit Name Aux Sync Aux Door Aux Reset

    -5880/-5865/Evs

    Series Amplifiers Enter Point #

    Unused

    See Section 8.5.4 and Section 8.5.6

    Notif

    Select Group Edit Name Enter Name

    Evs-Vcm,

    Evs-Rvm,

    Enter Pt /Select Function

    Unused

    See Section 8.5.7

    Switch8

    Supervisory

    Tamper

    Water Flow

    P.A.S. (Non-latching) MANUAL PULL (Latching)

    System Silence

    (Non-latching)

    System Reset

    Zone Aux 1

    Zone Aux 2

    System Aux 1

    System Aux 2

    Fire Drill

    Manual Release Switch

    Interlock Switch

    Status Point

    Ecs Input

    Ecs Tamper

    Ecs Supervisory

    Voice Aux Ecs 1-4

    Voice Aux Status 1-2

    Background Music Enable

    Menu Options/Defaults Comments Table 7.2 Programming Menu Quick Reference Chart (Continued)

    Page 88

    88 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Programming Overview Programming Menu Quick Reference System Options Communication Options Auto Time Test Set the Hour

    *02:00Am

    See “Auto Test Time” on page 104. Set the Minutes Select AM/PM Enter Interval 24 hrs,12 hrs, *6 hrs, 4 hrs Phone Lines For each phone line (1 & 2) select: Dialing Prefix Up to 9 digits *none See “Phone Lines” on page 104.

    of Answer Rings

    Range: 00-15 *06 Number of rings before panel answers a call from a computer Select Dialing Option

    Tt

    *Tt

    Touch Tone

    Tt/Pl

    TouchTone alternating with pulse

    Pulse

    Pulse dialing Rotary Pulse Format

    U = 60/40

    *U

    See “Phone Lines” on page 104.

    E = 66/34

    Dial Tone Disabled Y or N

    *N

    Monitor Line Y or N

    *N

    Answering Machine Bypass Y or N

    *N

    Phone Line Unused Y or N

    *N

    Edit Ethernet IP Address See “Edit Ethernet” on page 106. Subn Mask SubNet Default Gateway DHCP Enable AlarmNet Timers Ethernet Supervise 75 sec, 90 Sec, 3 min, 5 min, 1 hr, 24 hrs, 30 days, None *5 Minutes See “AlarmNet Timers” on page 106. Cellular Supervise 24Hrs, 30 days, none *24 Hours Old Alarm Time 10 min, 15 min, 30 Minutes, 1 hr, 2 hrs, 4 hrs, 8 hrs, 12 hrs, 24hrs, none *30 Minutes Communication Options Phone Line Gains Dialing High *High See “Phone Line Gains” on page 106. Low Normal Reporting Low *Low Normal High Menu Options/Defaults Comments Table 7.2 Programming Menu Quick Reference Chart (Continued)

    Page 89

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 89 Programming Menu Quick Reference Programming Overview System Options cont. Time Options Water Flow Delay 0 - 90 Seconds *1 sec Water Flow delay is the number of seconds before a water flow alarm is generated. See “Water Flow Delay” on page 107 Alarm Verify 60 to 250 seconds *60 sec See “Alarm Verify” on page 107. Low AC Report Time 0 - 30 hours *3 hrs See Section 8.6.2. AC Freq: 50 Hz *60Hz See “Change AC Line Frequency” on page 107. 60 Hz Internal Clock Display Format

    Am/Pm

    *Am/Pm

    See “Clock Format (AM/PM or Military)” on page 107.

    Mil

    Auto-resound 4 hours *24 hours See “Auto-Resound (4 or 24 hours)” on page 107. 24 hours Miscellaneous Options SYNC Strobes when Silenced

    Y

    *N

    See “Strobes Active when Silenced” on page 108.

    N

    Auto Display Events

    Y

    *N

    See “Auto Display Events” on page 108.

    N

    Daylight Saving Options Auto Daylight Saving Time

    Y

    *Y

    See “Daylight Saving Time Start and End” on page 108.

    N

    DST Start Select week: 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th or Last Select month See “Daylight Saving Time Start and End” on page 108 DST End Edit Banner Refer to Appendix A. See Section 8.6.5. SLC Family

    Sk

    See Section 8.6.6.

    Sd

    Jump Start AutoPrg Y (Yes) See Section 8.6.7. N (No) Restore Defaults Y (Yes) N (No) See Section 8.7. Voice Options1

    Vcm

    Maintenance PC Connection See Section 8.8. Local Recording Edit Voice Settings Enable Dual Channel System *=Default 1 Requires EVS module programmed into the panel. 2 Available on internal SLC. 3 Available on external 5815XL expander. 4 Available with SLC family as SK. 5 Available with SLC family as SD. 6 Requires wireless gateway. 7 AUX SYNC setting is only applicable for the B200S Intelligent Sounder Base. 8 Requires EVS module programmed into the panel. Menu Options/Defaults Comments Table 7.2 Programming Menu Quick Reference Chart (Continued)

    Page 90

    90 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Section 8: Programming This section of the manual describes how to manually program the control panel from the built-in annunciator. Each subsection discusses these menu options in detail. All options described in this section can be performed using the HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite. 8.1 UL 864 / UL 2572 Programming Requirements 8.2 Modules This section lists the options available under the module option in the Panel Programming. The following modules are available for the con- trol panel: 5824 serial/parallel/IO printer interface module, 6860, 5860, and 6855 LCD remote annunciators, 5815XL SLC Loop expander for SD devices, 6815 SLC Loop Expander for devices, 5895XL power supply,5496 NAC expander, 5880 LED I/O module, 5865 LED annunciator Module, EVS-50W, EVS-125W, EVS-INT50W, EVS-100W audio amplifiers, EVS-VCM voice control module, EVS-RVM remote voice module, and SK-NIC network interface card. 8.2.1 Edit Modules The features that can be edited when this option is selected are module ID, module name, or features that are specific to the module to be edited. To edit an existing module:

  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the main menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Press 1 to enter Module Menu.
  • Press 1 to edit a module.
  • Use the up or down arrow key to select the module you wish to edit.Then press ENTER.
  • Note:

    JumpStart auto-programming should be run Before any customized programming is performed. Thoroughly test the system after running JumpStart because it automatically programs the system, searching for and configuring all SLC and SBUS devices it finds. JumpStart allows you to confirm the integrity of the installation prior to performing any custom programming. After determining that the hardware is properly installed, custom programming can be performed. NOTICE TO USERS, INSTALLERS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION, AND OTHER INVOLVED PARTIES: This product incorporates field programmable software. In order for the product to comply with the requirements in the Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL 864 and UL 2572, certain programming features or options must be limited to specific values or not used at all as indicated below. Programming Option Menu Item Permitted in UL 864

    (Y/N)

    Permitted in UL 2572

    (Y/N)

    Possible Settings Settings Permitted in UL 864 Settings Permitted in

    Ul 2572

    Time Options Auto-resound Yes Yes 4 hrs, 24hrs 4 hours if using SWIFT devices 24 hours if using other devices 4 hours if using SWIFT devices 24 hours if using other devices Time Options Low AC Report Delay Yes Yes 0-30 hours 1-3 hours 1-3 hours Communication Options Auto Test Time Yes Yes 4, 6, 12, and 24 hrs 4 or 6 hours 4 or 6 hours Silencing Options Auto Silence Yes Yes 0-60 minutes 3-60 minutes 3-60 minutes Display Oldest Event Y (Enabled) Yes Yes Yes or No Yes Yes N (Disabled) No No Yes or No No No Initial Delay 0-28 Yes Yes 0-28 hours 3 hours 3 hours Alarm Verification1 1 When 2-count delay is active, you cannot use the alarm verification. Alarm Verification Yes Yes 60-250 seconds (Confirmation period) 0-60 seconds 0-60 seconds Manual Release Switch2 2 The Manual Release Switch shall override any pre-discharge delays resulting in an immediate release or start of the Manual Release Delay period. The delay period shall be 30 seconds or less from the activation of the switch to the actuation of the releasing device(s). 3 Temporal 4 and other recognized coding should not be used for NAC circuits mapped to CO supervisory events. Manual Release Yes Yes 0-120 seconds (delay period) 0-30 seconds (delay period) 0-30 seconds (delay period) Auto Reset EVS MIC Triggered Event Auto Reset EVS MIC Triggered Event Yes Yes Never Timer Event Disabled Never Timer Event Disabled Never Timer Event Disabled EVS Input EVS Input Yes Yes Latching Non-Latching Latching Latching Event Priority CO Alarm No No Yes & No No No Table 8.1 Programming Requirements

    Page 91

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 91 Modules Programming Editing Module ID

  • Press the up or down arrow key to modify the module ID.
  • Naming Modules You can assign an English name to a system hardware module to make it easier to recognize on a display.
  • If you wish to edit the module’s name, press ENTER on the module’s name. Then, press the number keys corresponding to the character
  • for the module’s, name (or press right arrow key to bypass editing the name). . Changing Module Options Each module has a unique set of options that specifically applies to the functionality of the module being edited.
  • Use the left and right arrow keys to move between available options.
  • Option settings are edited by pressing the up or down arrow key or using the keypad for numerical entry.
  • 8.2.2 Adding a Module If you need to add a new hardware module to the system, follow these steps.
  • Login to the panel.
  • Select 7 for Program Menu.
  • Press 1 to enter Module Menu.
  • Press 2 to add a module.
  • From the next screen, use the up or down arrow to choose a module type to add from the screen.
  • The screen will display “Adding module [#]...” for a few moments. You will be returned to the screen where you can add additional modules if desired. You must save changes when you exit the Program Menu or the new module will not be added. 8.2.3 Deleting a Module To delete a module, follow these steps: You must be in the Main Menu to perform this task. If necessary, login to the panel.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Press 1 to enter module menu.
  • Select the desired module.
  • Press 3 to delete a module.
  • Select the module to be deleted.
  • A warning screen will display. If you want to proceed with deleting the module, select Yes. To cancel, select No.
  • 8.2.4 View Module List To view a list of all modules, follow these steps: You must be in the Main Menu to perform this task.
  • Login to the panel.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Press 1 to enter module menu.
  • Note:

    You cannot edit the module ID for any internal devices, or the SK-NIC.

    Note:

    See Appendix A for editing names.

    5880-Led I/O

    Module ID: 03 5880 03_________

    5880-Led I/O

    Ab_____________

    Default name for 5880 module (no customization) Use arrow keys to select characters. Letters begin displaying with “A”. Press the ENTER key to select the desired character. Use the right arrow to move to the next character. Figure 8.1 Edit Module Name Programming Screen Example

    Note:

    If you add a module that has not been physically connected, the panel will go into trouble after it reinitializes (when you exit the Program Menu). When the new module is attached, the trouble will correct itself automatically.

    Page 92

    92 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Programming Zone

  • Press 4 to view list. Use the up or down arrow key to scroll though list.
  • 8.3 Zone Through the zone option in Panel Programming you can edit and view zone points. Selections made here affect all detectors and switches in the zone. Up to 999 zones can be used in each panel. 8.3.1 Edit Zone Features that can be edited through the Edit Zone option are zone name, zone properties (which includes, zone type, and detector sensitivity), zone output mapping, and zone accessory options. To edit a zone, follow these steps:
  • Login to the panel.
  • Select 7 for Program Menu.
  • Press 2 to enter Zone Menu.
  • Press 1 to edit a zone.
  • Enter the zone number, then press ENTER.
  • Edit Zone Name
  • Press 1 to edit the selected zone name. You can use words to display a descriptive name for a zone.
  • Edit Zone Properties Zone properties consist of alarm delay characteristics, and heat detector sensitivity.
  • Do steps 1 through 5 of Section 8.3.1.
  • Press 2 to edit the properties of the selected zone.
  • Alarm Delay Characteristics The programmed zone type is provided for user reference only. Use HFSS to modify the zone type. Table 8.2 lists the alarm delay characteristics and a description of each.

    Note:

    See Appendix A for editing names. Type of Delay Description 1-Count1 One Count (No Delay). When this option is enabled, an alarm occurs immediately when a single device of any of the following types goes into alarm: detector, manual pull, water flow, Aux1 or Aux2. This is considered the most typical operation and is the default for all zones. 2-Count When this type of alarm delay is used, two or more detectors within the zone must go into alarm in order for the zone to report an alarm. Switches of type manual pull, water flow, Detector Switch, Aux1 and Aux2 are an exception; they will cause an alarm when only one switch is in alarm. When a single detector is in alarm in a 2-Count zone, the system enters a pre-alarm condition. In a pre-alarm condition, the touchpad PZT beeps and the annunciator display indicates that a pre-alarm has occurred. If the zone has been mapped to an output group for the pre-alarm event, the output group will activate. The pre-alarm will not be reported to the central station. Alarm Verification Alarm verification is an optional false alarm prevention feature that verifies an alarm condition by resetting the smoke detector. If the alarm condition still exists by the time the reset cycle has completed, the detector will go into alarm. If the detector is no longer in alarm, no report will go to the central station. The alarm verification sequence is ignored if the zone is already in alarm. Table 8.2 Alarm Delay Types Detection type also selected from this screen (see Table 8.2). Z001-Type:1-Count___ Heat [150]F. Zone number being programmed Select the temperature that will cause heat detectors in this zone to go into alarm. Range: 135°-190° (SK devices) 135°-150° (SD devices) Figure 8.2 Edit Zone Properties

    Page 93

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 93 Zone Programming Heat Detector Sensitivity Use this feature to set the temperature at which high temperature detectors will respond. All detectors in the zone will respond in the same way. The range for the SD505-HEAT heat detector is from 135°F to 150°F. The range for SK-HEAT-HT heat detectors is from 135°F to

    190°F.

    The high temperature SK heat detectors are absolute temperature devices. This means that they respond to an alarm immediately if the tem- perature in the zone goes above the programmed temperature.
  • Enter the temperature at which the heat detector will respond, or use the up or down arrow to scroll through the range or enter directly
  • from the number keys on the annunciator, then press ENTER. Zone Accessory Options
  • Login to the panel.
  • Select 7 for Program Menu.
  • Press 2 to enter Zone Menu.
  • Press 1 to edit a zone.
  • Enter the zone number, then press ENTER.
  • Press 3 to edit the Zone’s Accessory options.
  • Single or Multi-Station cadence pattern (choose from Patterns 00 to 02, 23 if using SK. Choose from 00-16, 23 if using SD devices). See Appendix C. CO Single and Multi-Station Cadence (choose from Cadence Patterns 00 to 02, 23 for SK devices). Local Zone (choose Y or N, for Yes or No). PAS-Positive Alarm Sequence2 This option is intended to be used with an acknowledge switch. An alarm is delayed for 15 seconds, giving on-site personnel a chance to investigate the alarm. If the acknowledge switch is not activated within 15 seconds, an alarm occurs automatically. If this option is enabled for a zone, the zone will respond to an alarm condition as follows:  The zone will not go into alarm for 15 seconds to allow an on-site operator to activate the acknowledge switch.  If the operator does not press the acknowledge switch within 15 seconds, the zone will go into alarm.  If the operator presses the acknowledge switch within 15 seconds, a 180-second time-frame will begin counting down. This time-frame allows the operator to investigate the cause of the alarm.  If the operator performs a reset within 180 seconds, the alarm will not occur.  If the operator does not perform a reset within 180 seconds, an alarm will occur automatically.  The PAS feature will be overridden if another alarm occurs. Alternate P.A.S. - Positive Alarm Sequence2 An improved version of PAS is available with software version 6.04 or higher, for use with the 6860 and 6855 only. Existing systems with PAS enabled will still function normally. The PAS option will program an automatic, addressable detector to delay panel activation (including alarm relay and communicator) for a period of 15 seconds plus a delay time of up to three minutes. When a detector triggers an alarm, the onboard piezo sounds immediately, but the mapped output groups (e.g. NACs, control/relay modules) are prevented from activating for 15 seconds. This inhibit time is factory set and cannot be changed. Pressing the ACK key during the 15 second inhibit time will start a timer which prevents activation of the mapped output groups for an additional time duration for up to three minutes and display a countdown for the three minute delay. After the delay, the mapped output groups will activate if the source of the alarm is not cleared. If a second alarm occurs during either time delay, the alarm will be processed immediately, causing activation of the appropriate output groups. If PAS is enabled,  the onboard piezo sounds immediately.  the control panel LCD display will indicate a PAS-alarm event and the active point.  output groups (NACs and control/relay modules) of associated zones will be inhibited from activating for a factory-set duration of 15 seconds.  pressing the ACK key will start a timer which inhibits output activation for additional time delay of up to three minutes.  a second alarm occurring at any time during either time delay will cause immediate activation of all associated outputs.

    Sngl Ilock

    See Section 9.6.1 for single interlock releasing operation.

    Dbl Ilock

    See Section 9.6.2 for double interlock releasing operation. 1 SK-FIRE-CO and other CO detectors can only be installed in a 1 count zone. They will operate as a 1- count point regardless of the programmed zone type (i.e. Alarm Verification, 2 count, etc.). 2 PAS operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Alarm Verification, two-count, single interlock releasing, and double interlock releasing cannot be used while PAS is enabled. Type of Delay Description Table 8.2 Alarm Delay Types (Continued)

    Note:

    The B200S Intelligent Sounder base provides the recommended CO cadence pattern.

    Note:

    If the SLC protocol is changed from SD to IDP/SK series and the cadence is no longer valid for IDP/SK, the zone cadence will be set to constant on.

    Page 94

    94 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Programming Group 8.3.2 View Zone Points To view the points in a zone, follow these steps:

  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the main menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Press 2 to enter zone menu.
  • Press 2 to view zone points.
  • Enter the number of the zone you wish to view, then press ENTER.
  • 8.4 Group An output group is made up of output points that have been programmed to respond in the same way. Output groups simplify programming because you only have to program the output characteristics that are common to all of the group points once, instead of programming each individual point. Once you have defined the characteristics of output groups, you can assign each point to the appropriate group. All valid output points are assigned to only one output group. Unused points are not assigned to any output group. Up to 999 output groups can be defined per panel. 8.4.1 Edit Group In the Edit Group option, you can program the name of an output group and change the properties of that group. To edit a group, follow these steps:
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Press 3 to enter Group Menu.
  • Press 1 to edit the Group.
  • Enter the number of the group you want to edit, then press ENTER.
  • Edit Group Name
  • To edit the Group Name, press 1.
  • You can use words to display a descriptive name for a group. Edit Group Properties
  • To edit the group properties, Press 2 from the Edit Group Menu.
  • The Edit Group Menu allows you to select options for each group for the following items: • Select Y for voice group and N for non-voice group. • Select / Dynamic Activation switch number: used when the group is defined as a voice group; or as a non-voice group where Dynamic Activation is used. This option links the output group with a voice select switch on an EVS-VCM, EVS-RVM, or switch expander for dynamic activation/deactivation. See “Activating Output Groups Dynamically” on page 129 for more information. • Template Override is shown when set to Yes. • Dynamic Activation is shown if a non-voice group is assigned to a Select/Dynamic Activation switch number • Dynamic Activation / Template Override Cadence (shown when the Template override is set to Yes or if a non-voice group is assigned a Select/Dynamic Activation switch number): this setting sets the cadence of the non-voice group mapped to voice select switch when activated using dynamic activation or by a template. See “Activating Output Groups Dynamically” on page 129 and Section 8.5 for more information. Defining Output Group Type Each output group is defined as either a voice output group or a non-voice output group. Output points that are audio circuits (all circuits on the EVS-50W, EVS-125W, EVS-100W, EVS-INT50W, and EVS-CE4) can only be assigned to voice output groups. Output points that are non-voice circuits (all other points and circuits that are on all modules except the EVS-50W, EVS-125W, EVS-100W, EVS-INT50W, and EVS-CE4) are assigned to non-voice output groups.C Each of the output groups defined as voice can be mapped to a particular switch and LED on the EVS-VCM, EVS-RVM, and EVS-SW24. This allows the user to see the state of the voice groups assigned to the switches. This also lets the user individually select which areas they want to do a live page into. Output groups not defined as voice groups can also be assigned to these switches as long as there is a voice group already assigned to the group. This allows for dynamically activating/deactivating both voice and strobes/other outputs in an area with a single button press. See “Activating Output Groups Dynamically” on page 129.

    Note:

    See Appendix A for editing names.

    Note:

    These settings only apply to non-voice groups.

    Page 95

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 95 Point Programming Silencing Options The following silencing options are available for each output group. 8.4.2 View Group Points

  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Press 3 to enter group menu.
  • Press 2 to view group points.
  • Enter the group number, then press ENTER.
  • 8.4.3 Edit OPG Template
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Press 3 to enter group menu.
  • Press 3 to edit OPG Template.
  • Enter the Template number, then press ENTER
  • Press ENTER on the template name to edit the name.
  • You can use words to display a descriptive name for a group.
  • Right arrow to the OPG and select YES or NO to select which output groups to include in the template.
  • 8.5 Point You may need to change characteristics of individual input points (detectors and switches) even after using JumpStart AutoProgramming. This section explains how to change options for: type of input point; latching/non-latching status (switches); and name and zone/group assignment of a point. 8.5.1 Point Programming For 5815XL Module To program for points on an 5815XL module, follow these steps:
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the main menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Press 4 to enter point menu.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the desired module. Refer to Section 7.5 for available choices. Then press ENTER.
  • Enter the number of the point you wish to edit, then press ENTER.
  • Select the type of device by pressing the up or down arrow key. Refer to the table under the column heading “Type Selection” for a list
  • of choices. Optional Timers Description Silence Inhibit Timed Silence after Inhibit. If this option is selected, the output group must be audible for a programmed number of minutes before it can be silenced. If the condition that caused the output to activate has not cleared during the time-frame, the output can be silenced. If you select this option, select the timeframe in the delay field. Range is 0-60 minutes. Auto Silence Silenceable. The output group will automatically silence after the timer expires. Range is 0-60 minutes. Auto Unsilence If this option is selected, the output group can be silenced for a programmed time-frame. If the condition that caused the output to activate has not cleared during the time-frame, the output reactivates. If you select this option, select the time- frame in the delay field. Range is 0-60 minutes. Startup Delay When an alarm is generated, the output group will not activate until the timer expires assuming the event is still active. Range is 0-120 Seconds. Table 8.3 Silencing Options

    Note:

    See Appendix A for editing names. Type Selection Function Latching Option Comments

    Unused

    Select for SLC points that are unused.

    Detector

    Photo

    Spot photoelectric detectors.

    Ion

    Spot ionization detector.

    Heat

    Spot heat detector.

    Photo Duct

    Duct photoelectric detector.

    Ion Duct

    Duct Ion detector.

    2-Wire Smoke

    2-wire smoke detector. Table 8.4 Programming Options for 5815XL Modules

    Page 96

    96 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Programming Point

    Sup Det

    Photo

    Latching Non Latching Use this option when you want a detector to indicate a supervisory alarm.

    Ion

    Heat

    Photo Duct

    Ion Duct

    Switch

    Manual Pull

    Use this switch type for manual pull stations. This input is always latched. The switch can clear only when an alarm is reset. This switch type has the highest fire priority; it overrides any other type of fire alarm.

    Waterflow

    Latching Use this switch type for monitoring water flow in a sprinkler system. Switch closure will cause a sprinkler alarm. Water flow switches can be programmed as latching or non-latching. You can program a delay of up to 90 seconds to be used with a water flow switch. The delay allows for normal, brief changes in sprinkler system water pressure. The water flow alarm will not activate unless the switch is active for the programmed delay time. If a delay is used, the system begins counting down when the switch closes. If the switch opens (restores) before the timer expires, a water flow alarm is not generated. If the water flow switch remains closed after the timer expires, a water flow alarm will be generated. Non Latching

    Fire

    Supervisory

    Latching Use this switch type for tamper monitoring of sprinklers and other fire protection devices. If a contact closes, a sprinkler supervisory event will be generated. Supervisory switches can be latching or non-latching. Non Latching

    Fire Drill

    System-level, non latching switch. This switch is an alternative way of causing a fire drill. It has the same operation as the fire drill option available from the annunciator. When the switch is activated, a fire drill begins; when the switch is de-activated, the fire drill ends.

    Silence

    This system-level switch is an alternative way to silence the fire system. It has the same effect as pressing the Silence key.

    Reset

    This system-level switch is an alternative way to reset the fire system. It has the same effect as pressing the Reset key.

    P.A.S. Ack

    Positive acknowledge switch. This switch must be used in zones programmed as Positive Alarm Sequence (see “Edit Zone Properties” on page 92). If an acknowledge switch closes when an alarm or trouble condition is not already in progress, a trouble will occur. You must use a UL listed normally open, momentary switch type. The switch must be rated at 5V, 100 mA (minimum) and be used with an EOL resistor for supervision.

    Zone Aux1

    Latching Use these switch types if you want to monitor special zone-level conditions (such as dry contact from a remote power supply). Non Latching

    Zone Aux2

    Latching Non Latching

    System Aux1

    Latching Use these switch types if you want to monitor special system-wide conditions (such as dry contact from a remote power supply). Non Latching

    System Aux2

    Latching Non Latching Type Selection Function Latching Option Comments Table 8.4 Programming Options for 5815XL Modules (Continued)

    Page 97

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 97 Point Programming 8.5.2 Point Programming For 6815 Module To program for points on an 6815 module, follow these steps:

  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Press 4 to enter Point Menu.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the desired module. Refer to Section 7.5 for available choices. Then press ENTER.
  • Select S for sensor or M for module. (SK devices only)
  • Enter the number of the point you want to edit, then press ENTER.
  • Select the type of device by pressing the up or down arrow key. Refer to the table below under the column heading “Type Selection” for
  • a list of choices.

    Switch

    (cont.)

    Detector

    Used to monitor conventional 4-wire detectors, a contact closure will generate a detector alarm event.

    Fire Tamper

    Latching Performs identically to a supervisory switch, but will be indicated as a tamper switch on the LCD annunciator. Non Latching

    Manual

    Release

    Manual release switch

    Interlock

    Interlock release switch input.

    Status Point

    Evs Input

    Latching User also has EVS Event Number 1-8 option for EVS INPUT. Only available when an EVS-VCM is installed in the system. Non Latching

    Evs Tamper

    Latching Non Latching

    Evs Super-

    Visory

    Latching Non Latching

    Co Detect

    Switch

    CO Detector Switch

    Co

    Supervisory

    Detect Switch

    Latching CO Supervisory Detector Switch Non Latching

    Notif

    Output Pt

    Select Group Output point, a general use notification type. Use for driving standard notification appliances.

    Aux Const

    Use constant power for applications that require a constant auxiliary power source. Power is always present at constant circuits.

    Aux Reset

    Use for auxiliary power, resettable applications. See Section 4.17.5 for a description of how this option operates.

    Aux Door

    Use for auxiliary power, door holder applications. For example, if you were using an auxiliary power supply for door holders, you would use this option. See Section Door Holder Power for a description of how this option operates.

    Relay

    Output Pt

    Select Group Output point, a general use relay type. Use for applications requiring a relay, such as fan shutdown, elevator recall, and so on.

    Aux Reset

    Use for auxiliary power, resettable applications. See Section 4.17.5 for a description of how this option operates.

    Aux Door

    Use for auxiliary power, door holder applications. For example, if you were using an auxiliary power supply for door holders, you would use this option. See “Door Holder Power” on page 54 for a description of how this option operates.

    Slc Led

    Led Number

    01-80 For use with SD devices only. 80 sub addresses on LED.

    Led Function

    Unused

    Notif

    Notification can have group number. Type Selection Function Latching Option Comments Table 8.4 Programming Options for 5815XL Modules (Continued)

    Page 98

    98 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Programming Point Type Selection Function Latching Option Comments

    Unused

    Select for SLC points that are unused.

    Detector

    Photo

    Spot photoelectric detectors.

    Ion

    Spot ION detectors

    Heat

    Spot heat detector.

    Photo Duct

    Duct photoelectric detector.

    Acclimate

    Acclimate photoelectric detector.

    Heat Ht

    High temperature heat detector.

    Photo-Heat

    Photoelectric detector with heat sensor.

    Beam

    Beam smoke detector.

    Sup Det

    Photo

    Latching Non Latching Use this option when you want a detector to indicate a supervisory alarm.

    Ion

    Heat

    Photo Duct

    Acclimate

    Heat Ht

    Photo-Heat

    Beam

    Co Smoke Detector

    Co Alrm /

    Fire Alrm

    No Accessory Base, Sounder base, Relay Base, or Intelligent Sounder base. Bases can be set for Single station or Multi station, Silence or Non-Silence, Latching or non-latching. Intelligent sounder bases can have volume set for high or low.

    Co Alrm /

    Fire Supr

    Co Supr /

    Fire Alrm

    Co Supr /

    Fire Supr

    Latching Non Latching Supervisory switches can be latching or non-latching.

    W-Detector

    Photo

    Wireless photoelectric detectors

    Photo-Heat

    Wireless heat detector

    Heat

    Wireless heat detector

    W-Sup Det Switch

    Same as W-Detector Latching Non Latching Wireless photoelectric detectors

    Switch

    Manual Pull

    Use this switch type for manual pull stations. This input is always latched. The switch can clear only when an alarm is reset. This switch type has the highest fire priority; it overrides any other type of fire alarm.

    Waterflow

    Latching Use this switch type for monitoring water flow in a sprinkler system. Switch closure will cause a sprinkler alarm. Water flow switches can be programmed as latching or non-latching. You can program a delay of up to 90 seconds to be used with a water flow switch. The delay allows for normal, brief changes in sprinkler system water pressure. The water flow alarm will not activate unless the switch is active for the programmed delay time. If a delay is used, the system begins counting down when the switch closes. If the switch opens (restores) before the timer expires, a water flow alarm is not generated. If the water flow switch remains closed after the timer expires, a water flow alarm will be generated. Non Latching

    Fire Supervisory

    Latching Use this switch type for tamper monitoring of sprinklers and other fire protection devices. If a contact closes, a sprinkler supervisory event will be generated. Supervisory switches can be latching or non-latching. Non Latching

    Fire Drill

    System-level, non latching switch. This switch is an alternative way of causing a fire drill. It has the same operation as the fire drill option available from the annunciator. When the switch is activated, a fire drill begins; when the switch is de-activated, the fire drill ends. Table 8.5 Programming Options for 6815 Modules

    Page 99

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 99 Point Programming

    Switch

    (cont.)

    Silence

    This system-level switch is an alternative way to silence the fire system. It has the same effect as pressing the Silence key.

    Reset

    This system-level switch is an alternative way to reset the fire system. It has the same effect as pressing the Reset key.

    P.A.S. Ack

    Positive acknowledge switch. This switch must be used in zones programmed as Positive Alarm Sequence (see “Edit Zone Properties” on page 92). If an acknowledge switch closes when an alarm or trouble condition is not already in progress, a trouble will occur. You must use a UL listed normally open, momentary switch type. The switch must be rated at 5V, 100 mA (minimum) and be used with an EOL resistor for supervision.

    Zone Aux1

    Latching Use these switch types if you want to monitor special zone-level conditions (such as dry contact from a remote power supply). Non Latching

    Zone Aux2

    Latching Non Latching

    System Aux1

    Latching Use these switch types if you want to monitor special system-wide conditions (such as dry contact from a remote power supply). Non Latching

    System Aux2

    Latching Non Latching

    Detector

    Used to monitor conventional 4-wire detectors, a contact closure will generate a detector alarm event.

    Fire Tamper

    Latching Performs identically to a supervisory switch, but will be indicated as a tamper switch on the LCD annunciator. Non Latching

    Manual Release

    Manual release switch

    Interlock

    Interlock release switch input.

    Status Point

    Evs Input

    Latching User also has EVS Event Number 1-8 option for EVS INPUT. Only available when an EVS-VCM is installed in the system. Non Latching

    Evs Tamper

    Latching Non Latching

    Evs

    Supervisory

    Latching Non Latching

    Co Detect Switch

    CO Detector Switch

    Co Supervisory

    Detect Switch

    Latching CO Supervisory Detector Switch Non Latching

    Trouble_Mon

    Use this switch type to monitor trouble from external devices. Trouble monitors are used in HVAC operations.

    Notif

    Output Pt

    Select Group Output point, a general use notification type. Use for driving standard notification appliances.

    Aux Const

    Use constant power for applications that require a constant auxiliary power source. Power is always present at constant circuits.

    Aux Reset

    Use for auxiliary power, resettable applications. See “Resettable Power” on page 54 for a description of how this option operates.

    Aux Door

    Use for auxiliary power, door holder applications. For example, if you were using an auxiliary power supply for door holders, you would use this option. See “Door Holder Power” on page 54 for a description of how this option operates.

    Relay

    Output Pt

    Select Group Output point, a general use relay type. Use for applications requiring a relay, such as fan shutdown, elevator recall, and so on.

    Aux Reset

    Use for auxiliary power, resettable applications. See “Resettable Power” on page 54 for a description of how this option operates.

    Aux Door

    Use for auxiliary power, door holder applications. For example, if you were using an auxiliary power supply for door holders, you would use this option. See “Door Holder Power” on page 54 for a description of how this option operates. Type Selection Function Latching Option Comments Table 8.5 Programming Options for 6815 Modules (Continued)

    Page 100

    100 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Programming Point 8.5.3 Point Programming For Internal or External Power Module (5895XL) To program for an internal or external power module points:

  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Press 4 to enter point menu.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the desired module. Refer to Section 7.5 for available choices, then press ENTER.
  • Enter the number of the circuit or point you wish to edit, then press ENTER.
  • Select the type by pressing the up or down arrow key, then press ENTER.
  • Select the function by pressing the up or down arrow key, then press ENTER.
  • If the point supports latching press the up or down arrow key to select latching or non-latching, then press ENTER.
  • Select the zone or group by pressing the up or down arrow key, then press ENTER.
  • If the point supports not being supervised, press the up or down arrow key to select supervised or non-supervised, then press ENTER.
  • Press ENTER to edit point name. See Appendix A for help with editing text. Or, Press right arrow key to skip point name edit.
  • Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for all circuits.
  • Detector 2-Wire Smoke W-Gateway Wireless Gateway

    W-Switch

    Same as SWITCH W-Relay Same as Relay When a wireless relay is in use, module device count must be limited to 109 modules per loop. This includes wired and wireless modules that are on the same loop. The module address must be within 1-109. Type Selection Function Latching Option Comments Table 8.5 Programming Options for 6815 Modules (Continued) Choices Type Selections Function Selections for each Type Comments Enter Point Select Type

    Unused

    B Notif

    Notif Output

    User also has Supervised/Unsupervised option

    Control Circuit

    A Notif

    Same as B NOTIF

    Aux_Pwr

    Constant

    Constant auxiliary power

    Aux Reset

    Resettable auxiliary power

    Aux Door

    Door holder auxiliary power

    Aux Sync

    B Switch

    Manual Pull

    Refer to comments column of Table 8.5 for description of these options. Latch or Non-latching feature only appears for WATERFLOW, FIRE

    Supervisory, Fire Tamper, Zone Aux1, Zone Aux2,

    SYSTEM AUX1, SYSTEM AUX2, ECS INPUT, ECS TAMPER, and

    Ecs Supervisory.

    Waterflow

    Fire Supervisory

    Fire Tamper

    Fire Drill

    Silence

    Reset

    P.A.S. Ack

    Zone Aux1

    Zone Aux2

    System Aux1

    System Aux2

    Manual Release

    Interlock

    Status Point

    Evs Input

    User also has EVS Event Number 1-8 option for EVS INPUT.Only available when a EVS-VCM is installed in the system.

    Evs Tamper

    Evs Supervisory

    A Switch

    Same as B SWITCH Table 8.6 Menu Choices for Internal/External Power Module

    Page 101

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 101 Point Programming 8.5.4 Point Programming for 5880/5865 Modules To program the 5880/5865 module output points:

  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the Main Menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Press 4 to enter Point Menu.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the desired module. Refer to Section 7.5 for available choices. Then press ENTER.
  • Enter the point number, then press ENTER.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the type (notification or unused)., then press ENTER.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the desired group., then press ENTER.
  • Press ENTER to edit point name. See Appendix A. Or, Press right arrow key to skip point name edit.
  • Repeat Steps 1 through 8 for all output points.
  • To use 5880 as Input point, Enter point number 41 - 48. Then press ENTER.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select type (switch or unused), then press ENTER.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the desired function, then press ENTER.
  • If the point supports latching press the up or down arrow key to select latching or non-latching, then press ENTER.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the desired group/zone, then press ENTER.
  • Edit point name Or Press right arrow key to skip module name edit.
  • Repeat steps 10 through 15 for all input points.
  • 8.5.5 Point Programming for the 5496 To program module points:
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Press 4 to enter point menu.
  • Select Type (cont.)

    B Detect

    2-Wire Smoke

    Used for Class B, 2-wire detectors.

    4-Wire Smoke

    Used for Class B, 4-wire detectors.

    Co 4-Wire Det

    Used for Class B, 4-wire CO detectors.

    Co 4-Wire Sup Det

    Latching or Non-latching used for Class B, 4-wire CO Supervisory detectors

    A Detect

    2-Wire Smoke

    Used for Class A, 2-wire detectors.

    4-Wire Smoke

    Used for Class A, 4-wire detectors.

    Co 4-Wire Det

    Used for Class A, 4-wire CO detectors.

    Co 4-Wire Sup Det

    Latching or Non-latching used for Class A, 4-wire CO Supervisory detectors Select Zone/Group Group or Zone selection will appear depending on the type selected. Edit Name See Appendix A. Choices Type Selections Function Selections for each Type Comments Table 8.6 Menu Choices for Internal/External Power Module (Continued)

    M01 P001 Notif

    G01

    Module_1 Ckt_1

    Select NOTIF or UNUSED. Select an output group for this notification point. Select the circuit to program. Select a name for the point. Figure 8.3 Programming Output Points Screen for 5880 and 5865 Modules

    M01 P048 Switch

    Z001

    Module_1 Ckt_1

    Select SWITCH or UNUSED. Select an input zone. Select the point to program. Select a name for the point. Figure 8.4 Programming Input Points Screen for 5880 and 5865 Modules

    Page 102

    102 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Programming Point

  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the desired module. Refer to Section 7.5 for available choices, then press ENTER.
  • Enter the point number, then press ENTER.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the type (See Table 8.6). Then press ENTER.
  • Press ENTER to edit point name. See Appendix A. Or, Press right arrow key to skip point name edit.
  • Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for all points.
  • 8.5.6 Point Programming for EVS Amplifiers To program module points:
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the main menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Press 4 to enter point menu.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the desired module. Refer to Section 7.5 for available choices. Then press ENTER.
  • Enter the point number, then press ENTER. Points 5-8 on EVS-50W or EVS-125W will not be available unless the EVS-CE4 is
  • installed.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the type (notification or unused), then press ENTER.
  • Press ENTER to edit point name. See Appendix A. Or Press right arrow key to skip point name edit.
  • Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for all points.
  • 8.5.7 Point Programming for EVS-VCM, and EVS-RVM To program module points:
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the main menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Press 4 to enter point menu.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the desired module. Refer to Section 7.5 for available choices. Then press ENTER.
  • Enter the point number. Press ENTER.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the type (switch or unused). Press ENTER.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the desired Function (See Table 8.7). Press ENTER.
  • Press ENTER to edit point name. See Appendix A or Press right arrow key to skip point name edit.
  • Repeat Steps 1 through 8 for all points.
  • Figure 8.5 Programming Points Screen for the 5496 Module

    M01 P001 Constant

    Sys

    Module_1 Ckt_1

    Enter Pt or <= to Exit> point number Select aux power type Select name for the point Figure 8.6 Programming Points Screen for the EVS Amplifiers

    M04 P004 Notif

    Sys

    Module_1 Ckt_8

    Enter Pt or <= to Exit> point number Select NOTIF or UNUSED Select name for the point Figure 8.7 Programming Points Screen for the EVS-VCM and EVS-RVM Modules

    M04 P004 Switch

    G001

    Module_1 Ckt_8

    Enter Pt or <= to Exit> point number Select SWITCH or UNUSED Select name for the point

    Page 103

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 103 Point Programming Choices Type Selections Function Selections for each Type Comments 5880 (output)

    Unused

    Notif

    (outputs pt 1-40)

    Notif Output

    Control Circuit

    5880 (input 41-48)

    Switch

    Manual Pull

    Refer to comments column of Table 8.5 for description of these options. Latch or Non-latching feature only appears for WATERFLOW, FIRE

    Supervisory, Fire Tamper, Zone Aux1, Zone Aux2, System

    AUX1, SYSTEM AUX2, EVS INPUT, EVS TAMPER, and EVS

    Supervisory.

    Waterflow

    Fire Supervisory

    Fire Tamper

    Detector

    Fire Drill

    Silence

    Reset

    P.A.S. Ack

    Zone Aux1

    Zone Aux2

    System Aux1

    System Aux2

    Manual Release

    Interlock

    Status Point

    Evs Input

    User also has ECS Event Number 1-8 option for EVS INPUT, EVS TAMPER, and EVS SUPERVISORY functions in both 5880 and EVS- VCM/EVSRVM choices. Only available when an EVS-VCM is installed in the system to the EVSRVM choice part.

    Evs Tamper

    Evs Supervisory

    5865

    Unused

    Notif

    Notif Output

    Control Circuit

    EVS Amplifiers

    (Evs50/125W)

    Unused

    Notif

    Table 8.7 Choices for Point Programming Modules

    Page 104

    104 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Programming System Options 8.6 System Options This section of the manual explains how to customize software options that affect general operation of the system. This includes such items as: Communication Options, Time Options, Miscellaneous Options, Daylight Saving Options, Edit Banner, and SLC Family. Refer to each individual subsection for complete instructions. 8.6.1 Communication Options Auto Test Time To access the Auto Test Time screen:

  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the main menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Select 5 for System Options.
  • From the next menu, select 1 for Communication Options.
  • Select 1 for Auto Test Time.
  • Enter the hour you desire the control panel to send an automatic test report (or press the up or down arrow key), then press ENTER.
  • Enter the minutes (or press the up or down arrow key), then press ENTER.
  • Select AM or PM by pressing the up or down arrow key, then press ENTER.
  • Select Report Time Interval by pressing the up or down arrow key, then press ENTER. Time Interval selections are 24hr, 12hr, 6hr and
  • 4 hr. Phone Lines To access the phone lines screen:
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the main menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Select 5 for System Options.
  • From the next menu, select 1 for Communication Options.
  • Select 2 for the phone Lines.
  • Evsrvm, Evsvcm

    Unused

    Switch

    Manual Pull

    Refer to comments column of Table 8.5 for description of these options. Latch or Non-latching feature only appears for WATERFLOW, FIRE

    Supervisory, Fire Tamper, Zone Aux1, Zone Aux2, System

    AUX1, SYSTEM AUX2, EVS INPUT, EVS TAMPER, and EVS

    Supervisory

    Waterflow

    Fire Supervisory

    Fire Tamper

    Fire Drill

    Silence

    Reset

    P.A.S. Ack

    Zone Aux1

    Zone Aux2

    System Aux1

    System Aux2

    Manual Release

    Interlock

    Status Point

    Evs Input

    User also has ECS Event Number 1-8 option for EVS INPUT, EVS TAMPER, and EVS SUPERVISORY functions in both 5880 and EVS- VCM/EVSRVM choices. Only available when an EVS-VCM is installed in the system to the EVSRVM choice part.

    Evs Tamper

    Evs Supervisory

    Voice Aux Status 1-2

    Background Music

    Voice Aux Ecs 1-4

    Choices Type Selections Function Selections for each Type Comments Table 8.7 Choices for Point Programming Modules (Continued)

    Note:

    AM and PM are only available if the panel “Clock Options” are set for AMPM mode. Otherwise the clock is in military time and AMPM is not selectable

    Page 105

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 105 System Options Programming

  • Select Phone Line to be edited (1 or 2) by pressing the up or down arrow key, then press ENTER.
  • Dialing Prefix Enter up to 9 characters to be used for such things as PBX dial-out codes, a pause, and so on. The following special characters are available: Use the number buttons on the annunciator or the up- and down-arrow keys to select special characters. Special characters begin displaying after “9”.
  • Enter a dialing prefix (if needed), then press ENTER. Or Press the right arrow to bypass the dialing prefix option.
  • Number of Answer Rings This option is used in conjunction with the HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite. Use this option to determine the number of rings before the panel answers a call from the computer. The range is 00-15 rings. This option is factory-programmed as 06 rings, which should be compati- ble for most installations where the answering machine bypass feature is used. You may need to adjust it depending on the installation’s tele- phone system. The selection made here must match the programming for this option in the Communication Configuration dialog box of HFSS.
  • Enter the desired number of answer rings, then press ENTER.
  • Dial Option
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the dial option, then press ENTER.
  • Dial Format
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the pulse ratio for rotary dialing option, then press ENTER.
  • Options are: Dial Tone Detection Disabled
  • Select Y (do disable) or N (don’t disable) by pressing the up or down arrow key, then press ENTER.
  • Monitor Line Enable the line monitor for each phone line that will be used. See Figure 8.8 for the location of this field on the phone lines screen. When the phone line monitor has been enabled for a phone line, a trouble condition will occur if the line is not connected. If a phone line will not be used, it must be disabled.
  • Select Y (monitor line) or N (don’t monitor line) by pressing the up or down arrow key, then press ENTER.
  • Answering Machine Bypass This option is used in conjunction with HFSS. This feature ensures that an answering machine will not interfere with communication between the panel and the computer. If an answering machine is used at the panel site, enable this feature; if an answering machine is not used, disable the feature. This option is factory-programmed as No (disabled). # Pound (or number) key on the telephone
  • Star key on the telephone
  • , Comma (character for 2-second pause) Dial Option Description

    Pulse

    If this option is selected, only pulse dialing will be used for this phone line.

    Tt

    Touch-tone dialing. If this option is selected, only touch-tone dialing will be used for this phone line.

    Tt/Pl

    Touch-tone alternating with pulse. If this option is selected, the communicator will first attempt to use touch- tone. It will switch to pulse if touch-tone is not successful on the first attempt. It will continue to alternate between TT and pulse for additional attempts. Table 8.8 Dial Options

    U

    U.S. standard format. Uses the 60 msec / 40 msec make/break ratio.

    E

    European format. Uses the 66 msec / 34 msec make/break ratio. Line:1 N P: Rings: 06 D:TT Options: UNYN dial tone detection disabled Y/N number of rings before the panel answer a call from a computer dial options: touch-tone, pulse, both phone line to edit Enter a dialing prefix. Up to 9 characters can be used to allow for things such as PBX dial-out codes, a pause, etc. phone line unused Y/N answering machine bypass Y/N monitor line Y/N U for U.S. or E for European U.S. format = 60/40msec make/break European = 66/34msec make/break Figure 8.8 Phone Lines Editing Screen

    Page 106

    106 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Programming System Options The selection made here must match the programming for this option in the Communication Configuration dialog box of HFSS.

  • Select Y (answering machine bypass enabled) or N (answering machine bypass disabled) by pressing the up or down arrow key, then
  • press ENTER. Phone Line Unused This option is used so that you can set unused phones lines to “Yes”, so no auto-test will be sent through that line. This option is factory programmed as No.
  • Select Y or N by pressing the up or down arrow key, then press ENTER.
  • Edit Ethernet
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the main menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Select 5 for System Options.
  • From the next menu, select 1 for Communication Options.
  • Select 3 for Edit Ethernet.
  • AlarmNet Timers

  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the main menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Select 5 for System Options.
  • From the next menu, select 1 for Communication Options.
  • Select 4 for AlarmNet Timers.
  • The available options for AlarmNet Timers are as follows: *default
  • • Ethernet: None, 75 seconds, 90 seconds, 3 minutes, *5 minutes, 1 hour, 24 hours, 30 days. • Cellular: None, *24 hours, 30 days. • Old Alarm: None, 10 minutes, 15 Minutes,*30 Minutes, 1 Hour, 2 Hours, 4 Hours, 6 Hours, 12 Hours, 24 Hours. (Sets how long an undeliverable alarm is retried for delivery to the Central Station. If the message is not validated, it is retried until the old alarm time is reached or the message is validated). Phone Line Gains
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the main menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Select 5 for System Options.
  • From the next menu, select 1 for Communication Options.
  • Select 5 for Phone Line Gains
  • The available options: *default
  • • Dialing Gain: – Low = 9 DB Attenuation – Normal = 6 DB Attenuation – *High = 3 DB Attenuation • Reporting Gain: – *Low = 9 DB Attenuation – Normal = 6 DB Attenuation – High = 3 DB Attenuation 8.6.2 Time Options Through this programming option you can set the water flow delay time, alarm verification time, AC report delay, AC-Frequency, Auto- Resound, and Clock Format.

    Mac:0000.0020.6894

    Mac Crc:01E2

    Ip:158.100.049.148

    More Sub:255.255.252.000

    Gw:158.100.048.254

    Dhcp:Y

    Figure 8.9 Edit Ethernet Message Ethernet: 5 Minutes_ Cellular: 24 Hours_ Old Alarm: 30 Minutes_ Figure 8.10 AlarmNet Timers

    Page 107

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 107 System Options Programming Water Flow Delay You can program a delay of 0-90 seconds (zero means no delay) to be used in conjunction with a water flow switch. The delay is system- wide. All water flow switches on the system will use the same delay period. To access the screen for programming water flow delay, follow these steps:

  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the main menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Select 5 for System Options.
  • Select 4 for Time Options.
  • A screen similar to the one shown below will display.
  • Enter the number of seconds (0 to 90) to delay a water flow switch alarm, then press ENTER.
  • Alarm Verify You can set the alarm verification time from 60 to 250 seconds (default is 60 seconds). To set the alarm verification:
  • Enter the desired number of seconds for the alarm verification time.
  • Press right arrow key or ENTER to make your selection and move to the next programming option.
  • AC Report Delay You can adjust the number of hours before a low AC report will be sent to the central station. To program low AC report delay, follow these steps continued from step 7.
  • Enter the number of hours (0-30) before a low AC report will be sent to the central station, then press ENTER.
  • Change AC Line Frequency The panel’s AC line frequency is selectable for 50, 60 Hz, or Internal. AC Frequency feature dictates how the control panel will calculate time based on the AC line frequency used in the installation site. The “Internal” option can be used in areas where the AC line frequency is not dependable and you want the panel to calculate time from the internal crystal. The internal crystal is not as accurate as the AC power source and internal 60 Hz or 50 Hz should normally be selected. The panel defaults to the 60 Hz selection. To change the AC line frequency:
  • Select 50Hz, 60Hz or Intl, by pressing the up or down arrow key, then press ENTER.
  • Clock Format (AM/PM or Military) To change the system clock display format:
  • Select AMPM (for AM/PM display format) or MIL (for military or 24 hr display format) by pressing the up or down arrow key, then
  • press ENTER. Auto-Resound (4 or 24 hours) The system resound time period can be modified from the default value 24 hours to 4 hours. This setting adjusts when the FACP will auto- matically resound events after being silenced. Set this option to 4 hours when using SWIFT devices 8.6.3 Miscellaneous Options Through this programming option you can do strobe synchronization during silence, and auto display event. To edit Miscellaneous options:
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the main menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Select 5 for System Options.
  • Select 5 for Miscellaneous Options
  • Water Flow Delay:01s Alarm Verify:060s AC Report Delay:03h <(0-90)> More AC-Frequency: 60Hz Clock Format: AMPM Auto-Resound: 24hr <50Hz/60Hz/Internal> delay in seconds before waterflow alarm occurs (00-90) Figure 8.11 Water Flow Delay Programming Screen

    Note:

    You must select 1-3 hours in UL central station installations and UL remote signaling installations.

    Page 108

    108 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Programming System Options Strobes Active when Silenced When “SYNC Strobe:” is selected as Y (Yes), the strobes will continue to flash when the system is silenced and will stop flashing when the system is reset.

  • Press the up or down arrow key to toggle this selection between Y (Yes) or N (No).
  • Press right arrow key or ENTER to make your selection and move to the next programming option.
  • Auto Display Events When this feature is programmed Y (Yes), the highest priority event of the system in control will automatically display on the control panel and remote annunciators after there has been no activity on any system touch pad for two minutes.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to toggle this selection between Y (Yes) or N (No).
  • Press right arrow key or ENTER to make your selection and move to the next programming option.
  • 8.6.4 Daylight Saving Options To edit Daylight Saving Time:
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the main menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Select 5 for System Options.
  • Select 6 for Daylight Saving Option.
  • Automatic Daylight Saving Adjustment The control panel has an automatic DST (Daylight Saving Time) adjustment feature. If this feature is not enabled (set to No), the Daylight Saving Time change is not made to the system clock. To enable or disable DST adjustment continue programming:
  • Select Y (enabled) or N (disabled) by pressing the up or down arrow key, then press ENTER.
  • Daylight Saving Time Start and End This option lets you to adjust the week and month Daylight Saving Time (DST) starts and ends. For this feature to work, you must enable (set to Yes) the Automatic Daylight Savings Adjustment option under Daylight Savings Options. The default values for the DST Start and End are: DST Start: The second Sunday in March DST End: The first Sunday in November To set the start and end for Daylight Saving Time:
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the week (1st, 2nd, etc.) Daylight Saving Time starts, then press ENTER to make your
  • selection and move to the month setting.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the month (January – December) Daylight Saving Time starts, then press ENTER to make your
  • selection and move to the DST End option.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the week (1st, 2nd, etc.) Daylight Saving Time ends, then press ENTER to make your selection
  • and move to the month setting.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select the month (January – December) Daylight Saving Time ends, then press ENTER.
  • 8.6.5 Edit Banner The banner is the message that displays on the panel LCD when the system is normal; that is, when no alarms or troubles exist and the sys- tem menus are not in use. A custom banner of up to 40 characters can be created. This will automatically be centered when shown. If a custom message is not created, the system will use the internal banner. You cannot change the internal banner. To customize the banner display message:
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the main menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Select 5 for System Options.
  • Select 7 for Edit Banner. (See Appendix A for instructions on how to edit the banner)
  • Select each letter by pressing the up or down arrow key to change modes and using the number keys to select characters, then press right
  • arrow key to move to the next character.
  • When done, press ENTER to save the custom banner.
  • 8.6.6 SLC Family The 6820 supports SD, Intelligent Device Protocol (IDP) or SK Series SLC devices. You must configure the 6820 to accept the protocol of the devices you are installing. You cannot mix SLC devices of different protocols.
  • Login to the panel.
  • Select 7 to access the program menu.
  • Select 5 to access System Options.
  • Note:

    The “SYNC Strobe” only functions with outputs that use a synchronized output pattern.

    Page 109

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 109 Restore Defaults Programming

  • Select 8 for SLC Family.
  • Press UP arrow to select the desired SLC device type.
  • Press ENTER to accept the displayed SLC device type.
  • When changing SLC family from SK to SD will remove all external 6815 modules. When changing from SD to SK SLC family will remove all 5815XL modules on the system. 8.6.7 JumpStart Auto-Programming To run JumpStart, do the following.
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the Main Menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Select 6 for JumpStart.
  • Press ENTER to accept the warning screen.
  • Follow the remaining on screen instructions.
  • Press ENTER to confirm. See Section 7.1.3.
  • 8.7 Restore Defaults This option allows you to restore the panel back to factory defaults. All programming will be lost.
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the main menu.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Select 7 for Restore Defaults.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to select YES or NO from the warning screen. Then, press ENTER.
  • 8.8 Voice Options Through this Programming Menu, you can modify the messages programmed into an EVS-VCM. You can also modify other voice settings. 8.8.1 VCM Maintenance The VCM Maintenance menu is used to program custom messages into the VCM. Messages can be recorded locally using the microphone.
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Select 8 for Voice Options.
  • Select 1 for VCM Maintenance.
  • 8.8.2 Voice Settings
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming.
  • Select 8 for Voice Options.
  • Select 2 for Voice Settings.
  • Note:

    When you change the SLC type from one protocol to another, the following message will appear. Changing the SLC family will set all SLC points to [Press for More] Back Accept Figure 8.12 SLC Family Change

    Note:

    JumpStart Auto-Programming is used to auto learn the system hardware after devices have been added or removed from the system. Hardware devices which remain the same between repeat JumpStart will retain any customized text or options associated with the device. It is best to carefully consider the Network ID setting for each panel before the first JumpStart Auto-Programming is performed. Once this is done, the panel must be defaulted back to factory defaults if the network ID settings need to change. family will set all SLC points to

    Unused

    Page 110

    110 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Section 9: System Operation Operation of the control panel is user friendly. Menus guide you step-by-step through operations. This section of the manual is an overview of the operation menus. Please read this entire section carefully before operating the panel. 9.1 Annunciator Description Figure 9.1 shows the annunciator that is part of the 6820 control panel board assembly.

    Alarm

    Trouble

    Silenced

    Power

    Review

    Alarm

    Trouble

    Review

    Review

    Supervisory

    1 2 3 4 7 0 # 8 9 5 6
  • silence alarms/troubles
  • single key acknowledge reset alarms/troubles fire drill Arrow keys for moving through menus. Enter key accepts selections. number keys for entering numeric data five system status LEDs 80-character LCD Messages display on 4 lines with up to 20 characters per line. Figure 9.1 6820 Control Panel Annunciator

    Page 111

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 111 Annunciator Description System Operation Figure 9.2 shows the annunciator that is part of the 6820EVS control panel board assembly. 9.1.1 LCD Display The control panel LCD displays system messages, annunciates alarms, supervisories and troubles, provides status information, and prompts for input. Annunciator keys beep when they are pressed.

    En Te R

    N Ex T

    B A C K

    B A Ck

    N E X T

    N Ex T

    A C K

    D R Ill

    R E Se T

    Sile N C E

    1 4 7 8 9
  • 0
  • # 5 6 2 3

    F1

    F2

    F3

    F4

    B A C K

    silence alarms/troubles single key acknowledge reset alarms/troubles fire drill Arrow keys for moving through menus. Enter key accepts selections. number keys for entering numeric data programmable function keys five system status LEDs 160-character LCD Messages display on 4 lines with up to 40 characters per line. Figure 9.2 6820EVS Control Panel Annunciator

    Page 112

    112 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 System Operation Menu System 9.1.2 Banner The banner is the message that displays on the control panel when the system is in normal mode (no alarm or trouble condition exists and menus are not in use). A customize message can be created that will display instead of the internal (default) message. See Section 8.6.5 for information on editing the banner. 9.2 Menu System The control panel is easy to operate from the Main Menu. To view the Main Menu press the ENTER or right arrow key on the control panel or remote annunciator. This will bring up the panel login menu, as described in Section 9.2.1. Once validated, the user will be able to access the Main Menu as shown in Section 9.2.2. Select the desired option. You will be prompted for as access code if required. The control panel supports up to 20 access codes. The profile for each access code (or user) can be modified through the network program- ming option (see Section 6.2.5 for access code programming). 9.2.1 Panel Login Menu After pressing ENTER, and 1 for the login menu, a screen will prompt for the type of access account, Administrator or User. An administra- tor has the ability to modify user accounts and view the cybersecurity log. The User account has access to panel programming. Admin Profiles After initial power-up, the 6820 requires a password change and user account setup before programming. Only Admin1 will be active. Using the login for Admin1, the default password (0000000) must be changed to a new, unique password. This new password must be 7-digits and cannot be sequential or easily guessed. If the password is not changed, a default password trouble will appear on the panel. There is a maximum of two administrator profiles available. After the administrator account is set up, you must create a User account(s). Only a User account has the ability to program the control panel. There is a maximum of 18 User accounts available. Admin accounts can: • View cybersecurity logs with date/time stamp • Edit name to user profiles • Enable/disable user profiles • Modify access codes of user profiles • Edit access to panel functions • Change computer access code • Restore factory default settings to the panel User (Installer) Profiles There are two programming levels which will access the Programming screens. From either of the screens, access to specific system and device features or programming may be obtained. An “Installer” can program local panel data relating to device types, zoning, messages, control panel functions, etc. A “Multi-site Installer” can program panel data across a network. A user has the ability to change their adminis- trator-assigned password after it has been assigned for the first time. Refer to Section 6.2.5 on page 68. • Profile 1 is the profile used that dictates what functions to which the Fire Fighter Key has access. Because this is the profile used for a key, the User Name and the Access Code cannot be edited. Site 1 Silent Knight 6808

    All Systems Normal

    08/03/21 01:15:06Pm

    ABC Company Fire System

    All Systems Normal

    08/03/21 01:15:06Pm

    internal banner text custom banner example Figure 9.3 6820 Banner Display Examples Site 1 Silent Knight - Model 6820

    All Systems Normal

    08/03/21 01:15:06Pm

    Site 1

    Abc Company - Fire System

    All Systems Normal

    08/03/21 01:15:06Pm

    internal banner text custom banner example Figure 9.4 6820EVS Banner Display Examples

    Page 113

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 113 Menu System System Operation • Profile 2 is defaulted as “Installer” and profile 3 is defaulted to “Multi-Site Installer”. Profiles 4-18 are empty profiles available for assignment. User profiles 2-18 can be edited for name and panel functions. Table 9.1 lists the panel functions that can be selected for each user profile. Invalid Password/Panel Timeout If a password is entered incorrectly or is not a valid password, the panel will display an error message. You must hit ENTER or the left arrow key and re-enter the password correctly. After ten invalid attempts, the panel will panel will lock for 30 seconds and then you can try again. However, if the password has been forgotten, record the 20-character code displayed on the panel and contact Technical Services. After proper authentication, the password will be supplied. 9.2.2 Main Menu Overview The chart below is a brief overview of the Main Menu. These options are described in greater detail throughout this section of the manual. Type of Function Selectable Functions Panel Operations System Reset System Silence System Ack Fire Drill Key *F1 Function Key *F2 Function Key *F3 Function Key *F4 Function Key Panel Menus System Tests Fire Drill Menu Indicator Test Walk Test-No Report Walk Test -With Report Communicator Test Clear History Buffer Point Functions Disable/Enable Point Point Status Set SLC Device Address SLC Single Device Locater SLC Multiple Device Locater I/O Point Control Event History Set Time & Date System Information Network Diagnostics Network Programming Panel Programming Send/Receive Firmware Update *Function Keys are only available on the 6860 LCD annunciator. Table 9.1 User Profile Selectable Panel Functions Main Menu Options Description 1- System Tests Access to Fire Drill, Indicator Test, Walk Tests, Communicator Test, Clear History Buffer, Manual AlarmNet Registration and Manual Communicator Reset. 2- Point Functions Enable/disable points, Point Status, SLC Single Device Locater, SLC Multiple Device Locater, and I/O Point Control. 3- Event History Display event history on the LCD. See Section 9.3.3 for more information. 4- Set Time & Date Set time and date for the system 5- Network Diagnostics Ping Panel and Data Network Status 6- Network Programming Access Learn Network, Edit Network Names, Edit Panel ID, Computer Access, Access Codes, Communicator Options, Voice Options, Sync Network Options 7- Panel Programming Brings up a set of menus for programming the panel. These options are described in detail in Section 8. 8- System Information Menus to view information about the panel such as model, ID, serial number, revision, send or receive firmware updates and feature registration activation Table 9.2 Main Menu Options

    Page 114

    114 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 System Operation Basic Operation 9.2.3 Using the Menus 9.3 Basic Operation 9.3.1 Setting Time and Date

  • Select 4 for Set Date & Time.
  • Make changes in the fields on the screen. Use right arrow to move through the fields. Use the up or down arrow key to select options in
  • the fields.
  • When the date and time are correct, press ENTER.
  • 9.3.2 Disable / Enable a Point
  • Select 2 for Point Functions.
  • Select 1 for Disable/Enable Point.
  • Disable / Enable NACs by Template
  • Press 1 for Disable NACs by Template, or press 2 to Enable NACs by Template.
  • Use the up or down arrow key to move through the list of templates. Press ENTER to select the current template.
  • Disable / Enable NACs by Group
  • Press 3 to Disable NACs by Group, or press 4 to Enable NACs by Group.
  • Use the up or down arrow key to move through the list of groups. Press ENTER to select the group highlighted.
  • Disable / Enable Zone Points
  • Press 5 to Disable Zone Points, or press 6 to Enable Zone Points.
  • Use the up or down arrow key to move through the list of zones. Press ENTER to select the zone highlighted.
  • Disable / Enable Point
  • Press 7 to Disable /Enable Point.
  • Choose module.
  • Use the up or down arrow key to choose point and press ENTER.
  • Press right arrow to disable or enable point.
  • Inhibit Output Group Inhibiting an output group prevents the group from being utilized by system mapping. While inhibited, no event in the system can activate the output group.
  • Press 8 to inhibit output group.
  • Use the up or down arrow key to select the group to be inhibited.
  • Press right arrow to inhibit the group.
  • Press right arrow again to enable the group.
  • 9.3.3 View Event History Use the View Event History feature to display events on LCD. From the Main Menu, press 3 to select Event History. Events will begin dis- playing with most recent events first. The panel can store up to 1000 events. When it reaches its 1000-event capacity, it will delete the oldest events to make room for the new events as they occur. In networked setups, each panel stores up to 1000 of its own events. When using the HFSS Software Suite, all 1000 events from every panel in the network will be uploaded. On multi-site displays, pressing ENTER or right arrow brings you directly into View Event History and allows you to view the Event History from every panel in each of the sites that the multi-site display is assigned to. To clear the event history From the Installer menu select 1 for System Tests. From the test menu select 6 Clear History Buffer. Single Key Acknowledge This feature allows the user to press the ACK and display the oldest un-acknowledged event in the system. Pressing ACK again will acknowledge the event, then display the next oldest un-acknowledged event without pressing the arrow keys. To move through the menus: Use the up and down arrow key to move the cursor through the options in a menu. Use the left arrow key to move to a previous menu. To select an option: Enter the number of the option, or press ENTER if the option has the = symbol next to it. Exit Menu Press the left arrow.

    Note:

    The panel’s time is as accurate as the input AC power line frequency and may drift over time if the frequency fluctuates.

    Page 115

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 115 Basic Operation System Operation 9.3.4 Conduct a Fire Drill This system test initiates a Fire Drill alarm and activates Fire Drill mapping for 10 minutes or until a user manually exits the fire drill.

  • From the Main Menu, press 1 for System Tests.
  • Press 1 for Fire Drill. You will be prompted to press ENTER.
  • The drill will begin immediately after you press ENTER.
  • Press any key to end the drill. (If you do not press any key to end the fire drill manually, it will time out automatically after ten minutes.)
  • If a fire drill switch has been installed, activating the switch will begin the drill; deactivating the switch will end the drill. 9.3.5 Conduct an Indicator Test The indicator test checks the annunciator LEDs, PZT, and LCD display.
  • From the Main Menu, press 1 for System Tests.
  • Press 2 for Indicator Test. The system turns on each LED several times, beeping the PZT as it does so. At the same time it scrolls each
  • available character across the LCD. A problem is indicated if any of the following occurs: • An LED does not turn on • You do not hear a beep • All four lines of the LCD are not full This test will run for approximately 15 minutes or until the user manually exits. You can press any key to end manually while the test is still in progress. When the test ends, you will be returned to the Test Menu. 9.3.6 Conduct a Walk Test Walk Test is a feature which allows one person to test the fire alarm system. The Walk Test will run for 4 hours or until the user manually exits. If an alarm or pre-alarm condition is occurring in the system, you will not be able to enter the walk test. A walk test may only be initi- ated if the test is enabled in the user profile.
  • From the Main Menu, press 1 for System Tests.
  • Select 3 for Walk Test-No Report. The LCD will display “WALK TEST STOPPED” on Line 1 and “ENTER = start test” on Line 3.
  • Enter the time period you wish the NAC circuit to be active for each alarm (06 to 180 second), if you select this option, central station reporting will be disabled while the test is in progress. Select 4 for Walk Test-with Report. The LCD will display “WALK TEST STOPPED” on Line 1 and “ENTER = start test” on Line 3. Enter the time period you wish the NAC circuit to be active for each alarm (06 to 180 seconds) If you select this option, central station reporting will occur as normal during the walk test. The panel generates a TEST report to the central station when the walk test begins. During a walk test, the panel’s normal fire alarm function is completely disabled, placing the panel in a local trouble condition. All zones respond as 1-Count zones (respond when a single detector is in alarm) during a walk test. Each alarm initiated during the walk test will be reported and stored in the event history buffer.
  • Press ENTER to end the walk test. The system will reset. The panel will send a “TEST RESTORE” report to the central station.
  • If you do not end the walk test manually within four hours, it will end automatically. If there is an alarm or pre-alarm condition in the system, you will not be able to enter the walk test. 9.3.7 Conduct a Communicator Test
  • From the Main Menu, press 1 for System Tests.
  • Select 5 for Communicator Test. The screen will display “Manual communicator test started”. When the test is completed, you will be
  • returned to the Test Menu. A manual communicator test requires that at least one daily test in the network be enabled in communicator programming.
  • The Manual communicator test will be communicated out both Phone Lines and Ethernet/Cellular paths if they are all programmed.
  • Each manual communicator test will alternate between one of the Phone Line paths and one of the AlarmNet paths. 9.3.8 Manual AlarmNet Registration
  • From the Main Menu, press 1 for System Tests.
  • Select 8 for Register AlarmNet. The screen will display and ask for confirmation. Feedback will be given if the command was sent or
  • not. 9.3.9 Silence Alarms or Troubles Press SILENCE to turn off silenceable outputs and annunciator PZTs. If an external silence switch has been installed, activating the switch will silence alarms or troubles. If you are already using system menus when you press SILENCE, you will not need to enter your code. !

    Caution: Alarm Verification

    IF ANY ALARM VERIFICATION ZONES ARE BEING USED, THE USER WILL BE ASKED IF THEY WISH TO DISABLE

    Alarm Verification During Walk Test. This Occurs For Either Walk Test Option.

    Note:

    The panel does not do a full 30 second reset on resettable power outputs. As soon as the device is back to normal, the panel is ready to go to the next device.

    Note:

    Alarm and trouble signals that have been silenced, but the detector remains un-restored, will resound every 4 or 24 hours depending on user selection until the detector is restored. Refer to “Auto-Resound (4 or 24 hours)” on page 94.

    Page 116

    116 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 System Operation Basic Operation 9.3.10 Reset Alarms Press RESET to perform a control panel reset. If an external reset switch has been installed, activating the switch will reset fire alarms. Reset Communicator This option allows the user to Reset the Communicator. The LCD will display: “Resetting Communicator… Please Wait“ You will be returned to the Main Menu when the reset is complete. The Communicator is not allowed to be reset when alarms or supervisories are active. Communicator Reset is not allowed if any of the fol- lowing are active: • Fire Alarm • Fire Supervisory • Fire Pre-Alarm • CO Alarm • CO Supervisory • EVS Alarm • EVS Supervisory 9.3.11 Check Detector Sensitivity Through Point Status The control panel constantly monitors smoke detectors to ensure that sensitivity levels are in compliance with NFPA 72. Detectors are sam- pled every three hours. If sensitivity for a detector is not in compliance, the panel goes into trouble, generating a Calibration Trouble condition. A detector enters a Calibration Maintenance state to indicate that it is approaching an out of compliance condition (but is currently still in compliance). When a Calibration Trouble condition occurs, the central station receives a detector trouble report (“373” + Zone # for Contact ID format; “FT” + Zone # in SIA format). To check sensitivity for an individual detector, follow the steps below.

  • From the Main Menu, press 2 for Point Functions.
  • Press 2 for Point Status.
  • Select the module where the point you want to check is located.
  • Enter the number of the point you want to check and press ENTER.
  • Note:

    Multi-site displays do not allow for silencing multiple sites. Pressing SILENCE will only locally silence the PZT built into the annunciator.

    Note:

    For EVS systems, pressing silence at an LOC will only silence the system in control. See Section 9.4.1.

    Note:

    Multi-Site displays do not reset multiple sites.

    Note:

    For EVS Systems, pressing reset at an LOC will prompt the user for which system they want to reset. See Section 9.4.1.

    Page 117

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 117 Basic Operation System Operation A screen similar to those shown below will display.

    Smoke Photo 2.5%

    Module_33 Point_4

    [Z001] [M33:004] A058

    Normal >=More

    Example of detector in compliance Example of detector not in compliance

    Atl=151 (2.5% Ob/Ft)

    Aca=057 M=093 T=109

    Clear Air = 058 (01%) Peak-061 (04%) >=HLP

    Smoke Photo ---%

    Module_33 Point_4

    [Z001] [M33:004] A058

    Cal Trble >=More

    Atl=151 (2.5% Ob/Ft)

    Aca=057 M=093 T=109

    Clear Air = 058 (01%) Peak-061 (04%) >=HLP ATL=Alarm Threshold ACA=Average Clr Air M=Maint Threshold T=Trouble Threshold

    Co Smoke 2.0%

    Module_33 Sensor_4

    [Z001] [M33:004] Axxx

    Sensitivity = 2.0% CO= xxx ppm detector ID detector state percent obscurity per foot Possible states:
  • NORMAL: detector sensitivity in compliance with UL and not in alarm
  • ALARM: detector in alarm
  • CAL MAINT: detector needs maintenance, but not yet in trouble
  • CAL TRBLE: detector not in compliance with NFPA72
  • (Other trouble states could override this message.) Example of CO detector in compliance detector ID percent obscurity per foot blanks indicate detector not in compliance detector state current value Figure 9.5 Checking Detector Sensitivity Compliance on 6820

    Page 118

    118 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 System Operation Basic Operation You can print the detector status by uploading the detector status to, and printing from the HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite. 9.3.12 View Status of a Point

  • From the Main Menu, press 2 for Point Status.
  • From the list that displays, press ENTER to select the module where this point is located. Next, enter the point to display. The screen
  • that displays will show you if the point has a trouble and will provide sensitivity compliance information. (See Section 9.3.11 for complete information about detector sensitivity compliance.) 9.3.13 View Alarms or Troubles When the system is in alarm or trouble, you can press down arrow to view the location of an alarm or trouble. 9.3.14 System Information From the Main Menu, press 8 to access the System Information menu. About the Panel Press 1 to access About Panel to view the panel model, serial number, system version number, and date. Send/Receive Firmware Updates site, www.silentknight.com. Once a panel has been updated using the Firmware Update Utility, you can use Send/Receive firmware updates to propagate the firmware to the other panels in the network.
  • Press 2 to send a firmware update or press 3 to receive a firmware update from the System Information menu. Available panels are
  • listed in the menu.
  • Use the up or down arrow key to select a panel to send/receive an update to/from. Press ENTER to start the update process.
  • Alarm Threshold=169 (3.5% ob/ft) Maint Threshold=083 Trble Threshold=094 Clear Air=058 (01%) Avg Clear Air=056 Peak=059 (02%) Det-Photo 3.5% ob/ft

    Module_97 Point_101

    [Z001] [M97:P_101] Clean Air = 059 NORMAL >= MORE Sensitivity = 2.0% CO = xxx ppm

    Co Smoke 2.0%

    Module_33 Sensor_4

    [Z001] [M33:004] Axxx

    Alarm Threshold=169 (___% ob/ft) Maint Threshold=083 Trble Threshold=094 Clear Air=058 (01%) Avg Clear Air=056 Peak=059 (02%) Det-Photo ___% ob/ft

    Module_97 Point_101

    [Z001] [M97:P_101] A058

    Cal Trble >= More

    Example of detector in compliance detector ID detector state percent obscurity per foot Possible states:
  • NORMAL: detector sensitivity in compliance with UL and not in alarm
  • ALARM: detector in alarm
  • CAL MAINT: detector needs maintenance, but not yet in trouble
  • CAL TRBLE: detector not in compliance with NFPA72
  • (Other trouble states could override this message.) Example of CO detector in compliance percent obscurity per foot detector ID Example of detector not in compliance blanks indicate detector not in compliance detector state current value Figure 9.6 Checking Detector Sensitivity Compliance on 6820EVS

    Page 119

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 119 Event Priority System Operation Ethernet Info Press 5 from the System Information menu for Ethernet Information. AlarmNet Info Press 6 from the System Information menu for AlarmNet Info. • Cell Strength: 0 to 100% • Status: Registered/Not Registered AlarmNet Temporary PIN Press 7 from the System Information menu to enter an AlarmNet Temporary PIN. This is issued by AlarmNet to register a new panel in case the existing FACP is ever replaced. 9.4 Event Priority This section describes how the event activations are handled by the control panel with regards to priority. 9.4.1 System Control The 820EVS control panel integrates both a fire and emergency system into one. When events are active from both systems the control panel makes intelligent decisions to determine which system should be controlling outputs. This is called System Control. This manual will refer to the fire or emergency systems having System Control, this means that the system has an active alarm or supervisory event that has a higher event priority than an active alarm or supervisory event from the other system. For this consideration, the control panel looks at the highest priority event active on each system. When both systems are active, the system with control will activate System Override. System Override is activated on the lower priority, non-System Control panel system (fire or emergency system.) 9.4.2 System Override System Override temporarily disengages output group activations from the system being overridden. This is done to not provide conflicting messages and signaling and help with reducing confusion of the building occupants. When output groups are supposed to be active but are not because System Control has activated System Override, they are re-activated every 30 seconds for 2-3 seconds to indicate to the building occupants that there is still an event active. This will only occur when the system with System Control is not using the output group. The System Override option is programmable for non-voice output groups on a per output group basis through the panel output group programming menus and in HFSS. In these places the option is called Allow System Override and defaults to YES. It is also possible to not reactivate the output groups every 30 seconds when System Override is active on a per system basis. This option is programmable in HFSS. There are times when you would not want to allow System Override for an output group. For example: fire is programmed to an elevator relay to bring the elevator to the bottom floor for fire only. If fire and EVS are active with EVS being the higher priority event, you still need the elevator to move to the bottom floor and only audible and visual notification appliances must be overridden. In this case, the output group assigned to the relay would be set to NO on the Allow System Override setting. See Section 8.4.1 to edit group properties. 9.4.3 Event Priority Each event type (see Table 9.3) has a priority level assigned to it. When more than one event type is active, the panel uses the Event Priority Table to determine which event mapping to use to control output groups. The Event Priority Table can be modified using HFSS. It is strongly recommended that before each installation a risk analysis is done by the stake holders (property owners, AHJ, occupants, etc…) to determine which events take precedence over others. The Emergency LOC Alarm entry in the Event Priority Table encompasses all EVS Alarm Events that can be activated from an LOC (LOC Mic Triggered EVS Alarm and LOC EVS 1 Alarm through LOC EVS 8 Alarm). By default, these events do not have a priority - they can be activated in any order. A programming option in HFSS exists to force a priority scheme for the LOC EVS Alarm Events. When this option is enabled, the lower numbered the EVS event is, the higher priority it has (e.g. LOC EVS 1 Alarm is higher priority than LOC EVS 8 Alarm). With this priority scheme, once a higher priority EVS Event has been activated, an EVS reset must be performed before a lower priority EVS Event can be activated. The Event Priority Table contains the following events for modification.

    Mac:00D0.2D73.489C

    Ip:000.000.000.000

    DHCP: Y Next Sub: 000.000.000.000

    Gw: 000.000.000.000

    Back MAC CRC:0000 Fire System Emergency System Fire Manual Pull Alarm Emergency LOC Alarm Fire Detector Alarm Emergency 1 Point Alarm Fire Water Flow Alarm Emergency 2 Point Alarm Fire Interlock Release Alarm Emergency 3 Point Alarm Fire Zone Aux 1 Alarm Emergency 4 Point Alarm Fire Zone Aux 2 Alarm Emergency 5 Point Alarm Table 9.3 Event Priority

    Page 120

    120 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 System Operation Operation Mode Behavior 9.4.4 Priority Rules

  • Event priorities can be changed only within, not between, priority levels (defined by bold lines in Table 9.3).
  • Emergency LOC Alarm must always higher than Emergency 1-8 Point Alarm and Emergency Voice Aux 1-4 Alarm.
  • EVS events do not need to be in order by EVS number.
  • 9.4.5 Other Priority Considerations There are other considerations to take into account when the same event is acting on the same output group (an event being mapped to an output group.) These are prioritized in order of appearance. • For voice system utilizing dual channel, normal mapping takes priority over alert mapping. Example: Zone 1 Manual Pull is mapped to Voice Group 1 as an Alert 1 mapping and Zone 2 Manual Pull is mapped to Voice Group 1 as a normal mapping. If Zone 1 and Zone 2 Manual Pull events are active, Voice Group 1 will annunciate the Fire Alarm message defined in the Voice Settings for the panel's assigned site. • Event priority is considered here based on the Event Priority Table above. • If an output group is mapped both directly and through an output group template to an event, the direct map gets priority. Example: Template 1 Contains Group 1. Zone 1 Manual Pull is mapped to Template 1 and Group 1 using constant and ANSI patterns respectively. If Zone 1 Manual Pull is active, Group 1 will output ANSI. • When an event is mapped to an output group from multiple zones, the lower numbered zone gets priority. Example: Zone 1 Manual Pull and Zone 2 Manual Pull are mapped to Group 1 using constant and ANSI patterns respectively. If Zone 1 and Zone 2 Manual Pull events are active, Group 1 will output constant. 9.5 Operation Mode Behavior The control panel can be in one or more of seven conditions at any given moment: Normal, Alarm, Pre-alarm, Supervisory, Trouble, Silenced, and Reset. Table 9.4 describes the behavior of the panel in each of these modes. When looking at the LCD, the screen will display FIRE for the “Fire System”, or CO for the “CO System”. The highest priority event will display first and include the event count (see the figure below). Press the down arrow to view the location and type of alarm supervisory or trouble. If the panel is programmed to Auto Display Event, infor- mation describing the highest priority active event will display on the first two lines. Fire System Aux 1 Alarm Emergency 6 Point Alarm Fire System Aux 2 Alarm Emergency 7 Point Alarm Emergency 8 Point Alarm Emergency Voice Aux 1 Alarm Emergency Voice Aux 2 Alarm Emergency Voice Aux 3 Alarm Emergency Voice Aux 4 Alarm CO Alarm Fire Pre-Alarm Fire Interlock Alert Emergency Supervisory Fire Supervisory CO Supervisory Trouble Site F Key Status System Status Table 9.3 Event Priority

    Note:

    Status Points, Status Voice Aux 1, Status Voice Aux 2, and Background Music are contained within the System Status event priority. All fire, emergency, and system troubles are prioritized into the Trouble Event Priority.

    Fire: Alrm Supr

    Co: Alrm Supr

    Figure 9.7 Highest Priority Event Display

    Page 121

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 121 Operation Mode Behavior System Operation Operating Mode Occurs When System Behavior In This Mode You Can Normal No alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition exists and menus are not in use. SYSTEM POWER LED is on. The All Systems Normal display indicates that the system is in normal mode. The current date and time display on the last line of the LCD. Enter the appropriate code, or rotate the key to activate the Main Menu. Alarm A smoke detector goes into alarm or a pull station is activated. CO detector goes into alarm. If more than 3 categories are active at a single time, the screen will display as shown. The system will report events to the central station. The onboard annunciator will sound loud, steady beeps to distinguish alarm signals. For a fire alarm, the sequence is a loud steady beep.(Any notification devices attached to the system will also sound). For an EVS Alarm, the sequence is four seconds on, one second off. The GENERAL ALARM LED flashes. The LCD displays a screen similar to this one. Pressing the right arrow key or Info will display the location macro, date/time stamp, and site/panel number if applicable. Pressing the down arrow key to view the type and location of alarm. (Message will alternate with the date/time display.) Press the down arrow to view the alarm. A screen similar to this one displays. Press SILENCE and enter an Access Code (or activate the key) to silence the annunciator (and any notification devices attached to the system). When the alarm condition clears, press RESET and enter a code (or activate the key) to restore the panel to normal. Table 9.4 Panel Operating Modes Site 1 Model 6820

    All Systems Normal

    08/03/21 01:45:52Pm

    Fire: Alrm

    Waterflow SW Zone_1 1 of 1 Info> Site 1

    Co Alrm

    [Press for status]

    Fire: Alrm Supr Trbl

    Co: Alrm Supr

    Sys: Trbl

    Alarm: Man_Pull

    Module_33 Point_2

    Zone_2

    3 of 5 device type showing 3 of 5 events

    Page 122

    122 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 System Operation Operation Mode Behavior Supervisory The system detects a supervisory condition. A Supervisory with a CO detector. The system will report events to the central station. The onboard annunciator sounds a loud, pulsing beep to distinguish supervisory signals. For fire supervisory signals, the sequence is one second on, one second off. For EVS supervisory signals, the sequence is two seconds on, three seconds off. The SUPERVISORY LED flashes. The LCD displays a screen similar to this one. Pressing the right arrow key or Info to display the location macro, date/time stamp, and site/panel, if applicable. Press the right arrow key or Info to view the type and location of the Supervisory event. The message will alternate with the time/date display. Press the down arrow to view the fire supervisory condition. A screen similar to this one displays. Press SILENCE and enter an Access Code (or activate the key) to silence the annunciator. Once the supervisory condition has been corrected, the system will restore automatically. Trouble A system trouble condition occurs. A trouble condition with a CO detector The system will report events to the central station. The onboard annunciator sounds a loud, pulsing beep in the sequence one second on, nine seconds off. The SYSTEM TROUBLE LED flashes. The LCD displays a screen similar to this one. Press the right arrow key or Info to display the location macro, date/time stamp, and site/panel, if applicable. Press the right arrow key or Info to view the type and location of the Trouble event. The message will alternate with the time/date display. Press down arrow to view the fire trouble. A screen similar to this one displays. Press SILENCE to silence the annunciator. Once the trouble condition has been fixed, the system will restore itself automatically. Pre-alarm A single detector trips in a 2-Count zone. (2-Count means two detectors must trip before an alarm is reported.) The touchpad piezo beeps. The LCD displays a screen similar to this one. Press the right arrow key or Info to display the location macro, date/time stamp, and site/panel, if applicable. Press down arrow to view the Prealarm. A screen similar to this one displays. All system operations are available in this mode. Operating Mode Occurs When System Behavior In This Mode You Can Table 9.4 Panel Operating Modes (Continued)

    Fire: Supervisory

    Supervisory Sw

    Sbus_97 Module_2

    1 of 1 Info> Site 1

    Co: Supr

    [Press for status]

    Supervsy: Man_Pull

    Module_33 Point_2

    [Z002] [M33]

    1 of 1 device type showing 1 of 1 event

    Fire: Trouble

    1 of 1 Info> Site 1

    Co: Trouble

    [Press for status] TROUBLE: CO Smoke

    Sbus_33 Sensor_2

    [Z002] [M33:S002]

    Missing 5 of 8 showing 5 of 8 events device type module/ point zone # In this case, the panel does not see a detector that should be on the loop. trouble type

    Fire: Prealarm

    Det-Photo

    Sbus_97 Sensor_33

    1 of 1 Info>

    Prealarm:Smoke-Phot

    Module_33 Point_2

    [Z002] [M33]

    1 of 1 device type showing 1 of 1 event

    Page 123

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 123 Releasing Operations System Operation 9.5.1 Multi-Site Annunciator and Multi-Site User Access Multi-site annunciators are unique as they can display the status and event history of all sites they are assigned to. These displays can be especially useful in guard shacks or security centers. A multi-site display is indicated by the words “Multi-Site Display” at the top of the idle screen. • The F-Macro keys are disabled until a multi-site user access code has been entered and a specific site has been selected. • Multi-site Annunciator silencing rules: – If any new troubles, supervisory, pre-alarms, or alarms are triggered in any assigned sites, Locally Silenced annunciator will resound. – If a multi-site annunciator is locally silenced for 4 or 24 hours depending on user selection (see “Auto-Resound (4 or 24 hours)” on page 107), the locally silenced annunciator will resound. • The 6820 Menu System is disabled on a multi-site annunciator. Pressing the Right or Enter keys will bring you straight into event history for assigned sites. To get into the menu system, a multi-site user password must be entered and then a site must be selected from the site selection menu. Once this is done you will have access to the idle screen of that site and the annunciator will temporarily act like a single site annunciator. • A multi-site annunciator will sound the highest priority tone from the sites it is assigned to. A multi-site display is created in Module programming in the edit properties menu for an annunciator. See Section 8.2.1. An annunciator cannot be programmed as a multi-site display when it is associated with an EVS-VCM or EVS-RVM in an EVS system. 9.6 Releasing Operations The control panel supports two types of releasing: Double Interlock Zone and Single Interlock Zone. The Double Interlock Zone operation requires an interlock switch input in the system, and the Single Interlock Zone does not. An interlock switch is typically a dry-contact pres- sure switch. When Single or Double Interlock Zone releasing is selected using HFSS, the software suite will automatically default the following system parameters. Defaults can be modified through programming. • Output Group 2 is created. Output Group 2 will be defaulted as a “Detector Alarm” output group for all releasing zones. NAC [98:001] is assigned to Output Group 2. • Output Group 3 is created. Output Group 3 will be defaulted as a “Interlock Release Alert” output group for all releasing zones. NAC [98:002] is assigned to Output Group 3. • Output Group 4 is created. Output Group 4 will be defaulted as “Interlock Release Alarm” output group for all releasing zones. NAC circuit [98:003] is assigned to Output Group 4. Reset The RESET button is pressed followed by a valid code, if necessary. All LEDs are on briefly then the LCD displays “RESET IN PROGRESS”. If the reset process completes normally, the date and time normal mode screen displays. Menus are not available during the reset process. Silenced An alarm or trouble condition has been silenced but still exists. To silence alarms and troubles, press SILENCE followed by the Installer or User Code, if necessary. The SYSTEM SILENCE LED is on. The SYSTEM TROUBLE, SUPERVISORY, and/or GENERAL ALARM LED (depending on condition) is on. The annunciator (and any notification devices attached to the system) will be silenced. Press down arrow to view the location of the alarm, supervisory, or trouble. When the condition no longer exists, the SYSTEM SILENCED and SYSTEM TROUBLE LED, SUPERVISORY and/or GENERAL ALARM LEDs turn off. Operating Mode Occurs When System Behavior In This Mode You Can Table 9.4 Panel Operating Modes (Continued)

    Note:

    A multi-site display is created in Module programming in the edit properties menu for an annunciator. See Section 8.2.1.

    Note:

    The installer must define which input points will be used for detectors, manual release switches, or interlock/pressure switches. For manual release operation, Installer must use an FM approved/ UL listed releasing manual station

    Note:

    For manual release operations, an FM approved/ UL listed releasing manual station must be used. Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for approved releasing devices.

    Page 124

    124 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 System Operation Releasing Operations . 9.6.1 Single Interlock Zone Releasing A single interlock zone utilizes a minimum of two addressable detectors and a designated manual release switch. Conditions Required for a Pre-Alert Output Activation If any single addressable detector is activated, the “Pre-Alert” output will activate. This alerts the user that the initial stages required for a release condition are present. (Refer to Table 9.5). Conditions Required for a General Alarm and Release Output Activation If two or more addressable detectors, or a manual release switch activate, the “Alarm” and “Release” outputs will activate and the “Pre- Alarm” output will deactivate. (Refer to Table 9.5 below.) 9.6.2 Double Interlock Zone Releasing A Double Interlock Zone uses a minimum of two addressable detectors, a designated manual release switch, and an interlock switch input. An interlock switch is typically a dry-contact pressure switch and will be referred to as an interlock/pressure switch in this document. Only addressable detectors can be used. No conventional detectors can be used. Conditions Required for a Pre-Alert Output Activation If any single addressable detector is activated, the “Pre-Alert” output will activate. This alerts the user that the initial stages required for a release condition are present. (Refer to Table 9.6.) Conditions Required for a General Alarm Output Activation If two addressable detectors, a manual release switch is activated, or an interlock switch is active, the “Pre-Alert” and “General Alarm” out- puts will activate. + – Either NAC circuit can be used. UL-listed solenoid supervisory module- must be located at the solenoid. releasing solenoid Use 1 solenoid per circuit. red black Figure 9.8 Wiring Configuration for Solenoid

    Note:

    For releasing operations, a manual releasing disconnect switch is required per UL 864. Refer to the MRD-1H Series Document for installation instructions. !

    Caution: Addressable Detectors/Manual Release Switch

    ONLY ADDRESSABLE DETECTORS CAN BE USED. NO CONVENTIONAL DETECTORS CAN BE USED. EACH SINGLE

    Interlock Zone Input Requires At Least One Manual Release Switch.

    Inputs Output Results 1st Addressable Detector

    X

    X

    X

    X

    2nd Addressable Detector

    X

    X

    X

    X

    Manual Release Station

    X

    X

    X

    X

    Normal Pre-Alert Release and General Alarm Table 9.5 Single Interlock Zone Operation !

    Caution: Detector Spacing

    DETECTORS MUST BE INSTALLED AT 0.7 TIMES THE LINEAR SPACING AS DESCRIBED IN NFPA 72

    Page 125

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 125 Smoke Alarm Verification System Operation Conditions Required for a Release Output Activation Any release requires the activation of an interlock switch, and either a manual release switch or 2 activated addressable detectors. When these conditions are met, the “Release” and “General Alarm” outputs will activate, and the “Pre-Alert” outputs will deactivate. 9.7 Smoke Alarm Verification Figure 9.9 illustrates how the Smoke Alarm Verification cycle operates. During the Confirmation Period if there is no alarm indication then the system will return to normal operation. 9.8 Function Keys The function keys on the 6820EVS or 6860 only have multiple features. Their macro key functionality can simplify the disabling, activating, or inhibiting points or groups respectively. They can also be used as a status type activation event and for activating Map Inhibit. Each F-Key macro can hold 50 events. To access the F-Key Recording menu:

  • From the idle screen, press and hold the F-Key for 5 seconds.
  • Enter a PIN with F-Key macro recording privileges, if prompted.
  • 9.8.1 Recording an F-Key Macro
  • Access the F-Key Recording menu and select the ‘Start FKEY Recording’ option.
  • The panel will return to the idle screen. Notice the 4th line on the display now alternates with “F# Key Recording”, where # is the
  • number of the F-Key being recorded.
  • Any Disabling or Activating of points, output groups, or templates from the site at this point will be programmed into the macro. Do
  • this by going to any annunciator within the site and entering Main Menu > Point Functions and use Disable/Enable Point or use I/O Point Control to: disable output groups or individual points, or activate individual points.
  • Once you are finished with disabling or activating points/output groups, enter the F-Key Recording Menu again and select the ‘End F-
  • KEY Recording’ option.
  • The panel will return to the idle screen.
  • 9.8.2 Aborting an F-Key Macro Recording Session
  • After an F-Key macro recording session has been started, the session can be canceled at any time by accessing the F-Key Recording
  • menu and selecting ‘Abort F-KEY Recording’ option.
  • The panel will return to the idle screen.
  • 9.8.3 Erasing an F-Key Macro
  • If an F-Key macro has already been recorded, you can erase it by accessing the F-Key Recording menu and selecting the ‘Erase F-KEY
  • Macro’ option.
  • The panel will return to the idle screen.
  • Inputs Output Results 1st Addressable Detector

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    2nd Addressable Detector

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    Manual Release Station

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    Interlock/Pressure Switch

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    Normal Pre-Alert Pre-Alert and General Alarm Pre-Alert and General Alarm Table 9.6 Double Interlock Zone Operation !

    Caution: Detector Spacing

    DETECTORS MUST BE INSTALLED AT 0.7 TIMES THE LINEAR SPACING AS DESCRIBED IN NFPA 72 reset period 12 seconds restart period 16 seconds confirmation period 60-250 seconds (programmable) Figure 9.9 Smoke Verification Cycle

    Page 126

    126 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 System Operation Function Keys 9.8.4 Using a Recorded F-Key Macro

  • From the idle screen on any annunciator in the site, press the F-Key you want to activate.
  • Once finished, to deactivate the macro press the F-Key again.
  • 9.8.5 F-Key Status Event When an F-Key is enabled, it activates its corresponding F-Key Active event. This is a status type event that can activate outputs without showing any status on annunciator displays. This should be used for ancillary purposes only. 9.8.6 F-Key Map Inhibit The F-Keys have the ability to disable event - output group mapping for the purpose of simulating that the map doesn’t exist. This can be setup to allow for testing purposes where notification of an entire building is not desired during the test. This option is programmable for each output group map through HFSS. When an F-Key is active and a map in the system is set to be disable by Map Inhibit, the system will show a trouble event indicating it as such.

    Page 127

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 127 Section 10: Emergency Voice System Operation 10.1 Overview The 6820EVS control panel and accessories provides features to meet the requirements for a Mass Notification Systems as described in NFPA 72 and is compliant with the UL 2572 standard. The EVS (Emergency Voice System) is integrated with the fire alarm and voice evac- uation functions of the control panel. In a networked panel system, only one panel can be chosen to be the voice evacuation/EVS panel for the site. There are two ways for activating EVS in the 6820EVS panel: EVS Point Activations EVS Point Activation involves using pre-determined EVS Alarm input points to activate EVS Alarm events. These events cause output areas to activate based on mapping that is programmed into the system at installation. This is very similar to the tradi- tional mapping that the fire system has utilized to date. Manual LOC Activations Manual LOC Activation involves using the LOC EVS interface to activate EVS Events, choose output areas, and speak through a microphone. These selections are not pre-determined and allow the user to make system functionality decisions when the event is actually happening. This requires the activation of Manual EVS State which bypasses EVS Point Activations. See Section 10.2.3. 10.2 LOC Functionality An LOC (Local Operating Console) consists of either the EVS series panel (EVS-VCM Voice Control Module and the Fire Alarm Control Panel) or the EVS-LOC (EVS-RVM Remote Voice Module and its associated 6860 keypad.) An LOC is created by adding an EVS-VCM or EVS-RVM to the system and associating a keypad to it. The LOC provides eight buttons for activating the EVS messages, a button to gain and request EVS Control, and a microphone for live paging. There can be up to 16 LOC devices in the system. In a networked panel system, all of the LOCs must be connected through SBUS to the panel that includes the EVS-VCM. 10.2.1 Keys and LEDs This section outlines the functionality of the keys and LEDs on the EVS-VCM and EVS-RVM expander modules. EVS Control Key Pressing the EVS Control Key will do one of two things:

  • Enter Message Mode of the LOC EVS interface (including trying to gain EVS Control if the user doesn't have it already).
  • Relinquish EVS Control if pressed while in Message Mode.
  • EVS Control LED The EVS Control LED is used to indicate the status of EVS Control in the system. When the LED is on solid, the LOC has EVS Control within the system. When the LED is blinking, another LOC has gained EVS Control in the system. EVS Message Keys EVS Message Keys are used in Message Mode to select which EVS Message is to be played. If pressed when the LOC does not have EVS Control, the system will automatically try to gain EVS Control before allowing the EVS Event to be activated. See Section 10.2.2. EVS Message LEDs The red EVS Message LEDs indicate the active EVS Message and any previously active EVS messages. The green LEDs indicate the EVS Message was selected in message mode and that the LOC has EVS control.
  • For EVS Point Activation, the red EVS Message LEDs will illuminate on each LOC to indicate which EVS messages have been
  • activated in automatic EVS state.
  • In Manual EVS State, the red EVS Message LEDs will indicate which EVS message has been activated at an LOC. See Section 10.2.3.
  • The green EVS Message LEDs will activate for the LOC that activated the EVS Message.
  • Select Keys The Select Keys are used to toggle which output areas are active.
  • If Message Mode is active (see Section 10.2.5), the Select Keys will activate output which areas for the active message to be played in
  • (also activates the red Select Key LED).
  • If Fire Page Mode is active (see Section 10.2.5), the Select Keys will toggle which areas the microphone audio is distributed to (also
  • toggles the green Select Key LED). Select Key LEDs The Select Key LEDs are used to indicate which output areas are active for a microphone page or system events. • Green LEDs: active areas for microphone paging. • Red LEDs: active areas for system events.

    Note:

    For LOC-activated emergency alarm events, if an area is programmed through mapping to be active, that area is automatically selected and can not be deactivated using the Select Keys.

    Note:

    These are only active when the microphone PTT (push-to-talk) is engaged.

    Page 128

    128 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Emergency Voice System Operation LOC Functionality 10.2.2 Gaining EVS Control When attempting to gain EVS Control, there are three things that govern whether or not EVS Control can be obtained:

  • LOC Priority.
  • LOC Lockout.
  • User profile access control.
  • LOC Priority LOCs are assigned (through panel or HFSS programming of the EVS-VCM and EVS-RVM) an LOC priority of low, normal, or high. LOCs with a higher priority are always able to gain control from a lower priority LOC. LOC Lockout When LOCs are programmed to the same priority, the setting LOC lockout applies. LOC lockout will not allow an LOC to gain EVS Control from the LOC with EVS Control until one of three things happen:
  • The LOC lockout timer expires. Once the LOC lockout timer expires, an attempt to gain EVS Control can be made again.
  • The user at the second LOC requests EVS Control from the LOC with EVS Control and that LOC grants the request. (See Section
  • 10.2.7). If the EVS lockout timer expires while an EVS Control request is in progress, the system will automatically pass EVS Control to the requesting LOC.
  • The user at the second LOC enters an access code with the EVS Super User profile option.
  • The LOC lockout timer can be set between immediate and 12 hours in increments of 1 second or it can be set to never expire. The default set- ting is 30 seconds. The LOC lockout timer is restarted upon any key press at the LOC with EVS control. The LOC lockout timer is cleared when EVS Control is relinquished. User Profile Access Control The user will need to enter an access code containing the EVS Control Request or EVS Super User profile option to gain EVS Control. EVS Control Request and EVS Super User profile options will be mutually exclusive to the system. If the access code has EVS Super User, the EVS Control Request is ignored and activations by that user are always as EVS Super User. 10.2.3 Manual EVS After gaining EVS Control the system enters the LOC EVS interface which allows you to activate the Emergency System and allows for Emergency Paging. Once an emergency event has been activated the panel enters a Manual EVS State. In this state, all EVS Alarm pro- grammed points that are currently in alarm in the system are changed to an active state. The display status screen reflects this when viewing the system for status. Any outputs that were activated by the EVS Alarm programmed points are deactivated until Manual EVS state is

    All Call

    Ecs Control

    Non-Active

    Call

    Ready

    To Talk

    Figure 10.1 Front View of EVS Keypad All Call button Ready To Talk LED Non-Active Call button EVS Control

    Led

    EVS Control button output group select buttons EVS message 1-8 activate buttons EVS status/ alarm LEDs

    Note:

    The lockout timer must be programmed to expire sometime other than Never.

    Page 129

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 129 LOC Functionality Emergency Voice System Operation exited. Only an EVS Reset can exit the Manual EVS State. If a user gains EVS Control at an LOC and does not activate an EVS message, the system will automatically generate an EVS Supervisory indicating such. This prevents an LOC from being in an undesired state of EVS Con- trol when an actual event emerges. There are two modes for interacting with the LOC EVS interface when in Manual EVS State: • Message Mode • Fire Page Mode These two modes allow you to quickly toggle areas of output for a desired message or to speak to a microphone for EVS Paging. After gaining EVS Control, the system is in Fire Page Mode of the Manual EVS State. Switching between Fire Page Mode and Message Mode At any time while in EVS Control, you can switch between Fire Page Mode and Message Mode. Fire Page Mode is entered by simply engag- ing the microphone.

  • Message Mode: Use the EVS Message keys to toggle which message/event to output to the system. Use the Select Keys to toggle output
  • areas to play the current EVS Message in. The Select Key's red LED will toggle on/off with the activation/deactivation of the area is now receiving the message. Any non-voice groups assigned to this Select Key will also toggle with their Activation Cadence. See SectionActivating Output Groups Dynamically.
  • Fire Page Mode: Use the Select Keys while the microphone is active to toggle which areas to do an EVS Microphone Page to. The
  • Select Key's green LED will toggle on/off with the activation/deactivation of the EVS Microphone Page to the area. Activating Output Groups Dynamically This method allows the system to be setup with minimal or no system mapping. When in Manual EVS State and operating in Message Mode the user can dynamically activate/deactivate output areas for system notification to take place in. The Select Key red LED will become lit and the circuits in the output group(s) will become active and play the currently active EVS event message when activated. When deacti- vated, the Select Key red LED will become unlit and the circuits in the output group(s) will become inactive. Non-voice output groups can also be assigned to Select Keys and will toggle on/off using the activation cadence assigned to it in output group programming. This is avail- able in the panel and in HFSS. Refer to Section 8.4.1 for information on editing groups. 10.2.4 Fire Page Mode Fire Page Mode allows the user to press the Select Keys to toggle which output areas to speak to over the microphone. The green LEDs next to the Select Keys will activate or deactivate. When Fire is set to higher priority than EVS in user programming, and NACs are active due to a release alarm, EVS functions and the micro- phone will be disabled. In this instance, NACs take higher priority over EVS messages. The screen will display the following. 10.2.5 Message Mode In Message Mode, the user is able to press the EVS message Keys to choose a message and press the Select Keys to activate or deactivate which output areas the message will be played. This will activate or deactivate the green and red LEDs next to the EVS Message Keys and the red LEDs next to the Select Keys.

    Fire Page Mode

    SELECT KEYS: Toggle Output Areas Microphone Active Release Microphone for MESSAGE MODE

    Fire Page Mode

    Fire Alarm Priority Higher than EVS Microphone and SELECT KETS Disabled MESSAGE Disabled for MESSAGE MODE

    Message Mode

    ECS MESSAGE KEYS: Choose Message SELECT KEYS: Toggle Output Areas Engage Microphone for FIRE PAGE MODE

    Page 130

    130 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Emergency Voice System Operation LOC Functionality When Fire is set to higher priority than EVS in user programming, and NACs are active due to a release alarm, EVS functions and the micro- phone will be disabled. In this instance, NACs take higher priority over EVS messages. The screen will display the following. 10.2.6 Custom EVS Event Custom EVS events allows the user to generate an EVS event and speak a custom message using the microphone. Once the user is done speaking the message, the tone and any associated strobes will continue to be active in the output areas. To generate a Custom EVS Event:

  • Gain EVS Control using the EVS Control Key when there is not an EVS Event active.
  • Activate the microphone.
  • Choose desired output areas using the Select Keys.
  • Speak custom message into microphone.
  • 10.2.7 Passing EVS Control Passing of EVS Control is allowed when two LOC units have the same priority. When it is possible to pass control, a prompt (similar to Figure 10.2) will display in which the user can request control from the LOC with EVS Control, enter an access code with the EVS Super User profile option to override the other LOC, or wait for the lockout timer to expire (if applicable). When passing EVS Control between two EVS Super Users, the user is not shown the prompt screen. Instead, a request for EVS Control is automatically made. Additionally, the lockout timer does not apply for EVS Super User. When a request for EVS Control is made, the LOC with EVS Control will be shown a screen (similar to Figure 10.3), even when in another menu, except programming menus, indicating that another LOC is requesting EVS Control. The piezo buzzer on the LOC with EVS Control sound when an EVS Control request is active to alert a nearby operator of the request. Once EVS Control is passed to another LOC, the new user will assume the system AS IS. This means that the event that was set to be playing at the previous LOC and all output areas it was playing in do not change. 10.2.8 Exit EVS Control Menu The user can exit the LOC EVS interface by pressing the left arrow key. The user will be returned to the idle screen which indicates that the LOC still has EVS control.

    Message Mode

    Fire Alarm Priority Higher than EVS MESSAGE and SELECT KETS Disabled Microphone Disabled for FIRE PAGE MODE

    Gain Evs Control Options Menu

    1=Request ECS Control from LOC 2 Gain EVS Control as EVS Super User 3 Wait for Lockout Timer to Expire 30 Figure 10.2 Request EVS Control with Lockout Timer Active Relinquishing EVS Control Automatic EVS Timer: 30 1=Cancel, Keep EVS Control 2 Accept, Relinquish EVS Control Figure 10.3 Another LOC is Requesting EVS Control

    Page 131

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 131 EVS Super User Emergency Voice System Operation 10.2.9 Relinquish EVS Control Relinquishing EVS Control is accomplished by pressing the EVS Control Key from within Message Mode. A screen will be displayed to ensure the user wants to relinquish EVS Control. EVS Control will be automatically relinquished after a time-out on this screen. When EVS Control is relinquished, the system stays in the Manual EVS State. EVS Control can then be gained by another LOC or again at the same

    Loc.

    10.2.10 EVS Reset An EVS reset is accomplished by pressing the RESET button from an LOC. The user will be prompted to reset either the fire system or emergency system. After an EVS reset, the LOC will automatically exit the LOC EVS interface. 10.3 EVS Super User The EVS Super User access code profile function provides the ability to override all EVS Control rules and gain EVS Control. The EVS Super User is the highest priority user in the system. The EVS Super User has several features that differ from the normal user:
  • Any alarm activated while under EVS Super User Control needs to be reset using an EVS Super User function enabled access code.
  • LOC priority and LOC lockout timer are ignored when passing EVS Control between EVS Super Users at LOC consoles. If another
  • EVS Super User attempts to gain EVS Control from an LOC, an EVS Control request is presented to the EVS Super User at the LOC that currently has EVS Control. 10.4 EVS Point Functionality Any input point in the system can be configured as an EVS input. The Point EVS 1-8 Alarm input types can be used to trigger predetermined EVS events for output areas. EVS-VCM or EVS-RVM points can be programmed to trigger Voice Aux events that can allow external audio to be played through the emergency system. 10.4.1 EVS Point Activations EVS points can only activate outputs and be placed into an alarm state if the system is not in Manual EVS State. EVS points have no priority and all are allowed to be activated. If the EVS point is a higher priority than the Fire System, then the system will play the highest event mes- sage through all EVS mapped outputs. For example: Emergency 1 Point Alarm is higher priority than Emergency 2 Point Alarm. Emergency 1 Point Alarm has message 1 mapped to through groups 1 and 2. Emergency 2 Point Alarm has message 2 playing through groups 2 and 3. If a point for Emergency 1 Point Alarm and a point for Emergency 2 Point Alarm are both active, the system will play message 1 through groups 1, 2, and 3. Once Manual EVS State is active, points in Alarm state switch to an Active state. When the points are changed to the Active state, they do not activate any system mapping or turn any outputs on. Any points that are activated while in Manual EVS are also placed into the Active state and are not allowed to activate any mapping. The system idle screen will show an EVS Alarm for any points in the Active state, and the detailed description of the point will show the point as Active. After an EVS Reset, any EVS points that are still active will again be put into Alarm. 10.4.2 EVS-VCM and EVS-RVM Points The EVS-VCM and EVS-RVM modules contain two programmable input points. These can be programmed as any conventional switch input type. These also have the ability to be programmed as a trigger for bringing external audio into the system. These special point types are: EVS Voice Aux In 1-4 Alarm, Voice Aux In 1-2 Status, Background Music. When activated if the event has the highest Event Priority of all activated events, it will activate the Aux In input to all outputs defined by the respective event program mapping. 10.5 Amplifier Programming 10.5.1 Adding an Amplifier To add a new amplifier to the system, follow these steps:
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming menu.
  • Press 1 to enter Module menu.
  • Press 2 to add a module.
  • Relinquishing EVS Control Automatic EVS Timer: 30 1=Cancel, Keep EVS Control 2 Accept, Relinquish EVS Control Figure 10.4 Relinquish EVS Control

    Note:

    In order to perform an EVS reset, the display must be associated with the EVS-VCM or EVS-RVM. Refer to Figure 10.6.2.

    Note:

    Background Music is only allowed to be mapped to circuit 8 of the EVS-100W amplifiers to ensure correct active supervision.

    Page 132

    132 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Emergency Voice System Operation LOC Programming

  • From the next screen, add an EVS-AMP.
  • The screen will display “Adding module [#]...” for a few moments. You will be returned to the New Module Type screen where you can select another module(s) if desired. You must save changes when you exit the Program Menu or the new module will not be added. For more information, see Section 8.2.2. If you Add a Module that has not been physically connected, the panel will go into trouble after it re-initializes (when you exit the Program Menu with changes accepted). When the new module is attached, the trouble will restore automatically the next time you power up the

    Facp.

    10.5.2 Editing an Amplifier When editing amplifiers, the features that may be edited are: module ID, module name, amplifier module, EVS-CE4 installed (Yes or No), and output voltage. To edit an existing module:
  • Select 7 for Program Menu.
  • Press 1 to enter module menu.
  • Press 1 to edit a module.
  • Use the up or down arrow key to select the module you wish to edit.
  • Press the right arrow key or ENTER to move to next selection.
  • 10.6 LOC Programming LOC Priority is a programmable option for the following EVS devices: •

    Evs-Vcm

    Evs-Rvm

    Each device is assigned a priority level: Low, Normal, or High. 10.6.1 Adding an LOC To add new LOCs to the system, follow these steps:
  • Select 7 for Panel Programming menu.
  • Press 1 to enter Module menu.
  • Press 2 to add a module.
  • From the next screen, add either an EVS-VCM The screen will display “Adding module [#]...” for a few moments. You will be returned to the screen where you can select another a name for the module(s) if desired.
  • Add a compatible LCD Annunciator, if desired, to associate with each EVS-VCM or EVS-RVM.
  • You must save changes when you exit the Program Menu or the new module will not be added. For more information see Section 8.2.2. 10.6.2 Editing an LOC Settings that are specific to an LOC are modified by editing the EVS-VCM or EVS-RVM expander module of the LOC. These options may include: number of switch expanders installed, microphone type, microphone gain, auxiliary gain, tone gain, message gain, keypad priority, and associated keypad. To edit an existing module:
  • Login to the panel. The panel will automatically go to the Main Menu.
  • Select 7 for Program Menu.
  • Press 1 to enter module menu.
  • Press 1 to edit a module.
  • Use the up or down arrow key to select the module you wish to edit.
  • Press the right arrow key or ENTER to move to next selection.
  • LOC Priority Each device is assigned a Priority level: Low, Normal, or High. This is modified by editing the LOC’s EVS-VCM or EVS-RVM module. By default, the EVS-VCM has a high LOC priority. The EVS-RVM is defaulted to normal LOC priority. LOC Association To create an LOC, an annunciator must be associated to an EVS-VCM or EVS-RVM. This done by editing the EVS-VCM or EVS-RVM module and selecting the correct annunciator for the associated device. During JumpStart, the EVS-VCM is automatically associated with the internal annunciator. The association for other LOC consoles in the system must be performed in programming.

    Note:

    If you add a module to panel programming that has not been physically connected, the panel will go into trouble after it re-initializes (when you exit the Program Menu). When the new module is attached, the trouble will restore automatically the next time you power up the system.

    Note:

    You can also use HFSS to edit an LOC.

    Page 133

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 133 Using the Microphone Emergency Voice System Operation 10.7 Using the Microphone 10.7.1 Microphone Functionality Each microphone in the system is capable of providing live fire system or EVS paging. The microphones are housed within the EVS Series panel enclosure and the EVS-LOC/EVSRPU cabinets. A maximum of five microphones can be installed in the system. 10.7.2 Custom EVS Event This event is activated by gaining EVS Control at a LOC and using the microphone without any EVS event already active in the Manual EVS State. In this case, the Mic Triggered EVS Alarm mapping and General EVS Alarm mapping will be activated and stay activated until a different EVS event is activated at the LOC or the user resets the Emergency Communication System. 10.7.3 Fire Page A fire page can only occur when: • Only the fire system is active. • Both fire and EVS are active and the fire alarm is programmed to be of higher priority than the active EVS alarm. – If the fire alarm has the highest active priority and EVS is also active, any LOC can do a fire page given LOC device priority rules are followed. If the user is at the LOC with EVS Control, and the fire page is of higher priority that the EVS event, the LOC will automatically relinquish EVS Control to do the fire page when the user engages the microphone. • Only the fire system is active, the user has gained EVS Control and custom EVS event is a lower priority than the fire alarm. – In this case, if any LOC has EVS Control, the LOC will automatically relinquish control to allow for the fire page. • If both the fire alarm and EVS are active and the active EVS event is programmed for higher priority than fire alarm, the user must also gain EVS control. – In this case a fire page is NOT allowed at all and the LOC must gain EVS control in order to do any live voice. 10.7.4 Emergency Page An emergency page can occur when: • Only the emergency system is active and the user has gained EVS Control. • Both fire and the emergency systems are active and the highest priority active emergency event is programmed to be of higher priority than the highest priority active fire event and the user has gained EVS Control. • Only fire system is active, the Emergency LOC Alarm priority is higher than the active fire system event and the user has gained EVS Control. This will trigger the EVS system and enable mapping for 'Mic Triggered EVS Alarm' and 'General EVS Alarm'. 10.7.5 Paging If there are no active emergency or fire system events, the microphone at an LOC can be used for paging by following these steps:

  • Push the PTT (push-to-talk) button on the microphone.
  • Use the Select Keys on the LOC to toggle the output areas to page to with the microphone (illuminates the green LEDs). The Ready to
  • Talk LED will illuminate after an output area has been activated.
  • Speak into the microphone.
  • Release PTT button when finished.
  • 10.8 Recording Custom Messages The EVS Series EVS-VCM comes with 15 recordable message slots. Message 1-15 can be recorded from: the microphone, Aux Input, or by using the EVS Message Management utility of HFSS. All messages can be a maximum of one minute.

    All Call

    Ready

    To Talk

    Ready to Talk LED

    Page 134

    134 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Emergency Voice System Operation Recording Custom Messages When in the record mode, the EVS-VCM keys will function as follows: While in the Local Record mode, Select Keys 1-15 will be used to reference message slots 1-15. The associated green Select Key LED will indicate that a message is currently programmed in the corresponding slot. When there is no message recorded (or the message is erased), the associated green Select Key LED will be off. While recording a particular message, the associated red Select Key LED will turn on until recording is completed. The Select Key 1-15 will be used to playback a recorded message or to select the message slot to record to or erase. When in the Local Record mode, the EVS-VCM LEDs will function as follows: 10.8.1 Recording Messages 1-15 Using Aux Audio Input Recording messages from the Aux Audio Input enables you to load customized, pre-recorded messages into an EVS message location. Follow these steps to record a user message using Aux Audio Input.

  • Wire a speaker cable with 1/8” mini plug to the Aux AUDIO GND and IN terminals. Refer to Figure 10.5.
  • Switch LED Active LED Status Action Select key 1-15 Green LED On Message is currently programmed in this slot Select key 1-15 Red LED On Message recording is in progress Select key 1-15 Green/Red LED Off/Off Message slot is empty Select key 1-15 Red LED Flashing Message is being played back or message is selected for recording

    All Call

    Ecs Control

    Non-Active

    Call

    Ready

    To Talk

    Key Function EVS Message Key 1 Select message slot to record EVS Message Key 3 Start and stop recording from Aux Audio Input EVS Message Key 8 Erase user message 1-15 Select Keys 1-15 Message storage lot 1-15 ECS Message Key 1 ECS Message Key 3 ECS Message Key 8 Select Keys 1-15

    Page 135

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 135 Recording Custom Messages Emergency Voice System Operation

  • Plug the mini plug into the Line Out/Headphone jack on a PC or laptop.
  • Enter programming mode at main control panel.
  • Select 8 for Voice Options.
  • Select 1 for VCM Maintenance.
  • Select 2 Local Recording.
  • Select the amplifier and circuit for the audio to play through during programming. A user would generally pick the audio circuit that is
  • in closest proximity to them.
  • Press EVS Message Key 1 to enter the message slot selection mode. Then, press the Select Key 1-15 that corresponds to the message
  • slot that you wish to record to. The associated Select Key red LED will begin flashing, indicating that the message slot is ready for recording.
  • Simultaneously press EVS Message Key 3 and start playing the audio source on the PC or laptop.
  • When the audio file from the PC is finished playing, press EVS Message Key 3 again to stop the recording. The Select Key green LED
  • will come on.
  • To playback the recorded message, press the Select Key 1-15 that was just recorded to.
  • Recording with Aux Audio Input Example The user wants to record into memory slot 2 via the Aux Audio Input channel. Upon entering the Local Recording mode via the keypad menu, the keypad will light the Select Key green LEDs 1-15 for each occupied message slot. If a message already exists in message slot 2, it must first be erased. Press EVS Message Key 8, then press Select Key 2, (see Section 10.8.3). When the message has been erased Select Key 2’s green LED will turn off. To record a message, press EVS Message Key 1, then press Select Key 2 (this will use message slot 2 for the recording). Select Key 2's red LED will begin flashing. Press EVS Message Key 3 while simultaneously pressing play on the PC to start recording the Aux Audio Input. When the PC message is done, press EVS Message Key 3 to stop recording. Select Key 2's red LED will stay on until processing is completed. Select Key 2's green LED comes on after the recording is completed. Pressing Select Key 2 will start a playback of the recorded message. 10.8.2 Recording Messages 1-15 Using the Microphone Messages can be recorded into the EVS system by using the onboard microphone. Follow these steps to use the microphone to record your message:
  • Enter programming mode at main control panel.
  • Select 8 for Voice Options.
  • Select 1 for VCM Maintenance.
  • Select 2 Local Recording.
  • Aux Audio

    In

    Gnd

    plug in speaker cable to Audio/Line Out terminal block connection on

    Evs-Vcm

    Figure 10.5 AUX Audio Connection for Recording

    Note:

    The keypad will light the green Select Key LED for message slots that are occupied. If a message is already stored in the desired slot, then you must erase the message first. (see Section 10.8.3).

    Page 136

    136 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Emergency Voice System Operation Recording Custom Messages

  • Select the amplifier and circuit for the audio to play through during programming. A user would generally pick the audio circuit that is
  • in closest proximity to them.
  • Press EVS Message Key 1 to enter the message slot selection mode. Then, press the Select Key 1-15 that corresponds to the message
  • slot that you wish to record to. The associated Select Key red LED will begin flashing, indicating that the message slot is ready for recording.
  • Press the push-to-talk (PTT) button on the microphone and speak your message.
  • Release the PTT button on the microphone to save your message. The Select Key green LED for this location will turn on.
  • To playback the recorded message, press the Select Key 1-15 that was just recorded to.
  • If you are not satisfied with the recorded message, erase it (see Section 10.8.3) and then repeat steps 1 through 7.
  • Recording with Microphone Example User wants to record a message to message slot 5 via the microphone. Upon entering the Local Recording mode via the keypad menu, the keypad will light the Select Key green LEDs for 1-15 for each occupied message slot. If a message already exists in message slot 5, it must first be erased. Press EVS Message key 8, then press Select Key 5, (see Section 10.8.3). When the message has been erased Select Key 5's green LED will turn off. To record a message, press EVS Message Key 1, press Select Key 5 (this will use message slot 5 for the recording). Select Key 5's red LED will begin flashing. Press the push-to-talk button on the microphone and speak your message. Release the PTT button to save your message. Select Key 5's red LED stays on until processing is completed. Select Key 5's green LED comes on after the recording is completed. Pressing Select Key 5 will start a playback of the recorded message. 10.8.3 Erasing User Message To erase the message stored in message slot 1-15, follow these steps:
  • Enter programming mode at main control panel.
  • Select 8 for Voice Options.
  • Select 1 for VCM Maintenance.
  • Select 2 Local Recording.
  • Select the amplifier and circuit for the audio to play through during programming. A user would generally pick the audio circuit that is
  • in closest proximity to them.
  • Press EVS Message Key 8 on the keypad, press the Select Key 1-15 that you wish to erase. The Select Key red LED will stay on until
  • the erase is done. When erased, the Select Key green LED by corresponding to the message slot you erased will go off. 10.8.4 Using HFSS Voice Message Load Software The HFSS Voice Message Load Software is a software support utility that is used to download recorded messages (in .SKE format stored on your PC hard drive) to the various message locations of the EVS Series keypad. Messages can be uploaded from the EVS-VCM, stored, and used again in similar installations. To read/write .SKE formatted messages to and from the main panel, follow these steps:
  • Make sure that panel is in Normal mode.
  • Note:

    The keypad will light the green Select Key LED for message slots that are occupied. If a message is already stored in the desired slot, then you must erase the message first. (See Section 10.8.3).

    Note:

    The keypad will light the green Select Key LEDs for message slots that are occupied (can be erased).

    Page 137

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 137 Recording Custom Messages Emergency Voice System Operation

  • Connect the PC to the USB port on the FACP using a standard USB cable.
  • Run the Voice Message Load software.
  • Select “Read from Panel” to read a message and store onto your hard drive, or “Write to Panel” to transfer a .SKE formatted message to
  • the panel.
  • Select the appropriate message location you wish to read/write.
  • Enter the file name you wish to transfer (Press “Browse” to display a list of files.)
  • Press “Start” to start the transfer.
  • Sbus

    Vbus 2 In

    Vbus 2 Out

    + + +

    A

    B

    Figure 10.6 USB Cable Connections

    Page 138

    138 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Section 11: Reporting This section lists receivers that are compatible with this control panel, and the reporting codes sent by the control panel for SIA and Contact ID formats. 11.1 Receivers Compatible with the Control Panel Table 11.1 shows receivers compatible with the control panel. Manufacturer Model Format Silent Knight by Honeywell Model 9800 SIA and Contact ID Model 9000 (SIA formats)

    Sia

    Honeywell Security AlarmNet 7810-ir IP and Cellular Receiver, Contact ID only Ademco

    Mx8000

    SIA and Contact ID Model 685 (Contact ID ) Contact ID Sur-Gard SG-MLR2-DG (V. 1.64 or higher) SIA and Contact ID Osborne Hoffman Quickalert SIA and Contact ID Table 11.1 Receivers Compatible with the Control Panel SIA Reporting Format Contact ID Reporting Format SIA pi Modifier

    Sia

    Event Description Module ID # (If Any)

    Sia

    Event Codes Parameter Fixed Length Format NN - panel ID

    Xx- Sbus Id

    ZZZ- Zone # PPPP- Point # GGG- Group # E- Emergency # RRRR-Receiver # Qualifier Event Code Group # Contact # System Events System Events are reported when either “Report by Point” or Report by Zone is selected AC power low trouble

    At

    0

    Atnn000000

    1 301 00 000 AC power low trouble restore

    Ar

    0

    Arnn000000

    3 301 00 000 Auto dialer test communications trouble line 1

    Yc

    1

    Ycnn000001

    1 350 Receiver # 001 Auto dialer test communications trouble line 1 restore

    Yk

    1

    Yknn000001

    3 350 Receiver # 001 Auto dialer test communications trouble line 2

    Yc

    2

    Ycnn000002

    1 350 Receiver # 002 Auto dialer test communications trouble line 2 restore

    Yk

    2

    Yknn000002

    3 350 Receiver # 002 Automatic test normal

    Rp

    0

    Rpnn000000

    1 602 00 000 Automatic test off normal

    Ry

    0

    Rynn000000

    1 608 00 000 Battery voltage trouble

    Yt

    Exp. ID

    Ytnnxx0000

    1 302 Exp. ID 000 Battery voltage trouble restore

    Yr

    Exp. ID

    Yrnnxx0000

    3 302 Exp. ID 000 Date changed event

    Jd

    0

    Jdnn000000

    1 625 00 000 EVS Reset

    Or

    1

    Ornn000001

    1 401 00 001 Emergency System Overridden

    Qs

    0

    Qsnn000000

    1 244 00 000 Emergency System Overridden Restore

    Qr

    0

    Qrnn000000

    3 244 00 000 Fire drill has begun

    Fi

    0

    Finn000000

    1 604 00 000 Fire drill has ended

    Fk

    0

    Fknn000000

    3 604 00 000 F1 Mapping Inhibited

    Ft

    2001

    Ftnn002001

    1 570 00 001 F1 Mapping Inhibited Restoral

    Fj

    2001

    Fjnn002001

    3 570 00 001 F2 Mapping Inhibited

    Ft

    2002

    Ftnn002002

    1 570 00 002 F2 Mapping Inhibited Restoral

    Fj

    2002

    Fjnn002002

    3 570 00 002 F3 Mapping Inhibited

    Ft

    2003

    Ftnn002003

    1 570 00 003 F3 Mapping Inhibited Restoral

    Fj

    2003

    Fjnn002003

    3 570 00 003 Table 11.2 Reporting Formats Table

    Page 139

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 139 Receivers Compatible with the Control Panel Reporting F4 Mapping Inhibited

    Ft

    2004

    Ftnn002004

    1 570 00 004 F4 Mapping Inhibited Restoral

    Fj

    2004

    Fjnn002004

    3 570 00 004 Fire Reset

    Or

    0

    Ornn000000

    1 401 00 000 Fire System Overridden

    Fs

    0

    Fsnn000000

    1 245 00 000 Fire System Override Restore

    Fr

    0

    Frnn000000

    3 245 00 000 Ground fault condition trouble

    Yp

    Exp. ID

    Ypnnxx0000

    1 310 Exp. ID 000 Ground fault condition trouble restore

    Yq

    Exp. ID

    Yqnnxx0000

    3 310 Exp. ID 000 Initial power up

    Rr

    0

    Rrnn000000

    1 305 00 000 Local programming aborted or ended with errors

    Lu

    0

    Lunn000000

    1 628 00 000 Local programming begin

    Lb

    0

    Lbnn000000

    1 627 00 000 Local programming ended normally

    Ls

    0

    Lsnn000000

    1 628 00 000 Network node trouble (panel missing)

    Em

    Panel ID

    Emnnnn0000

    1 334 Panel ID 000 Network node trouble restore (panel no longer missing)

    En

    Panel ID

    Ennnnn0000

    3 334 Panel ID 000 OPG Inhibit Trouble

    Ft

    Group # + 1000

    Ftnn001Ggg

    1 320 00 Group # OPG Inhibit Trouble Restore

    Fj

    Group # + 1000

    Fjnn001Ggg

    3 320 00 Group # OPG Inhibit of Releasing Group

    Ss

    Group # + 1000

    Ssnn001Ggg

    1 203 00 Group # OPG Inhibit of Releasing Group Restore

    Sr

    Group # + 1000

    Srnn001Ggg

    3 203 00 Group # Phone line 1 trouble detected

    Lt

    1

    Ltnn000001

    1 351 00 000 Phone line 1 trouble restore

    Lr

    1

    Lrnn000001

    3 351 00 000 Phone line 2 trouble detected

    Lt

    2

    Ltnn000002

    1 352 00 000 Phone line 2 trouble restore

    Lr

    2

    Lrnn000002

    3 352 00 000 Printer is off-line trouble

    Vz

    Exp. ID

    Vznnxx0000

    1 336 Exp. ID 000 Printer is off-line trouble restore

    Vy

    Exp. ID

    Vynnxx0000

    3 336 Exp. ID 000 Printer is out of paper trouble

    Vo

    Exp. ID

    Vonnxx0000

    1 335 Exp. ID 000 Printer is out of paper trouble restore

    Vi

    Exp. ID

    Vinnxx0000

    3 335 Exp. ID 000 Releasing Notif/Control Circuit Disabled pi Exp. ID SS Point #

    Ssnnxxpppp

    1 203 Exp. ID Point # Releasing Notif/Control Circuit enabled pi Exp. ID SR Point #

    Srnnxxpppp

    3 203 Exp. ID Point # Remote programming aborted or ended with errors

    Ru

    0

    Runn000000

    1 413 00 000 Remote programming ended normally

    Rs

    0

    Rsnn000000

    1 412 00 000 Repeater ground fault trouble

    Em

    0103

    Emnn000103

    1 334 Panel ID 103 Repeater ground fault trouble restore

    En

    0103

    Ennn000103

    3 334 Panel ID 103 Repeater missing trouble

    Em

    0100

    Emnn000100

    1 334 Panel ID 100 Repeater missing trouble restore

    En

    0100

    Ennn000100

    3 334 Panel ID 100 Repeater Rx1 communication trouble

    Em

    0101

    Emnn000101

    1 334 Panel ID 101 Repeater Rx1 communication trouble restore

    En

    0101

    Ennn000101

    3 334 Panel ID 101 Repeater Rx2 communication trouble

    Em

    0102

    Emnn000102

    1 334 Panel ID 102 Repeater Rx2 communication trouble restore

    En

    0102

    Ennn000102

    3 334 Panel ID 102 SBUS Class A supervision lost

    Et

    Exp. ID

    Etnnxx0000

    1 333 Exp. ID 000 SIA Reporting Format Contact ID Reporting Format SIA pi Modifier

    Sia

    Event Description Module ID # (If Any)

    Sia

    Event Codes Parameter Fixed Length Format NN - panel ID

    Xx- Sbus Id

    ZZZ- Zone # PPPP- Point # GGG- Group # E- Emergency # RRRR-Receiver # Qualifier Event Code Group # Contact # Table 11.2 Reporting Formats Table (Continued)

    Page 140

    140 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Reporting Receivers Compatible with the Control Panel SBUS Class A supervision restore

    Er

    Exp. ID

    Ernnxx0000

    3 333 Exp. ID 000 SBUS expander trouble

    Et

    Exp. ID

    Etnnxx0000

    1 333 Exp. ID 000 SBUS expander trouble restore

    Er

    Exp. ID

    Ernnxx0000

    3 333 Exp. ID 000 SLC class A supervision trouble

    Et

    Exp. ID

    Etnnxx0000

    1 331 Exp. ID 000 SLC class A supervision trouble restore

    Er

    Exp. ID

    Ernnxx0000

    3 331 Exp. ID 000 SLC programming ended, system active

    Te

    0

    Tenn000000

    3 607 00 000 SLC programming started, system shut down

    Ts

    0

    Tsnn000000

    1 607 00 000 SLC short circuit trouble

    Et

    Exp. ID

    Etnnxx0000

    1 332 Exp. ID 000 SLC short circuit trouble restore

    Er

    Exp. ID

    Ernnxx0000

    3 332 Exp. ID 000 Time changed event

    Jt

    0

    Jtnn000000

    1 625 00 000 Unable to report to account trouble

    Rt

    Receiver #

    Rtnn00Rrrr

    1 354 00 Receiver # Unable to report to account trouble restore

    Yk

    Receiver #

    Yknn00Rrrr

    3 354 00 Receiver # User access code changed

    Jv

    0

    Jvnn000000

    1 602 00 000 User initiated manual dialer test

    Rx

    0

    Rxnn000000

    1 601 00 000 Walk test begin

    Ts

    0

    Tsnn000000

    1 607 00 000 Walk test end

    Te

    0

    Tenn000000

    3 607 00 000 Zone Events Zone events are reported only when “Report by Zone” is selected Auxiliary power trouble

    Ft

    0000

    Ftnn000000

    1 320 00 000 Auxiliary power trouble restore

    Fj

    0000

    Fjnn000000

    3 320 00 000 CO Detector Alarm

    Ga

    Zone #

    Gann000Zzz

    1 162 00 Zone # CO Detector Alarm Restore

    Gh

    Zone #

    Ghnn000Zzz

    3 162 00 Zone # CO Detector Supervisory Alarm

    Gs

    Zone #

    Gsnn000Zzz

    1 200 00 Zone # CO Detector Supervisory Alarm Restore

    Gr

    Zone #

    Grnn000Zzz

    3 200 00 Zone # CO Detector Trouble

    Gt

    Zone #

    Gtnn000Zzz

    1 373 00 Zone # CO Detector Trouble Restore

    Gj

    Zone #

    Gjnn000Zzz

    3 373 00 Zone # Detector Alarm

    Fa

    Zone #

    Fann000Zzz

    1 110 00 Zone # Detector Alarm Restore

    Fh

    Zone #

    Fhnn000Zzz

    3 110 00 Zone # Detector trouble

    Ft

    Zone #

    Ftnn000Zzz

    1 373 00 Zone # Detector trouble restore

    Fj

    Zone #

    Fjnn000Zzz

    3 373 00 Zone # EVS Switch Trouble

    Qt

    0

    Qtnn000000

    1 242 00 000 EVS Switch Trouble Restore

    Qj

    0

    Qjnn000000

    3 242 00 000 EVS Supervisory/Tamper Alarm

    Qs

    0

    Qsnn000000

    1 241 00 000 EVS Supervisory/Tamper Alarm Restore

    Qr

    0

    Qrnn000000

    3 241 00 000 EVS Output Group Trouble

    Qt

    Group # +1000

    Qtnn001Ggg

    1 320 00 Group # EVS Output Group Trouble Restore

    Qj

    Group # +1000

    Qjnn001Ggg

    3 320 00 Group # External Reset/Silence/Fire Drill switch trouble

    Ut

    0000

    Utnn000000

    1 373 00 000 External Reset/Silence/Fire Drill switch trouble restore

    Uj

    0000

    Ujnn000000

    3 373 00 000 LOC Mic Activated EVS Alarm

    Qa

    0

    Qann000000

    1 220 00 000 SIA Reporting Format Contact ID Reporting Format SIA pi Modifier

    Sia

    Event Description Module ID # (If Any)

    Sia

    Event Codes Parameter Fixed Length Format NN - panel ID

    Xx- Sbus Id

    ZZZ- Zone # PPPP- Point # GGG- Group # E- Emergency # RRRR-Receiver # Qualifier Event Code Group # Contact # Table 11.2 Reporting Formats Table (Continued)

    Page 141

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 141 Receivers Compatible with the Control Panel Reporting LOC Mic Activated EVS Alarm Restore

    Qh

    0

    Qhnn000000

    3 220 00 000 LOC/Point EVS # Alarm

    Qa

    Emergency #

    Qann0E0000

    1 220 + Emerge ncy # 00 000 LOC/Point EVS # Alarm Restore

    Qh

    Emergency #

    Qhnn0E0000

    3 220 + Emerge ncy # 00 000 Manual pull switch alarm

    Fa

    Zone #

    Fann000Zzz

    1 115 00 Zone # Manual pull switch alarm restore

    Fh

    Zone #

    Fhnn000Zzz

    3 115 00 Zone # Manual pull switch trouble

    Ft

    Zone #

    Ftnn000Zzz

    1 373 00 Zone # Manual pull switch trouble restore

    Fj

    Zone #

    Fjnn000Zzz

    3 373 00 Zone # Notification output trouble

    Ft

    Group # + 1000

    Ftnn001Ggg

    1 320 00 Group # Notification output trouble restore

    Fj

    Group # + 1000

    Fjnn001Ggg

    3 320 00 Group # Positive Alarm Sequence acknowledge switch trouble

    Ft

    Zone #

    Ftnn000Zzz

    1 373 00 Zone # Positive Alarm Sequence acknowledge switch trouble restore

    Fj

    Zone #

    Fjnn000Zzz

    3 373 00 Zone # SLC LED Module trouble

    Et

    0000

    Etnn000000

    1 333 00 000 SLC LED Module trouble restore

    Er

    0000

    Ernn000000

    3 333 00 000 Status Point Types Trouble

    Ut

    0

    Utnn000000

    1 379 00 000 Status Point Types Trouble Restore

    Uj

    0

    Ujnn000000

    3 379 00 000 Supervisory Detector Alarm

    Fs

    Zone #

    Fsnn000Zzz

    1 200 00 Zone # Supervisory Detector Alarm Restore

    Fr

    Zone #

    Frnn000Zzz

    3 200 00 Zone # Supervisory/Tamper Alarm

    Fs

    Zone #

    Fsnn000Zzz

    1 200 00 Zone # Supervisory/Tamper alarm condition restore

    Fr

    Zone #

    Frnn000Zzz

    3 200 00 Zone # Supervisory/Tamper switch trouble

    Ft

    Zone #

    Ftnn000Zzz

    1 373 00 Zone # Supervisory/Tamper switch trouble restore

    Fj

    Zone #

    Fjnn000Zzz

    3 373 00 Zone # System-based AUX1 switch alarm

    Ua

    1000

    Uann001000

    1 140 01 000 System-based AUX1 switch alarm restore

    Uh

    1000

    Uhnn001000

    3 140 01 000 System-based AUX1 switch trouble

    Ut

    1000

    Utnn001000

    1 373 01 000 System-based AUX1 switch trouble restore

    Uj

    1000

    Ujnn001000

    3 373 01 000 System-based AUX2 switch alarm

    Ua

    2000

    Uann002000

    1 140 02 000 System-based AUX2 switch alarm restore

    Uh

    2000

    Uhnn002000

    3 140 02 000 System-based AUX2 switch trouble

    Ut

    2000

    Utnn002000

    1 373 02 000 System-based AUX2 switch trouble restore

    Uj

    2000

    Ujnn002000

    3 373 02 000 Voice Aux EVS 1 Alarm

    Ua

    3

    Uann003000

    1 171 00 000 Voice Aux EVS 1 Alarm Restore

    Uh

    3

    Uhnn003000

    3 171 00 000 Voice Aux EVS 2 Alarm

    Ua

    4

    Uann004000

    1 172 00 000 Voice Aux EVS 2 Alarm Restore

    Uh

    4

    Uhnn004000

    3 172 00 000 Voice Aux EVS 3 Alarm

    Ua

    5

    Uann005000

    1 173 00 000 Voice Aux EVS 3 Alarm Restore

    Uh

    5

    Uhnn005000

    3 173 00 000 Voice Aux EVS 4 Alarm

    Ua

    6

    Uann006000

    1 174 00 000 Voice Aux EVS 4 Alarm Restore

    Uh

    6

    Uhnn006000

    3 174 00 000 SIA Reporting Format Contact ID Reporting Format SIA pi Modifier

    Sia

    Event Description Module ID # (If Any)

    Sia

    Event Codes Parameter Fixed Length Format NN - panel ID

    Xx- Sbus Id

    ZZZ- Zone # PPPP- Point # GGG- Group # E- Emergency # RRRR-Receiver # Qualifier Event Code Group # Contact # Table 11.2 Reporting Formats Table (Continued)

    Page 142

    142 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Reporting Receivers Compatible with the Control Panel Water flow switch alarm

    Sa

    Zone #

    Sann000Zzz

    1 113 00 Zone # Water flow switch alarm Restore

    Sh

    Zone #

    Shnn000Zzz

    3 113 00 Zone # Water flow switch trouble

    St

    Zone #

    Stnn000Zzz

    1 373 00 Zone # Water flow switch trouble Restore

    Sj

    Zone #

    Sjnn000Zzz

    3 373 00 Zone # Zone-based AUX1 switch alarm

    Ua

    Zone # + 1000

    Uann001Zzz

    1 140 01 Zone # Zone-based AUX1 switch alarm restore

    Uh

    Zone # + 1000

    Uhnn001Zzz

    3 140 01 Zone # Zone-based AUX1 switch trouble

    Ut

    Zone # + 1000

    Utnn001Zzz

    1 373 01 Zone # Zone-based AUX1 switch trouble restore

    Uj

    Zone # + 1000

    Ujnn001Zzz

    3 373 01 Zone # Zone-based AUX2 switch alarm

    Ua

    Zone # + 2000

    Uann002Zzz

    1 140 02 Zone # Zone-based AUX2 switch alarm restore

    Uh

    Zone # + 2000

    Uhnn002Zzz

    3 140 02 Zone # Zone-based AUX2 switch trouble

    Ut

    Zone # + 2000

    Utnn002Zzz

    1 373 02 Zone # Zone-based AUX2 switch trouble restore

    Uj

    Zone # + 2000

    Ujnn002Zzz

    3 373 02 Zone # Point Events For SK devices, sensors 1–159 are reported as Points 1–159, modules 1–159 are reported as Points 201–359. An unexpected SLC device has been detected pi Exp. ID XE Point #

    Xennxxpppp

    1 380 Exp. ID Point # An unexpected SLC device has been removed pi Exp. ID XI Point #

    Xinnxxpppp

    3 380 Exp. ID Point # Auxiliary power disabled pi Exp. ID FB Point #

    Fbnnxxpppp

    1 571 Exp. ID Point # Auxiliary power enabled pi Exp. ID FU Point #

    Funnxxpppp

    3 571 Exp. ID Point # Auxiliary power Trouble pi Exp. ID FT Point #

    Ftnnxxpppp

    1 320 Exp. ID Point # Auxiliary power trouble restore pi Exp. ID FJ Point #

    Fjnnxxpppp

    3 320 Exp. ID Point # Background Music Switch is Trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point #

    Utnnxxpppp

    1 379 Exp. ID Point # Background Music Switch is Trouble Restored pi Exp. ID UJ Point #

    Ujnnxxpppp

    3 379 Exp. ID Point # Background Music Switch is Disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point #

    Ubnnxxpppp

    1 580 Exp. ID Point # Background Music Switch is Enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point #

    Uunnxxpppp

    3 580 Exp. ID Point # CO Detector Trouble pi Exp. ID GT Point #

    Gtnnxxpppp

    1 373 Exp. ID Point # CO Detector Trouble Restore pi Exp. ID GJ Point #

    Gjnnxxpppp

    3 373 Exp. ID Point # CO Detector Disabled pi Exp. ID GB Point #

    Gbnnxxpppp

    1 571 Exp. ID Point # CO Detector Enabled pi Exp. ID GU Point #

    Gunnxxpppp

    3 571 Exp. ID Point # Detector Alarm pi Exp. ID FA Point #

    Fannxxpppp

    1 110 Exp. ID Point # Detector Alarm restore pi Exp. ID FH Point #

    Fhnnxxpppp

    3 110 Exp. ID Point # Detector Disabled pi Exp. ID FB Point #

    Fbnnxxpppp

    1 571 Exp. ID Point # Detector Enabled pi Exp. ID FU Point #

    Funnxxpppp

    3 571 Exp. ID Point # Detector Trouble pi Exp. ID FT Point #

    Ftnnxxpppp

    1 373 Exp. ID Point # Detector Trouble restore pi Exp. ID FJ Point #

    Fjnnxxpppp

    3 373 Exp. ID Point # Detector CO Alarm pi Exp. ID GA Point #

    Gannxxpppp

    1 162 Exp. ID Point # Detector CO Alarm Restore pi Exp. ID GH Point #

    Ghnnxxpppp

    3 162 Exp. ID Point # Detector CO Supervisory Alarm pi Exp. ID GS Point #

    Gsnnxxpppp

    1 200 Exp. ID Point # Detector CO Supervisory Alarm Restore pi Exp. ID GR Point #

    Grnnxxpppp

    3 200 Exp. ID Point # SIA Reporting Format Contact ID Reporting Format SIA pi Modifier

    Sia

    Event Description Module ID # (If Any)

    Sia

    Event Codes Parameter Fixed Length Format NN - panel ID

    Xx- Sbus Id

    ZZZ- Zone # PPPP- Point # GGG- Group # E- Emergency # RRRR-Receiver # Qualifier Event Code Group # Contact # Table 11.2 Reporting Formats Table (Continued)

    Page 143

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 143 Receivers Compatible with the Control Panel Reporting EVS Alarm # Point Alarm pi Exp. ID QA

    (Eppp) E -

    Emergency # PPP - Point #

    Qannxxeppp

    1 220 + Emerge ncy # Exp. ID Point # EVS Alarm # Point Alarm Restore pi Exp. ID QH

    (Eppp) E -

    Emergency # PPP - Point #

    Qhnnxxeppp

    3 220 + Emerge ncy # Exp. ID Point # EVS Alarm # Point Trouble pi Exp. ID QT Point #

    Qtnnxxpppp

    1 242 Exp. ID Point # EVS Alarm # Point Trouble Restore pi Exp. ID QJ Point #

    Qjnnxxpppp

    3 242 Exp. ID Point # EVS Alarm # Point Disabled pi Exp. ID QB Point #

    Qbnnxxpppp

    1 243 Exp. ID Point # EVS Alarm # Point Enabled pi Exp. ID QU Point #

    Qunnxxpppp

    3 243 Exp. ID Point # EVS Supervisory/Tamper Alarm pi Exp. ID QS Point #

    Qsnnxxpppp

    1 241 Exp. ID Point # EVS Supervisory/Tamper Alarm Restore pi Exp. ID QR Point #

    Qrnnxxpppp

    3 241 Exp. ID Point # EVS Supervisory/Tamper Trouble pi Exp. ID QT Point #

    Qtnnxxpppp

    1 242 Exp. ID Point # EVS Supervisory/Tamper Trouble Restore pi Exp. ID QJ Point #

    Qjnnxxpppp

    3 242 Exp. ID Point # EVS Supervisory/Tamper Disabled pi Exp. ID QB Point #

    Qbnnxxpppp

    1 243 Exp. ID Point # EVS Supervisory/Tamper Enabled pi Exp. ID QU Point #

    Qunnxxpppp

    3 243 Exp. ID Point # EVS NAC Trouble pi Exp. ID QT Point #

    Qtnnxxpppp

    1 320 Exp. ID Point # EVS NAC Trouble Restored pi Exp. ID QJ Point #

    Qjnnxxpppp

    3 320 Exp. ID Point # EVS Control Circuit Trouble pi Exp. ID QT Point #

    Qtnnxxpppp

    1 320 Exp. ID Point # EVS Control Circuit Trouble Restored pi Exp. ID QJ Point #

    Qjnnxxpppp

    3 320 Exp. ID Point # EVS Relay Trouble pi Exp. ID QT Point #

    Qtnnxxpppp

    1 320 Exp. ID Point # EVS Relay Trouble Restored pi Exp. ID QJ Point #

    Qjnnxxpppp

    3 320 Exp. ID Point # EVS Notification Trouble pi Exp. ID QT Point #

    Qtnnxxpppp

    1 320 Exp. ID Point # EVS Notification Trouble Restored pi Exp. ID QJ Point #

    Qjnnxxpppp

    3 320 Exp. ID Point # External Reset/Silence/Fire Drill switch disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point #

    Ubnnxxpppp

    1 571 Exp. ID Point # External Reset/Silence/Fire Drill switch enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point #

    Uunnxxpppp

    3 571 Exp. ID Point # External Reset/Silence/Fire Drill switch trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point #

    Utnnxxpppp

    1 373 Exp. ID Point # External Reset/Silence/Fire Drill switch trouble restore pi Exp. ID UJ Point #

    Ujnnxxpppp

    3 373 Exp. ID Point # Interlock switch alarm (Water Release Zone) pi Exp. ID FA Point #

    Fannxxpppp

    1 110 Exp. ID Point # Interlock switch alarm restore (Water Release Zone) pi Exp. ID FH Point #

    Fhnnxxpppp

    3 110 Exp. ID Point # Interlock switch disabled pi Exp. ID FB Point #

    Fbnnxxpppp

    1 571 Exp. ID Point # Interlock switch enabled pi Exp. ID FU Point #

    Funnxxpppp

    3 571 Exp. ID Point # Interlock switch trouble (Water Release Zone) pi Exp. ID FT Point #

    Ftnnxxpppp

    1 373 Exp. ID Point # Interlock switch trouble restore (Water Release Zone) pi Exp. ID FJ Point #

    Fjnnxxpppp

    3 373 Exp. ID Point # LOC Mic Activated EVS Alarm pi Exp. ID QA 0

    Qannxx0000

    1 220 Exp. ID 000 LOC Mic Activated EVS Alarm Restore pi Exp. ID QH 0

    Qhnnxx0000

    3 220 Exp. ID 000 SIA Reporting Format Contact ID Reporting Format SIA pi Modifier

    Sia

    Event Description Module ID # (If Any)

    Sia

    Event Codes Parameter Fixed Length Format NN - panel ID

    Xx- Sbus Id

    ZZZ- Zone # PPPP- Point # GGG- Group # E- Emergency # RRRR-Receiver # Qualifier Event Code Group # Contact # Table 11.2 Reporting Formats Table (Continued)

    Page 144

    144 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Reporting Receivers Compatible with the Control Panel LOC EVS # Alarm pi Exp. ID QA Emergency #

    Qannxxe000

    1 220 + Emerge ncy # Exp. ID 000 LOC EVS # Alarm Restore pi Exp. ID QH Emergency #

    Qhnnxxe000

    3 220 + Emerge ncy # Exp. ID 000 Manual pull switch alarm pi Exp. ID FA Point #

    Fannxxpppp

    1 115 Exp. ID Point # Manual pull switch alarm restore pi Exp. ID FH Point #

    Fhnnxxpppp

    3 115 Exp. ID Point # Manual pull switch disabled pi Exp. ID FB Point #

    Fbnnxxpppp

    1 571 Exp. ID Point # Manual pull switch enabled pi Exp. ID FU Point #

    Funnxxpppp

    3 571 Exp. ID Point # Manual pull switch trouble pi Exp. ID FT Point #

    Ftnnxxpppp

    1 373 Exp. ID Point # Manual pull switch trouble restore pi Exp. ID FJ Point #

    Fjnnxxpppp

    3 373 Exp. ID Point # Manual release switch alarm (Water Release Zone) pi Exp. ID FA Point #

    Fannxxpppp

    1 110 Exp. ID Point # Manual release switch alarm restore (Water Release Zone) pi Exp. ID FH Point #

    Fhnnxxpppp

    3 110 Exp. ID Point # Manual release switch disabled pi Exp. ID FB Point #

    Fbnnxxpppp

    1 571 Exp. ID Point # Manual release switch enabled pi Exp. ID FU Point #

    Funnxxpppp

    3 571 Exp. ID Point # Manual release switch trouble (Water Release Zone) pi Exp. ID FT Point #

    Ftnnxxpppp

    1 373 Exp. ID Point # Manual release switch trouble restore (Water Release Zone) pi Exp. ID FJ Point #

    Fjnnxxpppp

    3 373 Exp. ID Point # Notification output point disabled pi Exp. ID FB Point #

    Fbnnxxpppp

    1 571 Exp. ID Point # Notification output point enabled pi Exp. ID FU Point #

    Funnxxpppp

    3 571 Exp. ID Point # Notification output point trouble pi Exp. ID FT Point #

    Ftnnxxpppp

    1 320 Exp. ID Point # Notification output point trouble restore pi Exp. ID FJ Point #

    Fjnnxxpppp

    3 320 Exp. ID Point # Positive Alarm Sequence acknowledge switch disabled pi Exp. ID FB Point #

    Fbnnxxpppp

    1 571 Exp. ID Point # Positive Alarm Sequence acknowledge switch enabled pi Exp. ID FU Point #

    Funnxxpppp

    3 571 Exp. ID Point # Positive Alarm Sequence acknowledge switch trouble pi Exp. ID FT Point #

    Ftnnxxpppp

    1 373 Exp. ID Point # Positive Alarm Sequence acknowledge switch trouble restore pi Exp. ID FJ Point #

    Fjnnxxpppp

    3 373 Exp. ID Point # Status Point Trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point #

    Utnnxxpppp

    1 379 Exp. ID Point # Status Point Trouble Restored pi Exp. ID UJ Point #

    Ujnnxxpppp

    3 379 Exp. ID Point # Status Point is Disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point #

    Ubnnxxpppp

    1 580 Exp. ID Point # Status Point is Enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point #

    Uunnxxpppp

    3 580 Exp. ID Point # Supervisory/Tamper Alarm pi Exp. ID FS Point #

    Fsnnxxpppp

    1 200 Exp. ID Point # Supervisory/Tamper Alarm Restore pi Exp. ID FR Point #

    Frnnxxpppp

    3 200 Exp. ID Point # Supervisory/Tamper point disabled pi Exp. ID FB Point #

    Fbnnxxpppp

    1 571 Exp. ID Point # Supervisory/Tamper point enabled pi Exp. ID FU Point #

    Funnxxpppp

    3 571 Exp. ID Point # Supervisory/Tamper point trouble pi Exp. ID FT Point #

    Ftnnxxpppp

    1 373 Exp. ID Point # Supervisory/Tamper point trouble restore pi Exp. ID FJ Point #

    Fjnnxxpppp

    3 373 Exp. ID Point # SIA Reporting Format Contact ID Reporting Format SIA pi Modifier

    Sia

    Event Description Module ID # (If Any)

    Sia

    Event Codes Parameter Fixed Length Format NN - panel ID

    Xx- Sbus Id

    ZZZ- Zone # PPPP- Point # GGG- Group # E- Emergency # RRRR-Receiver # Qualifier Event Code Group # Contact # Table 11.2 Reporting Formats Table (Continued)

    Page 145

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 145 Receivers Compatible with the Control Panel Reporting System-based AUX1 switch alarm pi Exp. ID UA Point #

    Uannxxpppp

    1 140 Exp. ID Point # System-based AUX1 switch alarm restore pi Exp. ID UH Point #

    Uhnnxxpppp

    3 140 Exp. ID Point # System-based AUX1 switch disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point #

    Ubnnxxpppp

    1 571 Exp. ID Point # System-based AUX1 switch enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point #

    Uunnxxpppp

    3 571 Exp. ID Point # System-based AUX1 switch trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point #

    Utnnxxpppp

    1 373 Exp. ID Point # System-based AUX1 switch trouble restore pi Exp. ID UJ Point #

    Ujnnxxpppp

    3 373 Exp. ID Point # System-based AUX2 switch alarm pi Exp. ID UA Point #

    Uannxxpppp

    1 140 Exp. ID Point # System-based AUX2 switch alarm restore pi Exp. ID UH Point #

    Uhnnxxpppp

    3 140 Exp. ID Point # System-based AUX2 switch disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point #

    Ubnnxxpppp

    1 571 Exp. ID Point # System-based AUX2 switch enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point #

    Uunnxxpppp

    3 571 Exp. ID Point # System-based AUX2 switch trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point #

    Utnnxxpppp

    1 373 Exp. ID Point # System-based AUX2 switch trouble restore pi Exp. ID UJ Point #

    Ujnnxxpppp

    3 373 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux EVS 1 Point Alarm pi Exp. ID UA (3PPP) PPP - Point #

    Uannxx3Ppp

    1 171 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux EVS 1 Point Alarm Restore pi Exp. ID UH (3PPP) PPP - Point #

    Uhnnxx3Ppp

    3 171 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux EVS 2 Point Alarm pi Exp. ID UA (4PPP) PPP - Point #

    Uannxx4Ppp

    1 172 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux EVS 2 Point Alarm Restore pi Exp. ID UH (4PPP) PPP - Point #

    Uhnnxx4Ppp

    3 172 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux EVS 3 Point Alarm pi Exp. ID UA (5PPP) PPP - Point #

    Uannxx5Ppp

    1 173 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux EVS 3 Point Alarm Restore pi Exp. ID UH (5PPP) PPP - Point #

    Uhnnxx5Ppp

    3 173 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux EVS 4 Point Alarm pi Exp. ID UA (6PPP) PPP - Point #

    Uannxx6Ppp

    1 174 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux EVS 4 Point Alarm Restore pi Exp. ID UH (6PPP) PPP - Point #

    Uhnnxx6Ppp

    3 174 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux EVS Point Trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point #

    Utnnxxpppp

    1 379 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux EVS Point Trouble Restore pi Exp. ID UJ Point #

    Ujnnxxpppp

    3 379 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux EVS Point Disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point #

    Ubnnxxpppp

    1 580 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux EVS Point Enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point #

    Uunnxxpppp

    3 580 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux Status 1 Switch is Trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point #

    Utnnxxpppp

    1 379 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux Status 1 Switch is Trouble Restored pi Exp. ID UJ Point #

    Ujnnxxpppp

    3 379 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux Status 1 Switch is Disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point #

    Ubnxxpppp

    1 580 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux Status 1 Switch is Enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point #

    Uunxxpppp

    3 580 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux Status 2 Switch is Trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point #

    Utnnxxpppp

    1 379 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux Status 2 Switch is Trouble Restored pi Exp. ID UJ Point #

    Ujnnxxpppp

    3 379 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux Status 2 Switch is Disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point #

    Ubnnxxpppp

    1 580 Exp. ID Point # Voice Aux Status 2 Switch is Enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point #

    Uunnxxpppp

    3 580 Exp. ID Point # Water flow switch alarm pi Exp. ID SA Point #

    Sannxxpppp

    1 113 Exp. ID Point # Water flow switch alarm restore pi Exp. ID SH Point #

    Shnnxxpppp

    3 113 Exp. ID Point # SIA Reporting Format Contact ID Reporting Format SIA pi Modifier

    Sia

    Event Description Module ID # (If Any)

    Sia

    Event Codes Parameter Fixed Length Format NN - panel ID

    Xx- Sbus Id

    ZZZ- Zone # PPPP- Point # GGG- Group # E- Emergency # RRRR-Receiver # Qualifier Event Code Group # Contact # Table 11.2 Reporting Formats Table (Continued)

    Page 146

    146 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Reporting Receivers Compatible with the Control Panel Water flow switch disabled pi Exp. ID SB Point #

    Sbnnxxpppp

    1 571 Exp. ID Point # Water flow switch enabled pi Exp. ID SU Point #

    Sunnxxpppp

    3 571 Exp. ID Point # Water flow switch trouble pi Exp. ID ST Point #

    Stnnxxpppp

    1 373 Exp. ID Point # Water flow switch trouble restore pi Exp. ID SJ Point #

    Sjnnxxpppp

    3 373 Exp. ID Point # Zone-based AUX1 switch alarm pi Exp. ID UA Point #

    Uannxxpppp

    1 140 Exp. ID Point # Zone-based AUX1 switch alarm restore pi Exp. ID UH Point #

    Uhnnxxpppp

    3 140 Exp. ID Point # Zone-based AUX1 switch disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point #

    Ubnnxxpppp

    1 571 Exp. ID Point # Zone-based AUX1 switch enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point #

    Uunnxxpppp

    3 571 Exp. ID Point # Zone-based AUX1 switch trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point #

    Utnnxxpppp

    1 373 Exp. ID Point # Zone-based AUX1 switch trouble restore pi Exp. ID UJ Point #

    Ujnnxxpppp

    3 373 Exp. ID Point # Zone-based AUX2 switch alarm pi Exp. ID UA Point #

    Uannxxpppp

    1 140 Exp. ID Point # Zone-based AUX2 switch alarm restore pi Exp. ID UH Point #

    Uhnnxxpppp

    3 140 Exp. ID Point # Zone-based AUX2 switch disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point #

    Ubnnxxpppp

    1 571 Exp. ID Point # Zone-based AUX2 switch enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point #

    Uunnxxpppp

    3 571 Exp. ID Point # Zone-based AUX2 switch trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point #

    Utnnxxpppp

    1 373 Exp. ID Point # Zone-based AUX2 switch trouble restore pi Exp. ID UJ Point #

    Ujnnxxpppp

    3 373 Exp. ID Point # System-based Wireless Gateway Trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point #

    Utnnxxpppp

    1 373 Exp. ID Point # System-based Wireless Gateway Trouble - restore pi Exp. ID UJ Point #

    Ujnnxxpppp

    3 373 Exp. ID Point # Wireless Gateway Trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point #

    Utnnxxpppp

    1 373 Exp. ID Point # Wireless Gateway Trouble restore pi Exp. ID UJ Point #

    Ujnnxxpppp

    3 373 Exp. ID Point # SIA Reporting Format Contact ID Reporting Format SIA pi Modifier

    Sia

    Event Description Module ID # (If Any)

    Sia

    Event Codes Parameter Fixed Length Format NN - panel ID

    Xx- Sbus Id

    ZZZ- Zone # PPPP- Point # GGG- Group # E- Emergency # RRRR-Receiver # Qualifier Event Code Group # Contact # Table 11.2 Reporting Formats Table (Continued)

    Page 147

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 147 SIA - Panel PI Modifier Reporting Reporting 11.2 SIA - Panel PI Modifier Reporting Events are sent to the central station as a variable length string: The event format is:

    Eezzzz

    Where: EE Event code (2 characters) ZZZZ Event parameter (up to four digits – not zero filled)
  • The account number is sent using an account block that is separate from the event block
  • Multiple events can be sent within a single event block. Events are separated by a “/” character.
  • Event parameter can be either a zone, point or module number.
  • When reporting by point is enabled, the communicator uses a “pi” event to supersedes the actual point event to report the module the
  • point is linked to.
  • Panel ID is not sent in the SIA event parameters.
  • For Example see Table 11.3: Event Report Zone/ Point Panel

    Id

    Module Zone

    Zzzz

    Point

    Zzzz

    Fields Sent SIA Event Data Fire Alarm-Zone Zone n/a n/a97 15 n/a

    Ee-Zz

    Fa15

    Fire Alarm-Zone Zone n/a n/a 05 n/a

    Ee-Z

    Fa5

    Fire Alarm-Point Point n/a 01 n/a 123 EE-ZZ /EE-ZZZ pi01/FA123 Fire Alarm-Point Point n/a 33 n/a 203 EE-ZZ /EE-ZZZ pi11/FA203 Expander Trouble n/a n/a 11 n/a n/a

    Ee-Zz

    Et11

    Auto Test n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

    Ee-Z

    Rp0

    Battery Trouble-Panel 32 n/a n/a 98 n/a n/a

    Ee-Zz

    Yt98

    Battery Trouble-Expander 18 n/a n/a 18 n/a n/a

    Ee-Zz

    Yt18

    SLC Loop Shorted n/a n/a 44 n/a n/a

    Ee-Zz

    Et44

    Program Begin Panel ID=32 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

    Ee-Z

    Lb0

    Program Begin Panel ID= 22 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

    Ee-Z

    Lb0

    AC Power Loss - Panel 22 n/a n/a 98 n/a n/a

    Ee-Z

    At0

    Fire Trouble Point n/a 97 n/a 200 EE-ZZ /EE-ZZZ pi97/FT200 Fire Trouble Zone n/a 97 01 n/a

    Ee-Z

    Ft1

    Fire Trouble-Nac Point n/a 98 n/a Nac Circuit 7 EE-ZZ /EE-Z pi98/FT7 Z=Pt. # Fire Trouble-Nac Zone n/a 98 n/a Nac Circuit 7 EE-ZZZ

    Ft400

    Zzz=Opg#

    Table 11.3 SIA- Panel - PI Modifier Reporting Examples

    Page 148

    148 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Reporting SIA – Panel Communicator 11.3 SIA – Panel Communicator (Differences/additional features are underlined) Events are sent to the Central Station Receiver as a fixed length string: The event format is:

    Eeppmmzzzz

    Where EE Event code (2 characters) PP Panel number (2 digits – Zero Filled) (valid range from 1 to 64) MM Module number (2 digits – Zero Filled) (valid range from 1 to 98, typically Module information) ZZZZ Event parameter (4 digits – Zero Filled) (typically Point, Zone or Circuit information)
  • The Event field will contain 10 digits including the 2 digit event code (EE), 2 digit panel ID (PP), 2 digit Module Number (MM) and a
  • 4 digit Event Parameter (ZZZZ).
  • Based on the actual Event Code, the Module Number or Event Parameter fields might not contain pertinent information. In that case the
  • field will contain zeros.
  • The account number is sent using an account block that is separate from the event block.
  • Multiple events can be sent within a single event block. Events are separated by a “/” character.
  • Event parameter can be a Zone, Point or Circuit Number.
  • “pi” modifier event is not used.
  • Panel can be set to report by either Point or Zone.
  • For examples see Table 11.4 below. Event Report Zone/ Point Panel ID

    Pp

    Module

    Mm

    Zone

    Zzzz

    Point

    Zzzz

    Fields Sent SIA Event Data Fire Alarm-Zone Zone 32 n/a 15 n/a

    Ee-Pp-Mm-Zzzz

    Fa32000015

    Fire Alarm-Zone Zone 32 n/a 05 n/a

    Ee-Pp-Mm-Zzzz

    Fa32000005

    Fire Alarm-Point Point 32 01 n/a 123

    Ee-Pp-Mm-Zzzz

    Fa32010123

    Fire Alarm-Point Point 21 33 n/a 203

    Ee-Pp-Mm-Zzzz

    Fa21330203

    Expander Trouble n/a 15 11 n/a n/a

    Ee-Pp-Mm-Zzzz

    Et15110000

    Auto Test n/a 32 n/a n/a n/a

    Ee-Pp-Mm-Zzzz

    Rp32000000

    Battery Trouble-Panel 32 n/a 32 98 n/a n/a

    Ee-Pp-Mm-Zzzz

    Yt32980000

    Battery Trouble-Expander 18 n/a 32 18 n/a n/a

    Ee-Pp-Mm-Zzzz

    Yt32180000

    SLC Loop Shorted n/a 01 44 n/a n/a

    Ee-Pp-Mm-Zzzz

    Et01440000

    Program Begin n/a 32 n/a n/a n/a

    Ee-Pp-Mm-Zzzz

    Lb32000000

    Program Begin n/a 22 n/a n/a n/a

    Ee-Pp-Mm-Zzzz

    Lb22000000

    AC Power Loss- Panel 22 n/a 22 98 n/a n/a

    Ee-Pp-Mm-Zzzz

    At22980000

    Mm = 00

    Fire Trouble Point 22 97 n/a 200

    Ee-Pp-Mm-Zzzz

    Ft22970200

    Fire Trouble Zone 22 97 1 n/a

    Ee-Pp-Mm-Zzzz

    Ft22970001

    Mm = 00

    Fire Trouble-NAC Point 22 98 n/a NAC Circuit 7 EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ

    Ft22980007

    ZZZZ=Pt. # Fire Trouble-NAC Zone 22 98 n/a NAC Circuit 7 EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ

    Ft22980007

    Zzzz=Opg #

    Table 11.4 SIA Reporting Examples

    Page 149

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 149 Section 12: Testing and Troubleshooting 12.1 Troubleshooting This section of the manual offers suggestions for troubleshooting hardware problems. Please read this section if you encounter a problem when installing the control panel. If these suggestions do not solve your problem or if you encounter a problem that is not listed here, contact Silent Knight Technical Support at 800.446.6444 for assistance. 12.1.1 Common Problems 12.2 Periodic Testing and Maintenance To ensure proper and reliable operation, it is recommended that system inspection and testing be scheduled monthly or as required by national and/or local fire codes. Testing should be done by a qualified service representative if a malfunction is encountered. Before Testing

  • Notify the fire department and/or central alarm receiving station.
  • Notify facility personnel of a test so that alarm sounding devices are ignored during the test period.
  • When necessary, activation of Notification Appliances can be prevented by the DISABLE function.
  • Testing
  • Activate a input via an alarm initiating device and check that the correct outputs activate (Notification Appliances sound/flash, relays
  • activate, alarm indicator lights). Reset system. Repeat for each alarm initiating device.
  • Momentarily open the following circuits one at a time and check for a trouble sign:
  • Problem Possible Cause / Suggested Actions Trouble message “DBL ADDR” (Double Address) displays on

    Lcd.

    An address has been assigned to more than one detector. Correct the address following the procedure described for SK and SD devices in the SLC Wiring Manual. Auxiliary power or notification circuits have incorrect polarity. Correct polarity. For notification and auxiliary power circuits: When in alarm or powered, terminals labeled “X” are positive, terminals labeled “O” are negative. SLC devices are not being recognized (trouble message “Missing” displays). Check hardware connections. If devices are physically connected, make sure wiring is correct. Refer to the SLC Wiring Manual. For 6815 and 5815XL devices, make sure the device connects to the 6815 and 5815XL via the SLC OUT terminals. There can be only one SLC loop on the main panel and on each 6815 and 5815XL module. Do not connect devices to terminals labeled SLC IN. Make sure SLC devices have been addressed properly. For information on device addressing, refer to the SLC Wiring Manual. For contact monitor modules, which are addressed using DIP switches, the DIP switch must be set to the correct address before power is applied to the SLC loop. If this procedure is not followed, the device will have an incorrect address. Make sure correct polarity has been observed for SLC device wiring. For information on wiring, refer to the SLC Wiring Manual. SLC devices are not being recognized (trouble message “Missing” displays on the annunciator). Check that SLC loop impedance is within the required range. To measure impedance, use the following procedure:
  • Disconnect both wires from the terminal block at the panel (SLC devices can remain connected).
  • Measure the impedance from positive to negative and from negative to positive. Both measurements should
  • be greater than 500 k ohms. If the installation uses T-taps, test each T-tap individually.
  • Temporarily connect the positive wire to the negative wire of the SLC loop at the point farthest from the panel
  • (SLC devices can remain connected).
  • Measure the impedance from positive to negative and from negative to positive wires that were disconnected
  • from the panel in step 1. Both measurements must be less than 50 ohms. The panel indicates a ground fault trouble condition (trouble message “GROUND FAULT” displays). An earth ground fault occurs when the panel senses an unexpected flow of current from one or more of its terminals to the earth connection (Terminal 2). Isolate the wiring that is causing the fault by removing wiring connections one at a time until the earth fault is no longer present. Pause at least five seconds after removing a wire before removing the next one. The panel will also go into ground fault if a computer is connected to the panel via a serial cable attached to the panel’s 9-pin connector or a USB cable. This is a correct method for on-site communication between a panel and a computer. Ignore the ground fault message in this case. The trouble will clear automatically when you disconnect the computer from the cable. 5496, 6815, or 5815XL module that has been physically connected to the panel but is not being recognized. Check the status of the module’s green LED. If it flashes in the pattern half second on/ half second off, it is likely that the device has not been added to the system through programming. JumpStart will add any modules connected to the panel. If you have already run JumpStart, modules can be added manually. (Refer to Section 8.2.2). Check that the correct ID for the module has been set through the DIP switches. Assign ID#1 to the first module and ID#2 to the second. If the wiring between the device and the panel is correct, measure the voltage from the Terminal (+) to Terminal (-). Voltage should be in the range 27.2-27.4V when AC power is present. If the green LED is not flashing, the likely cause is incorrect wiring from between the device and the panel. Table 12.1 Troubleshooting

    Page 150

    150 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Testing and Troubleshooting Event History • Notification Appliance Circuits • Initiating devices

  • If new batteries were installed, wait 48 hours before completing this step. Remove AC power, activate initiating device and check that:
  • • The alarm indicator lights. • All active Notification Appliances sound. Measure battery voltage while the Notification Appliances are sounding. Replace any battery with terminal voltage less than 85% of rating. Reapply AC power and reset the system. 12.3 Event History The event history can be useful for tracking or recalling a trouble condition. To view event history:
  • Login to the panel.
  • Press 3 to select Event History.
  • Press the up or down arrow key to view events in the history buffer.
  • 12.4 Built-in Troubleshooting and Testing Tools The fire control panel has several built-in testing and troubleshooting tools that can be utilized to save time while testing and troubleshooting points and SLC devices. 12.4.1 SLC Device Locater SLC device locater can be used to locate a device on a SLC loop. Follow these steps to locate a particular SLC device:
  • Select 2 for Point Functions from the Main Menu.
  • Select 4 for SLC Single Device Locater.
  • A message similar to the one shown below will display.
  • Press ENTER to accept, or left arrow to Exit.
  • If left arrow is chosen you will exit back to the Point Function menu. If ENTER is chosen the system will cease normal operation leaving the premise unprotected.
  • Select the SLC loop.
  • Enter the SLC address of the device you wish to locate.
  • The LED on the selected device will start flashing.
  • Press left arrow key to exit the SLC Device Locater.
  • 12.4.2 SLC Multiple Device Locater This feature is the same as SLC Single Device Locater, except you can locate up to 8 devices on a single search. Follow these instructions to locate multiple SLC devices:
  • Select 2 for Point Functions from the Main Menu.
  • Select 5 for SLC Multiple Device Locater.
  • A message similar to the one shown below will display.
  • Press ENTER to accept, or left arrow to Exit.
  • If left arrow is chosen you will exit back to the Point Function menu. If ENTER is chosen the system will cease normal operation leaving the premise unprotected. System will be shut down during SLC device locating: Continue? NO Figure 12.1 Shut Down Warning

    Note:

    Once you exit, the system will resume normal operation. System will be shut down during SLC device locating: Continue? NO Figure 12.2 Shut Down Warning

    Page 151

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 151 Built-in Troubleshooting and Testing Tools Testing and Troubleshooting

  • Select the SLC loop.
  • Enter up to 8 SLC addresses for the devices you wish to locate.
  • The LEDs on the selected devices will start flashing.
  • Press the left arrow key to exit SLC Multiple Device Locater.
  • 12.4.3 I/O Point Control This feature allows you to toggle any output on or off and trip any input device. This can be useful to test a point’s output mapping. I/O Point Control can only be accessed if enabled in the user profile. Follow these steps to control an I/O point:
  • Select 2 (Point Functions) from the Main Menu.
  • Select 6 (I/O Point Control).
  • Select the module the point is on.
  • Make any selections specific to the module selected in the previous step.
  • Use the up or down arrow key to select the point you wish to test.
  • Press ENTER to toggle (Active/Inactive) Output.
  • Press the left arrow key to exit.
  • 12.4.4 Earth Fault Resistance Table 12.2 lists the earth fault resistance detection for each applicable terminal on the FACP.

    Note:

    Once you exit, the system will resume normal operation. Function Terminal Label Low Biased High Biased (Values in Ohms) High Trip High Restore Low Trip Low Restore Flexput Notification Circuits

    X

    I/O 6

  • -
  • 0 0

    O

    0 0
  • -
  • X

    I/O 5

  • -
  • 0 0

    O

    0 0
  • -
  • Notification Circuits –

    Nac 4

  • -
  • 0 0 + 0 0
  • -
  • Nac 3

  • -
  • 0 0 + 0 0
  • -
  • Nac 2

  • -
  • 0 0 + 0 0
  • -
  • Nac 1

  • -
  • 0 0 + 0 0
  • -
  • SBUS Communication

    B

    Sbus Out

  • -
  • 0 0

    A

  • -
  • 0 0 SBUS Power + 0 0
  • -
  • -
  • 0
  • 0 SBUS Communication

    B

    Sbus In

  • -
  • 0 0

    A

  • -
  • 0 0 SBUS Power + 0 0
  • -
  • -
  • 0
  • 0 SLC Terminals

    Sc-

    Slc Out

  • -
  • 0 0

    S+

    0 0
  • -
  • Sc-

    Slc In

  • -
  • 0 0

    S+

    0 0
  • -
  • Ext. Comm

    B

  • -
  • 0 0

    A

  • -
  • 0 0 + 0 0
  • -
  • -
  • 0
  • 0 Any wire to wire fault impedance is 0 ohms. Table 12.2 Earth Fault Resistance Detection Chart

    Page 152

    152 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Notes

    Page 153

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 153 Section 13: Installation Records This section of the manual is for you to use if you wish to track how points, zones, and groups have been programmed. 13.1 Detector and Module Point Record If installing SK SLC devices, use Table 13.1 to record detector points (up to 159 per SLC loop) installed on the onboard SLC loop and make a copy of Table 13.2 to record installed modules (up to 159 per SLC loop). Module Address Zone / Group Description Module Address Zone/ Group Description Onboard 1 Onboard 2 Onboard 3 Onboard 4 Onboard 5 Onboard 6 Onboard 7 Onboard 8 Onboard 9 Onboard 10 Onboard 11 Onboard 12 Onboard 13 Onboard 14 Onboard 15 Onboard 16 Onboard 17 Onboard 18 Onboard 19 Onboard 20 Onboard 21 Onboard 22 Onboard 23 Onboard 24 Onboard 25 Onboard 26 Onboard 27 Onboard 28 Onboard 29 Onboard 30 Onboard 31 Onboard 32 Onboard 33 Onboard 34 Onboard 35 Onboard 36 Onboard 37 Onboard 38 Onboard 39 Onboard 40 Onboard 41 Onboard 42 Onboard 43 Onboard 44 Onboard 45 Onboard 46 Onboard 47 Onboard 48 Onboard 49 Onboard 50 Onboard 51 Onboard 52 Onboard 53 Onboard 54 Onboard 55 Onboard 56 Onboard 57 Onboard 58 Onboard 59 Onboard 60 Onboard 61 Onboard 62 Onboard 63 Onboard 64 Onboard 65 Onboard 66 Onboard 67 Onboard 68 Onboard 69 Onboard 70 Onboard 71 Onboard 72 Onboard 73 Onboard 74 Onboard 75 Onboard 76 Onboard 77 Onboard 78 Onboard 79 Onboard 80 Onboard 81 Onboard 82 Onboard 83 Onboard 84 Onboard 85 Onboard 86 Onboard 87 Onboard 88 Table 13.1 Installation Record of Onboard Devices

    Page 154

    154 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Installation Records Detector and Module Point Record Onboard 89 Onboard 90 Onboard 91 Onboard 92 Onboard 93 Onboard 94 Onboard 95 Onboard 96 Onboard 97 Onboard 98 Onboard 99 Onboard 100 Onboard 101 Onboard 102 Onboard 103 Onboard 104 Onboard 105 Onboard 106 Onboard 107 Onboard 108 Onboard 109 Onboard 110 Onboard 111 Onboard 112 Onboard 113 Onboard 114 Onboard 115 Onboard 116 Onboard 117 Onboard 118 Onboard 119 Onboard 120 Onboard 121 Onboard 122 Onboard 123 Onboard 124 Onboard 125 Onboard 126 Onboard 127 Onboard 128 Onboard 129 Onboard 130 Onboard 131 Onboard 132 Onboard 133 Onboard 134 Onboard 135 Onboard 136 Onboard 137 Onboard 138 Onboard 139 Onboard 140 Onboard 141 Onboard 142 Onboard 143 Onboard 144 Onboard 145 Onboard 146 Onboard 147 Onboard 148 Onboard 149 Onboard 150 Onboard 151 Onboard 152 Onboard 153 Onboard 154 Onboard 155 Onboard 156 Onboard 157 Onboard 158 Onboard 159 Module Address Zone / Group Description Module Address Zone/ Group Description Table 13.1 Installation Record of Onboard Devices (Continued)

    Page 155

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 155 Additional SLC Devices Installation Records 13.2 Additional SLC Devices Use the table below to record devices installed on additional 6815/5815XL modules. Make a copy of this page if additional pages are needed. Module Addr Zone / Group Description Module Addr Zone/ Group Description Table 13.2 Installation Record of Devices Installed on 6815/5815XL

    Page 156

    156 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Installation Records Conventional Output Point Record 13.3 Conventional Output Point Record This chart can be used to keep track of how conventional output points (circuits) have been configured. Point/Circuit Group Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

    Page 157

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 157 Appendix A: Editing Text Using the Built-In Programmer This section contains tables of programmable characters that may be used for device, module, site, template, group, and zone names or phone numbers. T9 style editing is used. A.1 Characters Used for Editing Text Table A.1 lists the available characters and their associated numeric designator. When programming:

  • Use the Up or Down arrow key to scroll to the mode wanted.
  • Press the number shown in Table A.1 until the character wanted is shown.
  • Arrow left and right for position, and press enter to accept.
  • A.2 Example Name Edit
  • Press the up or down arrow to select upper case letters mode, Press 2 until “F” appears.
  • Press the up or down arrow to change mode to lower case letters, Press 3 until “i” appears.
  • Press 6 until “r” appears.
  • Press 2 until “e” appears.
  • Press 0 to space, then continue to next word using the same process.
  • Press ENTER to accept.
  • Lower Case Letters abc 1 def 2 ghi 3 jkl 4 mno 5 pqr 6 stu 7 vwx 8 yz 9 Spc 0 Upper Case Letters

    Abc 1

    Def 2

    Ghi 3

    Jkl 4

    Mno 5

    Pqr 6

    Stu 7

    Vwx 8

    Yz 9

    Spc 0 Numbers and Special Characters 1 [ ] 1 2 ( ) 2 3 . , 3 4 : ; 4 5 ’ " 5 6 ? ! 6 7 ‘ / 7 8 – + 8 9 = - 9 0 0
  • & @ *
  • $ #

    Table A.1 Character Table

    Note:

    After three seconds of no change, a letter will automatically be accepted. Also, pressing the next number will automatically accept the previous choice. Fire Door 1[abc] 2[def] 3[ghi] 4[jkl] 5[mno] 6[pqr] Enter: Accept Fire Door 7[stu] 8[vwx] 9[yz ] 0[Spc] left/right: position up/down: mode Figure A.1 Edit Name Example _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

    Page 158

    158 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Appendix B: Expanded Receiver/Panel Relationship The available receiver number will correspond with what panel number you entered. Receiver numbers are populated based on panel number and audited to allow only the 4 appropriate receivers. See Section 6.2.6. Panel Available Receiver Numbers 1 1 2 3 4 2 5 6 7 8 3 9 10 11 12 4 13 14 15 16 5 17 18 19 20 6 21 22 23 24 7 25 26 27 28 8 29 30 31 32 9 33 34 35 36 10 37 38 39 40 11 41 42 43 44 12 45 46 47 48 13 49 50 51 52 14 53 54 55 56 15 57 58 59 60 16 61 62 63 64 17 65 66 67 68 Table B.1 Receiver/Panel Relationship

    Page 159

    6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 159 Appendix C: Cadence Patterns Table C.1 shows the cadence patterns available for use with the control panel. # Name Pattern Description (Patterns repeat until condition is cleared.) 00 Constant Continuous sound (This is the only pattern that can be used for relay circuits. The system will override any other choice.) 01 March Time 0.5 second on, 0.5 second off 02

    Ansi 3.41

    0.5 sec on, 0.5 sec off, 0.5 sec on, 0.5 sec off, 0.5 sec on, 1.5 sec off 03 Single Stroke 0.1 sec on, 1 sec off, 0.1 sec on, 1 sec off, 0.1 sec on, 3 sec off 04 California 5 sec on, 10 sec off 05 Zone-coded, Zone 1 0.5 sec on, 0.5 sec off This pattern is multiplied by the zone number in alarm, followed by 3 seconds off. For example, Pattern 6, Zone 2 coded: (pattern x two): 0.5 sec on, 0.5 sec off, 0.5 sec on, 0.5 sec off, 3 sec off 06 Zone-coded, Zone 2 07 Zone-coded, Zone 3 08 Zone-coded, Zone 4 09 Zone-coded, Zone 5 10 Zone-coded, Zone 6 11 Zone-coded, Zone 7 12 Zone-coded, Zone 8 13 Zone-coded, Custom 1 14 Zone-coded, Custom 2 15 Zone-coded, Custom 3 16 Zone-coded, Custom 4 17 Sync Type- Faraday (N/A) These outputs provide synchronization for Gentex, System Sensor, Wheelock, or AMESECO synchronized appliances. 18 Sync Type- Gentex 19 Sync Type- System Sensor 20 Sync Type- Wheelock 21 Sync Type- AMSECO 22 Power Isolated Disconnected. No voltage at terminals. 23 Temporal 4 0.1 sec on, 0.1 sec off, 0.1 sec on, 0.1 sec off, 0.1 sec on, 0.1 sec off, 0.1 sec on, 5 sec off, Table C.1 Cadence Patterns

    Page 160

    160 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 Appendix D: Panel Security Panel Installation / Maintenance Security Checklist System Description: ________________________________________________________________ System Location: __________________________________________________________________ Installer: _________________________________________________ Date: ___________________ Complete the following Cybersecurity Tasks for Each Panel Installation • Install the panel in a secure location considering both software and hardware vulnerabilities. • Change the default password to a unique password. • Securely configure networks and firewalls. • Assess security risks. • Develop a Disaster and Recovery Plan. • Develop a Backup and Recovery Strategy. • Install, configure and keep anti virus software updated on all computers which access the panel. • Keep operating system updated on all computers which access the panel. • Deliver all required system information upon delivery to the system owner. • Train end-users on security maintenance tasks upon system delivery. • For decommissioning, dispose of data securely. • Ensure the Ethernet cable is removed from the FACP when not being utilized for configuration or for reporting purposes. Security and Data Protection Communication Security - Level 1 Stored Data Security - Level 0 Physical Security - Level 1 Access Control Security - Level 1

    Page 161

    Cut along dotted line. Model 6820 Basic Operating Instructions These Instructions must be framed and displayed next to the 6820 panel in accordance with NFPA 72 fire code for Local Protected Fire Alarm Systems. Test the system in accordance to NFPA 72. P/N LS10160-001SK-E Rev B ECN: 151062 Operation Task to Perform Silence Alarms and Troubles Press SILENCE and then enter a code if prompted. The Silence LED will light. Reset Alarms Press RESET and then enter a code if prompted. View Alarms, Supervisories, and Troubles For each type of condition press the Up or Down button associated for Alarms, Supervisories, or Troubles. View Point Status

  • Login to the panel.
  • Press 2 to select Point Functions.
  • Press 2 to select Point Status.
  • Select the desired module by using the Up or Down button. Then press ENTER.
  • Enter the point number.
  • Conduct a Fire Drill Hold the DRILL button and then enter a code if prompted. OR
  • Login to the panel.
  • Then Press 1 to select System Tests.
  • Press 1 to select Fire Drill.
  • Press ENTER to start the fire drill. Press ENTER to end the fire drill.
  • Check Detector Sensitivity
  • Login to the panel.
  • Press 2 for Point Status.
  • From the list that displays, select the SLC module where the desired point is
  • located.
  • The fourth line of the display shows the sensitivity status.
  • “NORMAL” means the detector is in compliance with NFPA 72. “CAL MAINT” means the detector is in compliance with NFPA 72 but maintenance should be performed soon. “CAL TRBLE” means the detector is not in compliance with NFPA 72. Set Time and Date
  • Login to the panel.
  • Press 4 to select Set Time & Date.
  • Make changes in the fields on the screen as necessary.
  • When the time and date are correct, press ENTER.
  • Enable / Disable a Point
  • Login to the panel.
  • Press 2 to select Point Functions.
  • Press 1 for Disable / Enable Pt
  • Press 7 for Disable / Enable Pt.
  • Use the Up or Down button to move through the list. Then press ENTER to select
  • the module where the desired point is located.
  • Enter the point or circuit number that you want to disable/enable.
  • Press the right arrow key to toggle between NORMAL (enable) or DISABLE.
  • View Event History
  • Login to the panel.
  • Press 3 to select Event History.
  • Press the Up or Down button to view events in the history buffer.
  • For Service Call:

    Fire: Alrm Supr Trbl

    Co: Alrm Supr

    Sys: Trbl

    Fire: Alarm

    Waterflow Sw Zone_1 1 of 1 Info>

    Page 162

    Cut along dotted line.

    Page 163

    Cut along dotted line. Model 6820EVS Basic Operating Instructions These Instructions must be framed and displayed next to the 6820EVS panel in accordance with NFPA 72 fire code for Local Protected Fire Alarm Systems. Test the system in accordance to NFPA 72. P/N LS10161-001SK-E Rev B 151062 Operation Task to Perform Silence Alarms and Troubles Press SILENCE and then enter a code if prompted. The Silence LED will light. Reset Alarms

  • Press RESET and then enter a code if prompted.
  • Press 1 to reset the Fire System or 2 to reset the Emergency Communication
  • System. To reset the EVS at an LOC, the user must gain EVS Control (See Figure 1). View all active alarm, trouble, and supervisory signals The highest priority event will display first. Press the Down arrow to view location and type of alarm or trouble. View Point Status
  • Login to the panel.
  • Press 2 to select Point Functions.
  • Press 2 to select Point Status.
  • Select the desired module by using the Up or Down button. Then press ENTER.
  • Enter the point number.
  • Conduct a Fire Drill Hold the DRILL button and then enter a code if prompted. OR
  • Login to the panel.
  • Then Press 1 to select System Tests.
  • Press 1 to select Fire Drill.
  • Press ENTER to start the fire drill. Press ENTER to end the fire drill.
  • Set Time and Date
  • Login to the panel.
  • Press 4 to select Set Time & Date.
  • Make changes in the fields on the screen as necessary.
  • When the time and date are correct, press ENTER.
  • Enable / Disable a Point
  • Login to the panel.
  • Press 2 to select Point Functions.
  • Press 1 for Disable / Enable Pt
  • Press 7 for Disable / Enable Pt.
  • Use the Up or Down button to move through the list. Then press ENTER to select
  • the module where the desired point is located.
  • Enter the point or circuit number that you want to disable/enable.
  • Press the right arrow key to toggle between NORMAL (enable) or DISABLE.
  • To Gain / Request EVS Control Press the EVS Control Button and follow the on-screen Instructions. When the EVS Control LED is blinking, another LOC has EVS Control. The EVS Control LED is on steady when the LOC has EVS Control. For Service Call:

    Fire: Alarm Supervisory Trouble

    Co: Alarm Supervisory

    Emergency: Alarm Supervisory

    System: Trouble

    Page 164

    Cut along dotted line.

    Page 165

    Cut along dotted line. Keypad and LED Indicators

    Led

    Color State Definition Select Keys Red On The corresponding area is active for the EVS message currently playing Off The corresponding area is not active. Green On The corresponding area is active for the microphone. Off The corresponding area is not active for the microphone. Blink One or more associated network page destination panels are unable to output the page. EVS Control LED Green Blink When this LED is blinking, someone has requested control of the EVS System. On LOC has EVS Control and the user is able to make changes to the EVS. Off LOC does not have EVS Control. EVS Message LED Red On The corresponding EVS event was activated by an EVS device. Off The corresponding EVS event was not activated from this LOC. Green On The corresponding EVS event is active and was generated from the LOC (or was activated from another LOC, but this LOC now has EVS Control). LED Conditions

    All Call

    Ecs Control

    Non-Active

    Call

    Ready

    To Talk

    Front View of EVS Keypad All Call button Ready To Talk LED Non-Active Call button EVS Control

    Led

    EVS Control button output group select buttons EVS message 1-8 activate buttons EVS status/ alarm LEDs

    Page 166

    Cut along dotted line.

    Page 167

    Cut along dotted line. EVS Control

    How to Operate the Microphone:

  • Press the EVS Control Button.
  • Key the Microphone.
  • Press the All Call Button.
  • How to Reset the EVS System
  • Press The Reset Button.
  • Select 2 Reset emergency System.
  • EVS-RPU Operating Instruction For Live Message
  • Key the Microphone.
  • Press the All Call Key or select desired output area using Select Keys.
  • Deliver your verbal message.
  • For Pre-recorded Message Select desired EVS Message Key 1-8. • If EVS Control LED is on steady, the LOC has EVS Control. • If EVS Control LED is Blinking, another LOC has EVS Control. Operation Task Gain EVS Control at an LOC Press the EVS Control Key and enter a code if prompted. If EVS Control is available, the EVS Control LED will illuminate. If another LOC has EVS Control, the display will be similar to the one shown below. Press 1 to request control. The LOC with EVS Control will then be able to allow or deny the request. Gain EVS Control as an EVS Super User at an LOC (only one EVS Super User is allowed EVS Control in the system at a time). From the system idle screen, enter an EVS Super User access code and then press the EVS Control Key. If EVS Control as Super User is available, the EVS Control LED will illuminate. If another LOC has Super User EVS Control, a request for Super User EVS Control will automatically be made to the LOC with control. The LOC with Super User EVS Control will then be able to allow or deny the request. (See the figure below for screen display example.) Select all output groups for microphone override Key the microphone, wait for the Ready-to-Talk LED to light, press the All Call Key, and then deliver your verbal message. Select all non-activated output groups for microphone override Key the microphone, wait for the Ready-to-Talk LED to light, press the Non-Active Call Key, and then deliver your verbal message. EVS Control Request

    Gain Evs Control Options Menu

    1=Request EVS Control from LOC 2 Gain EVS Control as EVS Super User 3 Wait for Lockout Timer to Expire 30

    Page 168

    Cut along dotted line.

    Page 169

    Manufacturer Warranties and Limitation of Liability Manufacturer Warranties. Subject to the limitations set forth herein, Manufacturer warrants that the Products manufactured by it in its Northford, Connecticut facility and sold by it to its authorized Distributors shall be free, under normal use and service, from defects in material and workmanship for a period of thirty six months (36) months from the date of manufacture (effective Jan. 1, 2009). The Products manufactured and sold by Manufacturer are date stamped at the time of production. Manufacturer does not warrant Products that are not manufactured by it in its Northford, Connecticut facility but assigns to its Distributor, to the extent possible, any warranty offered by the manufacturer of such product. This warranty shall be void if a Product is altered, serviced or repaired by anyone other than Manufacturer or its authorized Distributors. This warranty shall also be void if there is a failure to maintain the Products and the systems in which they operate in proper working conditions.

    Manufacturer Makes No Further Warranties, And Disclaims Any

    And All Other Warranties, Either Expressed Or Implied, With

    Respect To The Products, Trademarks, Programs And Services

    Rendered

    By

    Manufacturer

    Including

    Without

    Limitation,

    Infringement, Title, Merchantability, Or Fitness For Any

    Particular Purpose. Manufacturer Shall Not Be Liable For Any

    Personal Injury Or Death Which May Arise In The Course Of, Or As

    A Result Of, Personal, Commercial Or Industrial Uses Of Its

    Products.

    This document constitutes the only warranty made by Manufacturer with respect to its products and replaces all previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Manufacturer. No increase or alteration, written or verbal, of the obligation of this warranty is authorized. Manufacturer does not represent that its products will prevent any loss by fire or otherwise. Warranty Claims. Manufacturer shall replace or repair, at Manufacturer's discretion, each part returned by its authorized Distributor and acknowledged by Manufacturer to be defective, provided that such part shall have been returned to Manufacturer with all charges prepaid and the authorized Distributor has completed Manufacturer's Return Material Authorization form. The replacement part shall come from Manufacturer's stock and may be new or refurbished. THE FOREGOING IS

    Distributor'S Sole And Exclusive Remedy In The Event Of A

    Warranty Claim.

    Warn-HL-08-2009.fm 6820/EVS Manual — P/N LS10144-001SK-E:E 4/6/2022 169

    Page 170

    Ls10144-001Sk-E | E | 04-22

    ©2022 Honeywell International Inc. Honeywell Silent Knight 12 Clintonville Road Northford, CT 06472-1610 203.484.7161 www.silentknight.com

    More from Honeywell